- III PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10515-0006-4200

m ....
DECEMBER 1995
Rev.-

,_r -............ S
RF COMMUNICATIONS

RF -5 20 0
FALCON™ SE RI ES
M AN PA CK TA CT IC AL
CO M M UN IC AT IO N
SY ST EM S
OP ER AT IO NS
M AN UA L
 PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10515-0006-4200
DECEMBER 1995
Rev.-

RF-5200
FALCON™ SERIES
MANPACK TACTICAL
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
OPERATIONS
MANUAL

Copyright e 1995
By Harris Corporation
All Rights Reserved

I) HARRIS

HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

1680 University Avenue Rochester, New York 14610-1887 USA
Tel: 716-244-5830. Fax: 716-244-2917, 716-325-1572. TELEX: 240313 RFCOM UR
 mHARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

When an Adult Stops Breathing

WARNING
00 NOT attempt to perform the rescue breathing techniques provided
on this page, unless certified. Performance of these techniques by
uncertified personnel could result in further injury or death to the victim.

1 Does the Person

Respond?
• Tap or gently shake
2 Shout, "Help!"
• Call people who can
victim. phone for help.
• Shout, "Are you OK?"

3 Roll Person
Onto Back
• Roll victim toward you
by pulling slowly.

4 Open Airway
• Tilt head back and lift
5 Check for
Breathing
• Look, listen, and feel
chin. for breathing for
3 to 5 seconds.

6 Give 2 Full
Breaths
• Keep head tilted back.
• Pinch nose shut.
• Seal your lips tight
around victim's mouth.
• Give 2 full breaths for
1 to 1-1/2 seconds each.

7 Check for Pulse

at Side of Neck 8 Phone for Help
• Send someone to call
• Feel for pulse for
5 to 10 seconds. an ambulance.

9
•
Begin Rescue
Breathing
Keep head tilted back.
10 Recheck Pulse
Every Minute
• Keep head tilted back.
• Lift chin. • Feel for pulse for
• Pinch nose shut. 5 to 10 seconds.
• Give 1 full breath • If victim has pulse but is
every 5 seconds. not breathing, continue
• Look, listen, and feel for rescue breathing. If no
breathing between pulse. begin CPR.
breaths.

For more information about these and other life-saving techniques. contact your Red Cross chapter for training.
·When Breathing Stops· reproduced with permission from an American Red Cross Poster.

Ii
IJHARRlS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms

Abbreviation Term
A,AMP Ampere(s)
ac,AC Alternating Current
ACE Advanced Crypto Engine
AID Analog-to-Digital Converter
ADC Analog-to-Digital Converter
ADDR Address
ADP Automated Data Processing
ADT Administrative Delay Time, Automated Data Tenninal
ADU Automatic Dialing Unit
AF Audio Frequency
AFC Automatic Frequency Control
AFSK Audio Frequency Shift Keying
A·G, A1G Air-to-Ground
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIC Analog Interface Chip
ALC Automatic Level Control
ALE Automatic Link Establishment
AMD Automatic Message Display
AME Amplitude Modulation Equivalent
ANT Antenna
ANTIVOX Voice-Operated Transmitter Key Inhibitor
API Analog Phase Interpolation
ARQ Automatic Repeat on Request
ASI Analog Signal Interface
ASK Amplitude Shift Keying
ATE Automatic Test Equipment
AUD Audio
AUX Auxiliary
AVS Analog Voice Security
AWG American Wire Gauge
BIA Buffer Amplifier

iii
 If HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - COntinued

Abbreviation Term
BC Broadcast, Binary Counter
BCD Binary-Coded Decimal
BD Baud, Binary Decoder
BER Bit Error Rate
BFO Beat-Frequency Oscillator
BIT Built-In Test
BITE Built-In Test Equipment
BPI Bits Per Inch
bps Bits Per Second
BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying
Btu British Thermal Unit
BW Bandwidth
CARC Chemical Agent Resistive Coating
CB Circuit Breaker
CCW Counterclockwise
CDR Critical Design Review
CDRL Contract Data Requirements List
CFE Contractor-Furnished Equipment
CH,CHAN Channel
CI Configuration Item
CKT Circuit
em Centimeter
CMOS Complimentary-Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
CNTL Control
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
CSM Crypto Synch Message
CTRL Control
CTS Clear to Send
CW Continuous Wave, Clockwise
D/A Digital-to-Analog Converter

Iv
;)lHARRlS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued

Abbreviation Term
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter
DAM Direct Access Memory
dB Decibel(s)
dBm Decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt
dc, DC Direct Current
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DE Data Encryption
Demod Demodulated
Diff Differential
Dip, DIP Dual In-Line Package
DMM Digital Multimeter
DP Double Pole
DPDT Double Pole, Double Throw
DPRAM Dual-Port RAM
DPST Double Pole, Single Throw
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DSR Data Set Ready
DTL Diode Transistor Logic
DTM Data Text Message
DV Digitized Voice
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
DTR Data Terminal Ready
DUART Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
DUSART Dual Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
DVM Digital Voltmeter
DVOM Digital Volt-Ohm Meter
EAM Embedded Adaptive Module
EAROM Electronically Alterable Read Only Memory
ECM Electronic Counter Measure
ECCM Electronic Counter-Counter Measure
EEPROM, Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
E2PROM

v
 mH AR RIS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued

Abbreviation Term

EM! Electromagnetic Interference

EOM End of Message
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FD Full Duplex
FEC Forward Error Correction
FET Field-Effect Transistor
F/F Flip-Flop
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FH Frequency Hopping
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
F/W,F W Firmware
G-A, G/A Ground-to-Air
GF Government (or customer) Furnished
GFE Government-Furnished Equipment
Gnd,GND Ground
GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus
HD Half Duplex
HDCP Harris Data Communications Protocol
HF High Frequency
HSS High-Speed Synchronizer
HSSB High-Speed Serial Bus
HWCI Hardware Configuration Item
Hz Hertz
IC Integrated Circuit
ID Identification
IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame
IF Intermediate Frequency
INT Interrupt
INTLK Interlock
INTR Interrupt

vi
mHARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued

Abbreviation Term
I/O Input/Output
ISB Independent Sideband
J Joules
k Kilo (thousand)
kbyte Kilobyte
kHz Kilohertz
krn Kilometer(s)
kV Kilovolt(s)
kVA Kilovolt Ampere(s)
KVD Keyboard Visual Display
KVDU Keyboard Visual Display Unit
kW Kilowatt(s)
LBT Listen Before Transmit
LC Inductive Capacitive
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LD Lock Detect
LED Light-Emitting Diode
LF Low Frequency
LLSB Lower Lower Sideband
LOS Line of Sight
LP Low Pass
LPC Linear Predictive Coding
LQA Link Quality Analysis
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LSD Lower Sideband
LSD Least Significant Digit
M Meter, Mega (one million)
rn Milli, one-one thousandth
rnA Milliampere(s)
Mbyte Megabyte
MDM MODEM

vII
 mH AR RIS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued

Abbreviation Term

MHz Megahertz
MIC Microphone
MIL·STD Military Standard
mm Millimeter(s)
Mod Modification, Modulated
Mod/Demod Modulator!Demodulator
Modem Modulator!Demodulator
MOS Metal Oxide Semiconductor
MOSFET Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
ms,rnsec Millisecond
MTBCF Mean Time Between Critical Failure
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTBM Mean Time Between Maintenance
MTBR Mean Time Between Replacement
MUF Maximum Usable Frequency
Mux Multiplex, Multiplexer
mVac Millivolts Alternating Current
mVdc Millivolts Direct Current
0 Nano (l x 10-9)
NB Narrowband
NC, N.C. Normally Closed
N/C Not Connected
NMOS N-channel Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
NO, N.O. Normally Open
No. Number
NPN N-type, P-type, N-type (transistor)
osee Nanoseconds
NVG Night Vision Goggles
Q Ohms, a unit of resistance measurement
O&M Operation and Maintenance

vIII
(IJ HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued

Abbreviation Term
O&R Operation and Repair
O.C. Open Circuit or Open Collector
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OpAmp Operational Amplifier
OCXO Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator
p Pico
PA Power Amplifier
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PEP Peak Envelope Power
pF Picofarad (l x 10-12 Farads)
PIV Peak Inverse Voltage
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
PNP P-type, N-type, P-type (transistor)
P-P Peak-to-Peak
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PS Power Supply
Pt Pt, Pt-Pt Point-to-Point
PTT Push-to-Talk
PWB Printed Wiring Board
QTY Quantity
R,RG Receiver Circuit: Receive, Receive Ground (from teletype)
RAD Random Access Data
RAM Random Access Memory
RC Resistive Capacitive
RCU Remote Control Unit
RCVIRX Receive
RCVR Receiver
RD Read
RDY Ready

Ix
 II HA RR IS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued

Abbreviation Term

REC Receptacle
RETX Retransmit
RF Radio Frequency
RFI Radio-Frequency Interference
RLPA Rotatable Log Periodic Antenna
RLSD Receive Level Sense Detect
RMS Root Mean Squared
ROM Read-Only Memory
RST Reset
RTC Real Time Clock
RTN Return
RTS Request to Send
RITY Radio Teletype
RTU Remote Tenninal Unit
S,SG Send Circuit, Send Ground (to teletype)
SA Spectrum Analyzer
SB Sideband
SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier
SHLD Shield
e
SINAD A ratio of (signal + noise + distortion) to (noise + distortion) used to measur
the signal quality of a communication channel. SINAD is commonly used to
evaluate the ability of a channel to pass voice traffic.
Sip, SIP Single In-Line Package
SMD Surface-Mount Device
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SOM Start of Message
SP Single Pole
SPDT Single-Pole, Double-Throw
SSB Single Sideband
ST Single Throw
SWR Standing Wave Ratio
SYNC Synchronous

x
:J)HARRlS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued

Abbreviation Term
TB Tenninal Board
TCXO Temperature Controlled Crystal Oscillator
TDQPSK Time Differential Quaternary Phase Shift Keying
TGC Transmitter Gain Control
T/R Transmit/Receive
TT Teletype
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
TTVFT Teletype Voice Frequency Tone
TTY Teletype
TX Transmit
u Micro (l x 10-6)
UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
uF Microfarad (1 x 10-6 Farads)
UHF Ultra High Frequency
USART Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter
USB Upper Sideband
usee Microseconds
UUSB Upper Upper Sideband
UUT Unit Under Test
uW Microwave
V Volt
VA Volt-Ampere
Vac Volts, Alternating Current
VCA Voltage Controlled Attenuator
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VDC, Vdc Volts, Direct Current
VDU Video Display Unit
VECT Vector
VF Voice Frequency
VFO Variable Frequency Oscillator
VFR Voice Frequency Repeater

xi
 mJH AR RlS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

List of Abbreviations and Acronyms - Continued

Abbreviation Term

VHF Very High Frequency

VLF Very Low Frequency
VMOS V-groove Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
YOM Volt-Ohm-Meter
VOX Voice Operated Transmitter
Vpp Volts peak-to-peak
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
W Wan(s)
WRL Wire Run List
XCVR Transceiver
XMT Transmit
XMTR Transminer

xli
:J)HARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . 1-1
1.1.1 General . 1-1
1.2 INTRODUCTION . 1-2
1.2.1 Maintenance Levels . 1-2
1.2.1.1 Levell . 1-2
1.2.1.2 Levelll . 1-2
1.2.1.3 Level III . 1-2
1.2.1.4 Level IV . 1-2
1.2.2 Purpose of this Manual . 1-2
1.2.3 Maintenance Support Packages . 1-4
1.2.4 Scope . 1-4
1.2.5 Warranty . 1-4
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . 1-5
1.3.1 General . 1-5
1.3.2 Configuration Information . 1-6
1.3.3 Features . 1-6
1.3.3.1 Remote Control Operation . 1-6
1.3.3.2 Built-In Self-Test Capability " " '" .. 1-6
1.3.3.3 Adjustable High-Contrast Display and Back-Lit Keypad . 1-6
1.3.3.4 Active Squelch (RWAS) . 1-7
1.3.3.5 Programming Lockout . 1-7
1.3.3.6 Configurability . 1-7
1.3.3.7 Simplified Operation . 1-7
1.3.3.8 Flexible Data Interface . 1-7
1.3.4 Optional Plug-In Modules . 1-7
1.3.4.1 RF-5161-01 Performance Option (A3 LPC Vocoder Assembly) . 1-7
1.3.4.2 RF-5170 Security Option (A1A2 Encryption PWB Assembly) ., " .. 1-8
1.3.5 General System Relationship . 1-8
1.3.6 Specifications . 1-13
1.4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR SYSTEM UNITS . 1-31
1.4.1 General . 1-31
1.4.2 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter . 1-31
1.4.3 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler . 1-32
1.4.4 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier . 1-33
1.4.5 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier . 1-34
1.4.6 RF-382 Automatic Antenna Coupler . 1-35
1.4.7 RF-5055PS ACIDC Power Supply . 1-36
1.4.8 RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter . 1-37
1.4.9 RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply .. " . 1-38
1.5 PARTS LISTS OF ITEMS SHIPPED WITH UNITS . 1-39
1.6 LIST OF ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLiED . 1-43
1.7 DESTROYING THE RT-1694 RECEIVER-TRANSMITIER . 1-43

xiii
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
TABLE OF CONTENTS RF COMMUNICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 2 - OPERATION
2.1 INTRODUCTION . 2-1
2.2 OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS . 2-1
2.2.1 General . 2-1
2.3 INITIAL SETTINGS AND TURN-ON . 2-10
2.3.1 System Self-Test .. , .. " '" " , 2-12
2.3.2 Zeroizing the System . 2-17
2.4 SPECIAL KEY OPERATION . 2-18
2.4.1 LIGHT Key Operation . 2-18
2.4.2 OPTion Key Operation '" . 2-19
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING . 2-24
2.5.1 SSB Operation . 2-24
2.5.1.1 Front Panel Display Indicators . 2-24
2.5.1.2 Placing the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System in SSB Operation 2-28
2.5.1.3 Selecting a Channel . 2-28
2.5.1.4 Receive Only Channels . 2-29
2.5.1.5 Scratchpad Channel . 2-29
2.5.1.6 Selecting a Temporary Operating Mode . 2-31
2.5.1.7 Selecting a Data Preset . 2-32
2.5.1.8 Selecting an Encryption Key . 2-33
2.5.1.9 Selecting Squelch . 2-34
2.5.1.10 Selecting SSB Scan . 2-35
2.5.2 ALE Operation (MIL-STD-188-141A) . 2-36
2.5.2.1 Front Panel Display Indicators . 2-37
2.5.2.2 Placing the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System in ALE Operation 2-42
2.5.2.3 Placing an Automatic Call " . 2-43
2.5.2.3.1 Placing an Automatic Individual/Net Call . 2-43
2.5.2.3.2 Placing an Automatic ALL CALL . 2-47
2.5.2.3.3 Placing an Automatic ANY CALL . 2-49
2.5.2.4 Placing a Manual Call . 2-51
2.5.2.4.1 Placing a Manual Individual/Net Call " . 2-51
2.5.2.4.2 Placing a Manual ALL CALL . 2-54
2.5.2.4.3 Placing a Manual ANY CALL . 2-56
2.5.2.5 Receiving a Call . 2-58
2.5.2.6 Terminating a Call . 2-59
2.5.2.7 OPTion Key Functions . 2-60
2.5.3 Frequency Hopping . 2-80
2.5.3.1 Front Panel Display Indicators . 2-80
2.5.3.2 Placing the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System into Frequency
Hopping Mode . 2-80
2.5.3.3 Initial Synchronization . 2-81
2.5.3.4 Loss of Net Synchronization . 2-83
2.5.3.5 Late Net Entry . 2-83
2.5.3.6 Exiting From, or Dissolving the Net . 2-83
2.5.3.7 Sending and Receiving Data Messages . 2-83
2.5.3.8 Sending and Receiving Voice Messages . 2-83
2.6 ADVANCED OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING . 2-84

xlv
III HARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 2 - OPERATION - Continued

2.6.1 General . 2-84
2.6.2 Entering Alphanumeric Names . 2-85
2.6.3 SSB Programming . 2-86
2.6.3.1 Accessing SSB Programming Menu . 2-86
2.6.3.2 .Channel Configuration Programming . 2-89
2.6.3.3 Programming the Rrr Encryption Keys Using the Fill Gun . 2-93
2.6.3.4 Programming Data Presets . 2-95
2.6.3.5 Programming Configuration Parameters . 2-100
2.6.3.5.1 Programming the Radio Configuration . 2-100
2.6.3.5.2 Programming Port Configuration . 2-107
2.6.3.5.3 Programming Options Configuration . 2-116
2.6.3.5.4 Programming System Time . 2-118
2.6.3.6 Programming Encryption Keys . 2-120
2.6.3.7 Programming Security . 2-124
2.6.3.7.1 Password Programming . 2-124
2.6.3.7.2 Lockout Programming . 2-127
2.6.3.7.3 Programming Operational Lockout . 2-129
2.6.4 ALE Programming . 2-133
2.6.4.1 Accessing ALE Programming Menu . 2-136
2.6.4.2 Programming Channel Group . 2-136
2.6.4.3 Programming Addresses . 2-143
2.6.4.3.1 Add a Self Address . 2-143
2.6.4.3.2 Add an Individual Address . 2-146
2.6.4.3.3 Add a Net Address . 2-148
2.6.4.3.4 Reviewing a Self Address . 2-152
2.6.4.3.5 Reviewing an Individual Address . 2-155
2.6.4.3.6 Reviewing a Net Address . 2-158
2.6.4.3.7 Deleting an Address , " '" " " . 2-161
2.6.4.4 Programming LOA Events . 2-163
2.6.4.4.1 Programming Exchange LOA Events . 2-163
2.6.4.4.2 Programming Sound LOA Events . 2-167
2.6.4.4.3 Reviewing LOA Events . 2-170
2.6.4.4.4 Deleting an LOA Event . 2-172
2.6.4.5 Programming Configuration . 2-174
2.6.4.6 Programming Security . 2-179
2.6.4.6.1 Entering a Password . 2-179
2.6.4.6.2 Lockout Programming . 2-181
2.6.4.6.3 Programming Operational Lockout . 2-184
2.6.5 Frequency Hopping Programming . 2-187
2.6.5.1 Accessing Frequency Hopping Menu . 2-188
2.6.5.2 Programming Net Parameters . 2-191
2.6.5.2.1 Programming Narrowband Operation . 2-191
2.6.5.2.2 Programming Wideband Operation . 2-194
2.6.5.2.3 Programming Frequency Lists . 2-197
2.6.5.2.4 Deleting a Hop Net . 2-203
2.6.5.3 Programming Exclusion Bands . 2-205

xv
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
TABLE OF CONTENTS RF COMMUNICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 2 - OPERATION - Continued

2.6.5.3.1 Adding an Exclusion Band . 2-205
2.6.5.3.2 Deleting an Exclusion Band . 2-208
2.6.5.4 Programming Data Presets .. 2-210
2.6.5.5 Programming Frequency Hopping Transmit Power . 2-213
2.6.5.6 Programming Security . 2-214
2.6.5.6.1 Programming Lockout . 2-214
2.6.5.6.2 Programming Operational Lockout . 2-217
2.7 DATA INTERFACE . 2-220
2.7.1 Asynchronous Data Interface . 2-220
2.7.2 Synchronous Data Interface . 2-221
2.7.3 Data Transmission with the Asynchronous Remote Port . 2-221
2.8 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE . 2-221
2.8.1 Asynchronous Remote Control Port Programming . 2-222
2.8.2 Terminal/Remote Control Software . 2-222
2.8.3 SSB Remote Control Operation . 2-223
2.8.3.1 SSB Show Menus . 2-224
2.8.3.2 SSB Help Menus . 2-225
2.8.3.3 SSB Help Modem Menu . 2-227
2.8.3.4 SSB RWAS Help Menu . 2-227
2.8.3.4.1 SSB Remote and Data Port Configuration Help Menus . 2-228
2.8.3.5 SSB Security Help Menus . 2-229
2.8.4 ALE Remote Control Operation . 2-230
2.8.4.1 Entering ALE Mode . 2-230
2.8.4.2 ALE Show Menu . 2-231
2.8.4.3 ALE Help Menus . 2-232
2.8.4.4 ALE Remote Control Programming . 2-234
2.8.4.4.1 Channel Group Programming . 2-234
2.8.4.4.2 Programming Addresses . 2-235
2.8.4.5 ALE Remote Control Operation . 2-236
2.8.4.5.1 Scan Operation . 2-236
2.8.4.5.2 Placing a Call . 2-236
2.8.4.5.3 Receiving a Call . 2-237
2.8.4.5.4 Initiating an LOA . 2-238
2.8.4.5.5 EOW . 2-240
2.8.4.5.6 AMD . 2-240
2.8.4.6 ALE Example . 2-242
2.8.5 Frequency Hopping Remote Control Operation . 2-243
2.8.5.1 Hop Show Menu . 2-243
2.8.5.2 Hop Help Menus . 2-244
2.8.5.3 Synchronization Sequence . 2-246
2.8.5.4 Keying . 2-246
2.8.5.4.1 Data Transmission . 2-246
2.8.5.4.2 Voice Transmission . 2-246
2.8.5.5 Remote Serial Tone Modem Operation . 2-246
2.8.5.5.1 Remote Modem SNR Command (Signal-To-Noise Ratio) . 2-248
2.8.5.5.2 Remote Modem SER Command (Serial Tone Information) . 2-248

xvi
III HARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 3 - FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3.1 INTRODUCTION . 3-1
3.1.1 General . 3-1
3.2 MAJOR FUNCTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION . 3-1
3.2.1 General . 3-1
3.2.2 RF/IF/Audio Signal Path . 3-1
3.2.2.1 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter " . 3-1
3.2.2.1.1 Transmitter Functional Level Description . 3-2
3.2.2.1.2 Receiver Functional Level Description . 3-2
3.2.2.2 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler, RF-5032PA-125E
125 Watt Power Amplifier, and RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power
Amplifier . 3-2
3.2.2.3 RF-382 Antenna Coupler . 3-3
3.2.3 Control Paths . 3-3
3.2.3.1 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter to Power Amplifier Control Lines . 3-4
3.2.3.2 Power Amplifier to RF-382 Antenna Coupler Control Lines . 3-4
3.2.4 Power Distribution Paths . 3-4
3.2.4.1 General . 3-4
3.2.4.2 Direct Current (DC) Voltage Distribution . 3-4
CHAPTER 4 - SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
4.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . 4-1
CHAPTER 5 - TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 INTRODUCTION . 5-1
5.1.1 General . 5-1
5.1.2 Scope of this Chapter . 5-1
5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . 5-2
5.2.1 General . 5-2
5.2.2 Maintenance Turn-On Procedure . 5-2
5.2.3 Troubleshooting with Non-BIT Fault Isolation . 5-4
5.2.4 Troubleshooting with BIT . 5-8
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING SUPPORT DATA . 5-25
5.3.1 Protective Device Index . 5-25
5.3.2 Troubleshooting Index . 5-25
5.4 TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGRAMS . 5-26
5.4.1 General . 5-26
5.4.2 BIT Signal Path Diagram . 5-26
5.4.3 RF Path Diagram . 5-26
5.4.4 Control Path Diagram . 5-27
5.4.5 Power Distribution Diagram . 5-27
5.5 INTERCONNECT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM . 5-33
5.5.1 General . 5-33
5.6 BIT DESCRIPTION . 5-36
5.6.1 General . 5-36
5.6.2 BIT Routine . 5-36

xvii
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS (ljHARRlS
TABLE OF CONTENTS RF COMMUNICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 5 - TROUBLESHOOTING - Continued

5.6.3 Continuous Self-Test Monitoring (Run-Time Faults) . 5-36
5.6.3.1 COUPLER COMM FAULT . 5-36
5.6.3.2 COUPLER FAULT . 5-36
5.6.3.3 COUPLER OVERTEMP . 5-36
5.6.3.4 COUPLER WARNING Fault . 5-36
5.6.3.5 HIGH DC INPUT Fault . 5-36
5.6.3.6 High Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) Fault . 5-36
5.6.3.7 INTERNAL COMM FAULT . 5-36
5.6.3.8 NO PA Fault . 5-36
5.6.3.9 OUT OF LOCK Fault . 5-37
5.6.3.10 PA BAD FILTER Fault .. 5-37
5.6.3.11 PA COMM FAULT . 5-37
5.6.3.12 PA LOW DC INPUT Fault . 5-37
5.6.3.13 PA OVER CURRENT Fault . 5-37
5.6.3.14 PA OVER TEMP Fault . 5-37
5.6.3.15 PA WARNING Fault . 5-37
5.6.3.16 TUNE FAULT . 5-37
CHAPTER 6 - CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
6.1 INTRODUCTION . 6-1
6.1.1 Master Tools and Materials List . 6-1
6.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND ALIGNMENTS . 6-1
6.3 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . 6-1
6.3.1 Safety . 6-1
6.3.2 Level II Repair . 6-1
6.3.3 Wires, Cables, and Connectors . 6-2
6.4 UNIT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . 6-4
6.4.1 General . 6-4
6.4.2 Removing and Installing AC Input Power , . 6-4
6.4.2.1 Removing AC Input Power . 6-4
6.4.2.2 Installing AC Input Power . 6-4
6.5 LRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . 6-5
6.5.1 LRU Removal . 6-5
6.5.2 LRU Replacement . 6-5
CHAPTER 7 - PARTS LIST
7.1 INTRODUCTION . 7-1
7.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRUS) . 7-1
7.3 LRU DIAGRAMS . 7-3
7.3.1 RS-232 Auxiliary Cables/Auxiliary Connector J5 (Optional) . 7-23

xvlll
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 8 - INSTALLATION
8.1 INTRODUCTION . 8-1
8.2 SITE INFORMATION . 8-1
8.2.1 General . 8-1
8.2.2 General Guidelines . 8-1
8.2.3 Grounding . 8-1
8.2.3.1 Manpack Configuration Grounding .. 8-2
8.2.3.2 Vehicular Configuration Grounding . 8-3
8.2.3.3 Base Station Configuration Grounding . 8-3
8.2.4 Environmental . 8-3
8.3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUiRED . 8-3
8.4 UNPACKING AND REPACKING . 8-3
8.4.1 Unpacking . 8-3
8.4.2 Repacking . 8-4
8.5 SITE INSTALLATION . 8-4
8.5.1 Power Requirements . 8-4
8.5.1.1 20 Watt Radio System . 8-4
8.5.1.2 125 Watt Radio System . 8-4
8.5.1.3 150 Watt Radio System . 8-4
8.5.2 Ancillary Items Kit . 8-4
8.5.3 Jumper/DIP Switch Settings . 8-4
8.5.3.1 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler Jumper/DIP Switch
Settings . 8-4
8.5.3.2 RF-382 Antenna Coupler Jumper/DIP Switch Settings . 8-6
8.5.4 Interconnect Diagrams . 8-6
8.5.5 Unit Removal and Installation Procedures " .. 8-6
8.5.6 Access Clearance and Ventilation Requirements . 8-6
8.5.7 Antenna Considerations . 8-10
8.5.7.1 Antenna Configurations . 8-10
8.5.7.1.1 Ground Wave . 8-10
8.5.7.1.2 Short Sky Wave . 8-11
8.5.7.1.3 Long Sky Wave . 8-11
8.5.7.2 Very High Frequency (VHF) Antennas . 8-11
8.5.7.3 Antenna Options . 8-11
8.5.7.3.1 OE-505 Manpack Whip Antenna Kit . 8-11
8.5.7.3.2 OE-505A1PRC Manpack Whip Antenna Kit . 8-12
8.5.7.3.3 RF-1940 Dipole Antenna . 8-12
8.5.7.3.4 SB-V161V35 Series HF Whip Antennas . 8-17
8.5.7.3.4.1 SB-V16 Series Parts Lists . 8-17
8.5.7.3.4.2 Antenna Sections . 8-20
8.5.7.3.4.3 Feed-Through Antenna Base . 8-20
8.5.7.3.4.4 Stand-Off Antenna Base . 8-22
8.5.7.3.4.5 Spring Base . 8-22
8.5.7.3.4.6 Spring Base with High Voltage Protection Device '" . 8-22
8.5.7.3.4.7 Whip End Protector . 8-24
8.5.7.3.4.8 Antenna Tie Down Kit . 8-25
8.5.7.3.4.9 Installation . 8-26

xix
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IjHARRlS
TABLE OF CONTENTS RF COMMUNICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 8 - INSTALLATION - Continued

8.5.7.4 RF-382 Fast Tune Automatic Antenna Coupler . 8-31
8.5.8 Mounting . 8-31
8.5.8.1 RF-5071 VSM Single-Unit Vehicular Shock Mount . 8-31
8.5.8.2 Power Converter to Power Amplifier Clamp Assembly . 8-31
8.5.8.3 RF-5073 System Shock Mount for RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power
Amplifier and RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter " " . 8-31
8.5.8.4 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit and Vehicular Shock Mount . 8-32
8.5.8.4.1 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit " " " . 8-36
8.5.8.4.1.1 Mounting the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit " " . 8-36
8.5.8.4.1.2 Mounting the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter to the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter
Unit . 8-36
8.5.8.5 Universal Vehicular Shock Mount " " . 8-41
8.5.8.6 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Short Shock Mount . 8-44
8.5.8.7 Mounting the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler . 8-46
8.5.8.8 Mounting the RF-382 Antenna Coupler . 8-46
8.5.8.9 Mounting the RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply . 8-46
8.5.9 Manpack Configuration Instructions . 8-50
8.5.9.1 Battery Information . 8-50
8.5.9.1.1 Battery Voltage . 8-50
8.5.9.1.2 Installing the Batteries in the Battery Case . 8-53
8.5.9.1.3 Charging Ni-Cd Batteries . 8-53
8.5.9.1.4 Storing Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide (Li-S02) Batteries . 8-54
8.5.9.1.5 Handling Li-S02 Batteries . 8-54
8.5.9.1.6 Disposing of Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide Batteries . 8-55
8.5.9.2 Carrying the Manpack . 8-56
8.5.9.2.1 Instructions for Canvas Carry Bag . 8-56
8.5.9.2.2 Instructions for Pack/Frame Assembly '" " . 8-57
8.5.9.2.3 Instructions for H-Style Suspenders . 8-58
8.5.9.2.4 Alternative Carrying Methods . 8-59
8.5.9.2.5 Using the Manpack Radio Bag (10530-0460-01) . 8-59
8.5.10 Interfacing the RT-1694 to Non-Harris Equipment . 8-62
8.6 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT . 8-66
8.6.1 Phase 1 - Inspection and Pre-Power Up Procedures . 8-66
8.6.2 Phase 2 - Initial Settings and Power Up . 8-66
8.6.3 Phase 3 - Installation Verification/Unit Checkout . 8-66
CHAPTER 9 - ACCESSORIES
9.1 INTRODUCTION . 9-1
9.1.1 Support Packages . 9-1
9.1.1.1 Extended Warranties and Service Contracts . 9-4
9.1.1.2 Training . 9-4
9.1.1.3 Tools . 9-4
9.1.1.4 Test Measurement EqUipment . 9-5
9.1.1.5 Maintenance Aids . 9-5
9.1.1.6 Manuals . 9-6

xx
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Paragraph Page

CHAPTER 9 - ACCESSORIES - Continued

9.1.1.7 Spares Kits . 9-6
9.1.1.8 Hot Test Bed Kits . 9-6
9.1.2 Equipment Accessories . 9-7

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
1-1 RT-1694 Manpack Receiver-Transmitter . 1-0
1-2 Maintenance Flow Chart . 1-3
1-3 Typical Relationship of Units in RF-5200 FALCON no Series Manpack
System (AN/PRC-138 Manpack Configuration) . 1-9
1-4 Typical Relationship of Units in RF-5200 FALCON no Series Manpack
System (20 Watt Vehicular Configuration) . 1-10
1-5 Typical Relationship of Units in RF-5200 FALCON no Series Manpack
System (150 Watt Vehicular Configuration) . 1-11
1-6 Typical Relationship of Units in RF-5200 FALCON no Series Manpack
System (125 Watt Vehicular Configuration) . 1-12
1-7 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter " . 1-31
1-8 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler . 1-32
1-9 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier . 1-33
1-10 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier . 1-34
1-11 RF-382 Automatic Antenna Coupler . 1-35
1-12 RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply . 1-36
1-13 RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter . 1-37
1-14 RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply . 1-38
2-1 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Operating Controls and Indicators . 2-3
2-2 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Operating Controls and
Indicators " . 2-4
2-3 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Operating Controls and
Indicators . 2-5
2-4 RF-5055PS ACIDC Power Supply Operating Controls and Indicators . 2-6
2-5 RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Operating Controls and Indicators '" 2-7
2-6 RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply Operating Controls and Indicators . 2-8
2-7 RF-382 Antenna Coupler Operating Controls and Indicators . 2-9
2-8 Front Panel Display - Receive Mode Indicators . 2-25
2-9 Front Panel Display - Transmit Indicators . 2-26
2-10 Front Panel Display - Remote Indicators . 2-27
2-11 Typical RIT Display when Unlinked and Scanning During ALE Operation '" 2-38
2-12 Typical RIT Display when Linked during ALE Operation (Unkeyed) . 2-39
2-13 Typical RIT Display when Linked During ALE Operation (After Keying) . 2-40
2-14 Typical RIT Display when Unlinked and Stopped During ALE Operation . 2-41
2-15 Typical Front Panel Displays During RX AMD Receipt
AUTO MESSAGE DISPLAY Enabled . 2-79
2-16 Example of Entering an Alphanumeric Name (FAX1) . 2-85
2-17 SSB Programming Selections . 2-87

xxi
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
TABLE OF CONTENTS RF COMMUNICATIONS

LIST OF FIGURES - COntinued

Figure Page
2-18 SSB Programming Summary . 2-88
2-19 ALE Programming Selections . 2-134
2-20 ALE Programming Summary . 2-135
2-21 Frequency Hopping Programming Selections . 2-189
2-22 Frequency Hopping Programming Summary . 2-190
2-23 Typical Output Of A "Show" Command for SSB Operation . 2-224
2-24 . Typical Output of A "Modem Show" Command . 2-224
2-25 SSB Help Menu . 2-225
2-26 SSB Help More Menu . 2-226
2-27 SSB Help Modem Menu . 2-227
2-28 SSB Help RWAS Screen . 2-227
2-29 SSB Help Port_Remote Menu . 2-228
2-30 SSB Help Port_Data Help Menu . 2-228
2-31 SSB Help Security Menu . 2-229
2-32 Typical ALE Status Display . 2-230
2-33 Typical ALE Show Menu . 2-231
2-34 ALE Help/Help Program Menu . 2-232
2-35 ALE Help Operational Menu . 2-233
2-36 ALE Help Security Menu . 2-233
2-37 Sample ALE Remote Programming and Operation Screen . 2-242
2-38 Typical Frequency Hopping (with Hopset) Show Menu . 2-243
2-39 Typical Hop Help Menu . 2-244
2-40 Typical Hop Help Modem Menu . 2-245
2-41 Typical Hop Help Security Menu . 2-245
2-42 RfT Display When Serial Tone Modem Acquires a Signal . 2-247
5-1 Troubleshooting Process Used in this Chapter . 5-1
5-2 Non-BIT Fault Logic Diagram . 5-9
5-3 BIT Signal Path Diagram . 5-28
5-4 RF/IF/Audio Signal Path Diagram .. 5-29
5-5 Control Path Diagram . 5-31
5-6 Power Distribution Diagram . 5-32
5-7 20 Watt Vehicular System Interconnect Schematic Diagram . 5-33
5-8 125 Watt Vehicular System Interconnect Schematic Diagram . 5-34
5-9 150 Watt Vehicular Radio System Interconnect Schematic Diagram . 5-35
6-1 LRU Removal and Replacement -125 Watt Vehicular Configuration . 6-6
6-2 LRU Removal and Replacement - 150 Watt Vehicular Configuration . 6-7
7-1 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Connector Location Diagram . 7-3
7-2 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler Connector Location
Diagram . 7-4
7-3 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Connector Location Diagram " 7-5
7-4 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Connector Location Diagram . 7-6
7-5 RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Connector Location Diagram . 7-7
7-6 RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Connector Location Diagram . 7-8
7-7 RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply Connector Location Diagram . 7-9
7-8 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Assembly (Optional) Connector Location Diagram '" 7-10
7-9 RF-382 Antenna Coupler Connector Location Diagram . 7-11
7-10 Receiver-Transmitter (RfT) to PA Coaxial Cable Assembly (10181-9821) '" 7-11
7-11 RfT to PA Control Cable Assembly (10181-9822) . 7-12

xxII
(lJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES - Continued

Figure Page
7-12 PA to Coupler Control Cable Assembly (10181-9823) . 7-13
7-13 PA to Coupler Coaxial Cable Assembly (10181-9824) , . 7-14
7-14 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Primary Power Cable
(10181-9826) . 7-15
7-15 20 Watt Power Amplifier to Antenna Coupler Primary Power Cable
Assembly (10181-9827) . 7-15
7-16 AC Power Cable Assembly (10181-9831) . 7-16
7-17 125 Watt Power Amplifier DC Power Cable Assembly (10181-9833) . 7-16
7-18 24 V Power Cable Assembly (10372-0812) . 7-17
7-19 24 V Power/Control Cable Assembly (10372-0813) . 7-18
7-20 External PA Power/Control Cable Assembly (10372-0816) . 7-19
7-21 150 Watt DC Power Cable Assembly (10497-0505) . 7-20
7-22 150 Watt RIT - Power Amplifier Coaxial Cable Assembly (10497-5015) . 7-21
7-23 150 Watt Power Amplifier - Coupler Control Cable Assembly (10497-5020) . 7-21
7-24 150 Watt RfT - Power Amplifier Control Cable Assembly (10497-5025) . 7-22
7-25 150 Watt RIT - Power Amplifier Audio Cable Assembly (10497-5035) . 7-22
7-26 RS-232 Data Cable (10372-9867) .. ; . 7-23
7-27 RS-232 Sync/Async Remote Cable (10372-9868) . 7-23
8-1 Ground Systems for Manpack Configuration . 8-2
8-2 A5JMP1 Location - RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler . 8-5
8-3 RF-382 A3 Control PWB, S2 Switch Settings . 8-6
8-4 20 Watt Vehicular Configuration Interconnect Diagram . 8-7
8-5 125 Watt Vehicular Configuration Interconnect Diagram . 8-8
8-6 150 Watt Vehicular Configuration Interconnect Diagram . 8-9
8-7 RF-1940 Antenna Ground Wave Configurations . 8-14
8-8 Sky Wave Antenna Configuration . 8-15
8-9 AN/PRC-138 Manpack Configuration Parts . 8-16
8-10 Green Vertical Antenna (100-5029) . 8-21
8-11 Operation of Rigidized Spring Base . 8-22
8-12 SB-V16FHD HF Whip Antenna (100-5109) . 8-23
8-13 Whip End Protector . 8-24
8-14 Antenna Tie Down Kit . 8-25
8-15 HF Antenna Base Mounting . 8-27
8-16 VHF Antenna Base Mounting . 8-28
8-17 SB-V16FHD Antenna Installed on RF-292 Antenna Mount . 8-29
8-18 RF-292 Antenna Mount Hole Placement . 8-30
8-19 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier in RF-5071VSM Single-Unit
Shock Mount . 8-33
8-20 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier and RF-5056PS DC/DC
Power Converter in RF-5071 VSM Shock Mount . 8-34
8-21 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power
Amplifier Mounted on RF-5073 System Shock Mount . 8-35
8-22 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter in Vehicular Shock Mount . 8-36
8-23 Mounting the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter to the Filter/Adapter Unit .. '" . 8-37
8-24 System Configuration with an External Power Amplifier . 8-38
8-25 System Configuration Without an External Power Amplifier . 8-38
8-26 Vehicular Shock Mount (10372-0800-01) . 8-42
8-27 Hole Position of Bottom Mounting Tray . 8-43

xxiii
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
TABLE OF CONTENTS RF COMMUNICATIONS

LIST OF FIGURES - Continued

Figure Page
8-28 Short Shock Mount (10372-0880) . 8-45
8-29 Mounting Hole Spacing for the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power
Amplifier/Coupler . 8-47
8-30 RF-382 Antenna Coupler Dimensions and Weight . 8-48
8-31 RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Mounting Hole Spacing . 8-49
8-32 Attach Battery Case . 8-51
8-33 Connect Handset and Antenna . 8-52
8-34 Canvas Carry Bag (10372-0460-01) . 8-56
8-35 Pack/Frame Assembly (10372-0450-01) . 8-57
8-36 H-Style Suspenders (10372-0455-04) . 8-58
8-37 Examples of Carrying Methods . 8-59
8-38 Storing Manpack Radio System Items In the Manpack Radio Bag . 8-60
8-39 Manpack Radio System Ready for Operation . 8-61
8-40 RT-1694 to DMDG (OA-8990/P) Interface Cable Diagram
(10530-9870-01) . 8-62
8-41 RT-1694 to KL43-C Interface Cable Diagram (10530-9860-01) . 8-63
8-42 RT-1694 to KY-99 Interface Cable Diagram (10530-9880-01) . 8-63

LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1-1 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Specifications . 1-14
1-2 High-Speed Data Modem Specifications . 1-17
1-3 ALE Specifications . 1-19
1-4 Voice Processor Specifications . 1-21
1-5 Frequency Hopping Specifications . 1-22
1-6 Digital Encryption Specifications . 1-23
1-7 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier Specifications . 1-24
1-8 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Specifications . 1-25
1-9 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Specifications . 1-26
1-10 RF-382 Antenna Coupler Specifications . 1-27
1-11 RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Specifications . 1-29
1-12 RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Specifications . 1-30
1-13 RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply Specifications . 1-30
1-14 AN/PRC-138 Ancillary Parts Kit (10372-0900-01) . 1-39
1-15 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier Ancillary Parts Kit
(10225-9600-01) . 1-39
1-16 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Ancillary Parts Kit
(10225-9000) " , . 1-40
1-17 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Ancillary Parts Kit
(10497-0300-01) . 1-40
1-18 RF-382 Antenna Coupler Ancillary Parts Kit (10208-0002) . 1-41
1-19 RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply Ancillary Parts Kit (10181-9010) . 1-41
1-20 List of Manufacturers . 1-42
1-21 Test Equipment Required . 1-43
1-22 Required Tools and Materials . 1-43
2-1 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Operating Controls and Indicators . 2-1

xxiv
m)HARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF TABLES - Continued

Table Page
2-2 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Operating Controls and
Indicators . 2-4
2-3 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Operating Controls and Indicators 2-5
2-4 RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Operating Controls and Indicators . 2-6
2-5 RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Operating Controls and Indicators .. , 2-7
2-6 RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply Operating Controls and Indicators . 2-8
2-7 RF-382 Antenna Coupler Operating Controls and Indicators , 2-9
2-8 Initial Settings and Turn-On Procedure . 2-10
2-9 Self-Test Procedure . 2-12
2-10 Firmware Version Display Procedure . 2-14
2-11 VSWR Test Procedure . 2-15
2-12 Battery Test Procedure . 2-16
2-13 Zeroize Procedure . 2-17
2-14 Light Key Operation . 2-18
2-15 Coupler Retune Procedure . 2-19
2-16 Transmit Power Adjustment Procedure . 2-20
2-17 Time Setting Procedure . 2-21
2-18 SSB Scan Enable/Disable Procedure . 2-22
2-19 BFO Adjustment Procedure . 2-23
2-20 RF-5200 FALCON"" Manpack System Normal Operation Index . 2-24
2-21 Front Panel Display - Receive Mode Indicators . 2-25
2-22 Front Panel Display - Transmit Mode Indicators . 2-26
2-23 Front Panel Display - Remote Mode Indicators . 2-27
2-24 Procedure to Conthe RF-5200 FALCON"" Series Manpack System to
SSB Mode . 2-28
2-25 Procedure to Select A Channel in SSB Mode . 2-28
2-26 Procedure to Select a Scratchpad Channel . 2-29
2-27 Procedure for Selecting a Temporary Operating Mode . 2-31
2-28 Procedure for Selecting a Data Preset . 2-32
2-29 Procedure for Selecting an Encryption Key . 2-33
2-30 Procedure for Selecting Squelch . 2-34
2-31 Procedure for Initiating and Pausing SSB Scan Operation . 2-35
2-32 Front Panel Display - ALE Unlinked/Scanning Mode Indicators . 2-38
2-33 Front Panel Display - ALE Linked Mode Indicators Before Keying . 2-39
2-34 Front Panel Display - ALE Linked Mode Indicators (After Keying) . 2-40
2-35 Front Panel Display - ALE Unlinked/Stopped Mode Indicators . 2-41
2-36 Procedure to Place the FALCON"" Manpack System in ALE Mode . 2-42
2-37 Procedure to Place an Automatic Individual/Net Call . 2-44
2-38 Procedure to Place an Automatic ALL CALL . 2-47
2-39 Procedure to Place an Automatic ANY CALL . 2-49
2-40 Procedure to Place a Manual Individual/Net Call . 2-51
2-41 Procedure to Place a Manual ALL CALL . 2-54
2-42 Procedure to Place a Manual ANY CALL . 2-56
2-43 Procedure for Receiving a Call . 2-58
2-44 Procedure for Terminating a Call . 2-59
2-45 Procedure to Execute an Exchange LOA . 2-62
2-46 Procedure to Execute a Sound LOA . 2-64
2-47 Procedure to View LOA Scores . 2-65

xxv
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

LIST OF TABLES - COntinued

Table Page
2-48 Procedure to View Radio Time . 2-67
2-49 Procedure to Select Transmitter Output Power " . 2-68
2-50 Procedure to Retune the Antenna Coupler . 2-69
2-51 Procedure to Send an EOW* . 2-69
2-52 Procedure to Edit an AMD Message . 2-71
2-53 Procedure to Transmit an AMD Message . 2-74
2-54 Procedure to Review an Unread Receive AMD Message from the
ALE Display . 2-76
2-55 Procedure to Review Any Receive AMD Message . 2-77
2-56 Procedure to Place the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System into
Frequency Hopping Mode . 2-80
2-57 Procedure to Send a Sync Request - Radio 1 . 2-81
2-58 Procedure to Perform Initial Synchronization - Radio 2 . 2-82
2-59 SSB Programming Index . 2-86
2-60 Procedure to Access the SSB Programming Menu . 2-86
2-61 Procedure to Access Channel Configuration Parameters . 2-90
2-62 Procedure to Program AfT Using the Fill Gun . 2-94
2-63 Procedure for Programming Data Presets . 2-96
2-64 Procedure to Program Radio Configuration Parameters " . 2-101
2-65 Procedure to Program Port Configuration Parameters . 2-108
2-66 Procedure to Program Data Configuration Parameters , " . 2-111
2-67 Procedure to Define Protocol . 2-114
2-68 Procedure to Define Radio Options Configuration . 2-116
2-69 Procedure to Program System Time . 2-118
2-70 Procedure to Add or Modify an Encryption Key . 2-120
2-71 Procedure to Delete an Encryption Key . 2-122
2-72 Procedure to Enter A Password . 2-124
2-73 Procedure to Select A New Password . 2-125
2-74 Procedure to Program Lockout . 2-127
2-75 Procedure to Program Operational Lockout . 2-129
2-76 SSB/ALE Programming Index . 2-133
2-77 Procedure to Access the ALE Programming Menu . 2-136
2-78 Procedure to Add a Channel to a Channel Group . 2-137
2-79 Procedure to Delete a Channel From a Channel Group . 2-139
2-80 Procedure to Review a Channel Group . 2-141
2-81 Procedure to Add a Self Address . 2-143
2-82 Procedure to Program an Individual Address . 2-146
2-83 Procedure to Add a Net Address . 2-148
2-84 Procedure to Review a Self Address . 2-152
2-85 Procedure to Review an Individual Address . 2-155
2-86 Procedure to Review a Net Address . 2-158
2-87 Procedure to Delete An Address . 2-161
2-88 Procedure to Program an Exchange LOA . 2-164
2-89 Procedure to Program a Sound LOA Event . 2-167
2-90 Procedure to Review LOA Events " , . 2-170

xxvi
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF TABLES - Continued

Table Page
2-91 Procedure to Delete An LOA Event . 2-172
2-92 Procedure to Program ALE Configuration . 2-175
2-93 Procedure to Enter a Password . 2-179
2-94 Procedure to Program Lockout . 2-181
2-95 Procedure to Program Operational Lockout . 2-184
2-96 Frequency Hopping Programming Index . 2-187
2-97 Procedure to Access the Frequency Hopping Programming Menu . 2-188
2-98 Procedure to Program a Net for Narrowband Operation . 2-192
2-99 Procedure to Program a Net for Wideband Operation . 2-194
2-100 Procedure to Add Frequencies to a Frequency List . 2-197
2-101 Procedure to Delete Frequencies From a Frequency List . 2-200
2-102 Procedure to Delete a Hop Net . 2-203
2-103 Procedure to Add an Exclusion Band . 2-205
2-104 Procedure to Delete an Exclusion Band . 2-208
2-105 Procedure to Program Hopping Data Presets . 2-210
2-106 Procedure to Program Hopping Transmit Power . 2-213
2-107 Procedure to Program Lockout " . 2-214
2-108 Procedure to Program Operational Lockout . 2-217
2-109 Front Panel Display - Serial Tone Modem Indicators . 2-247
2-110 Procedure to Determine Serial Tone Modem SIN Ratio . 2-248
2-111 Procedure to Determine Serial Tone Modem Information . 2-248
4-1 Daily Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services " .. 4-1
4-2 Weekly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services . 4-1
5-1 Maintenance Tum-On Procedure . 5-2
5-2 Non-BIT Fault Symptoms . 5-4
5-3 Radio System Fault Codes . 5-8
5-4 Protective Device Index . 5-25
5-5 Troubleshooting Index . 5-26
6-1 Radio System Cable Information - 20 Watt Vehicular Configuration . 6-2
6-2 Radio System Cable Information - 125 Watt Vehicular Configuration . 6-3
6-3 Radio System Cable Information - 150 Watt Vehicular Configuration . 6-3
7-1 LRUs for Manpack System . 7-1
7-2 LRUs for 20 Watt Vehicular System . 7-1
7-3 LRUs for 125 Watt Vehicular System . 7-2
7-4 LRUs for 150 Watt Vehicular System . 7-2
8-1 RF-1940 Antenna Length Reference Chart . 8-13
8-2 SB-V16B Antenna Parts List(100-5003) . 8-18
8-3 SB-V16C Antenna Parts List(100-5004) . 8-18
8-4 SB-V16F Antenna Parts List (100-5009) . 8-18
8-5 SB-V16FHD Antenna Parts List (100-5109) . 8-19
8-6 SB-V35B Antenna Parts List (100-5006) . 8-19
8-7 SB-V35C Antenna Parts List (100-5007) . 8-20
8-8 SB-V35F Antenna Parts List (100-5013) . 8-20
8-9 J4 and J5 Battery Connectors . 8-39
8-10 P1 DC/Control In Connector . 8-39
8-11 J1 DC/Control Out Connector " '" . 8-40
8-12 J3 Filtered Auxiliary Power Connector . 8-40
8-13 J2 Unfiltered Auxiliary Power Connector . 8-41

xxvii
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS :J)HARRlS
TABLE OF CONTENTS RF COMMUNICATIONS

LIST OF TABLES - Continued

Table Page
8-14 Universal Shock Mount Parts List . 8-44
8-15 Short Shock Mount Parts List . 8-46
8-16 Front Panel AUDIO/FILL Connector Pin Assignments . 8-64
8-17 Front Panel DATA Connector Pin Assignments . 8-64
8-18 Front Panel PA Connector Pin Assignments . 8-65
9-1 Radio System Support Packages .. 9-2
9-2 Receiver-Transmitter Accessories " . 9-7

xxvIII
mHARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

SAFETY SUMMARY
1. INTRODUCTION
All operators and maintenance personnel must observe the following safety precautions during operation and
maintenance of this equipment Specific warnings and cautions are provided in the manual and at the end of this
Safety Summary. Warnings, Cautions, and Notes appear before various steps in the manual and will be used as
follows:

• WARNING - Used when injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment is possible

• CAUTION - Used when there is a possibility of damage to equipment

• NOTE - Used to alert personnel to a condition that requires emphasis

2. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY
Basic safety precautions consider factors involved in protecting personnel from injury or death. Electrical,
mechanical, electromagnetic radiation (EMR), material, or chemical hazards are the most common types of
hazards found in electronic equipment. The following are types of hazards that may exist:
ELECTRICAL - Hazardous voltage and current levels may exist throughout the equipment. Contact
with these hazards could cause electrocution, electrical shock, burns, or injury due to
involuntary reflexes of the body.
MECHANICAL - Mechanical hazards are created when heavy assemblies and components must be
removed and replaced. Moving parts (such as fan blades) and hot surfaces are
potential mechanical hazards.
THERMAL - Burn hazards may exist in the equipment that could cause personal injuries and/or
serious equipment damage. Internal surfaces of the equipment may be in excess of
65°C, the point at which personnel could be burned. Extreme caution should be used
when working with any hot assemblies (for example, power supply or power amplifier
assemblies). Physical injury or damage may result to personnel and/or equipment as a
result of a reflex action to a bum.
CHEMICAL - Chemicals or materials used for servicing the equipment may present potential
hazards. Many chemical agents, such as cleaners and solvents, may be toxic, volatile,
or flammable. If used incorrectly, these agents can cause injury or death.
EMR - Overexposure to electromagnetic radiation results from amplified radio frequencies
may produce a health hazard.
3. OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE SAFETY GUIDELINES
Good safety discipline is critical to prevent injury to personnel. All other safety measures are useless if personnel
do not observe the safety precautions and do not follow safety disciplines. Once aware of a hazard, personnel
should ensure that all other personnel are aware of the hazard. The following basic safety disciplines are stressed:
a. Read a procedure entirely before perfonning it. Personnel must always perfonn each assigned task in a
safe manner.
b. Prior to applying equipment power after maintenance, personnel must ensure that all unsecured hand
tools and test equipment are disconnected from the serviced/maintained equipment and properly stored.

xxix
 mHARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

c. Power to the equipment must be removed before a piece of equipment is removed.

d. Extreme care must be used when adjusting or working on operating equipment. Voltages in excess of
70 V or current sources in excess of 25 A are covered with barriers. Barriers include warning infol1Ilation
about the hazard encountered upon barrier removal.
e. Personnel must react when someone is being electrically shocked. Perfol1Il the following steps:
1. Shut off power.
2. Call for help.
3. Administer first aid if qualified.
Under no circumstances should a person come directly in contact with the body unless the power has
been removed. When immediate removal of the power is not possible, personnel must use a
non-conductive material to try to jolt or pry the body away from the point of shock.
f. Personnel should work with one hand whenever possible to prevent electrical current from passing
through vital organs of the body. In addition, personnel must never work alone. Someone must be
available in the immediate area to render emergency first aid, if necessary.
g. Lifting can cause injury. Items weighing more than 37 pounds must be lifted by two or more people.
h. Some electrolytic capacitors contain aluminum oxide or tantalum. If connected incorrectly, the capacitor
will explode when power is applied. Extreme care must be used when replacing and connecting these
capacitors. The capacitor tenninals must always be connected using the correct polarity: positive to
positive and negative to negative.
The next section contains general safety precautions not directly related to specific procedures or equipment
These precautions are oriented toward the maintenance technician. However, all personnel must understand and
apply these precautions during the many phases of operation and maintenance of the equipment. The following
precautions must be observed:

DO NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT ALONE

Never work on electrical equipment unless another person familiar with the operation and hazards of the
equipment is near. When the maintenance technician is aided by operators, ensure that operators are aware of
the hazards.
GROUNDING
Always ensure that all equipment and assemblies are properly grounded when operating or servicing.
TURN OFF POWER AND GROUND CAPACITORS
Whenever possible, power to equipment should be turned off before beginning work on the equipment. Be
sure to ground all capacitors that are potentially dangerous.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS

Operators and maintainers must observe all safety regulations at all times. Do not change components or
make adjusnnents inside equipment with a high voltage supply on unless required by the procedure. Under
certain conditions, dangerous potentials may exist in circuits with power controls off, due to charges retained
by capacitors.

xxx
lIJ HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

DO NOT BYPASS INTERLOCKS

Do not bypass any interlocks unnecessarily. If it is necessary to employ an interlock bypass for equipment
servicing, use extreme care not to come in contact with hazardous voltages.
USE CARE HANDUNG HEAVY EQUIPMENT
Never anempt to lift large assemblies or equipment without knowing their weight. Use enough personnel or a
mechanical lifting device to properly handle the item without causing personal injury.
HEED WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
Specific warnings and cautions are provided to ensure the safety and protection of personnel and equipment.
Be familiar with and strictly follow all warnings and cautions on the equipment and in technical manuals.
PROTECTNE EYEWEAR
All personnel must wear protective eyewear when servicing or maintaining equipment. Protective eyewear
must be worn at all times when using tools.
4. PROTECTION OF STATIC-SENSITIVE DEVICES

Diode input-protection is provided on all CMOS devices. This protection is designed to guard against adverse
electrical conditions such as electrostatic discharge. Although most static-sensitive devices contain protective
circuitry, several precautionary steps should be taken to avoid the application of potentially damaging
voltages to the inputs of the device.
To protect static-sensitive devices from damage, the following precautions should be observed.
a. Keep all static-sensitive devices in their protective packaging until needed. This packaging is
conductive and should provide adequate protection for the device. Storing or transporting these
devices in conventional plastic containers could be destructive to the device.
b. Disconnect power prior to insertion or extraction of these devices. This also applies to PWBs
containing such devices.
c. Double check test equipment voltages and polarities prior to conducting any tests.
d. Avoid contact with the leads of the device. The component should always be handled carefully by
the ends or side opposite the leads.
e. Avoid contact between PWB circuits or component leads and synthetic clothing.
f. Use only soldering irons and tools that are properly grounded. Ungrounded soldering tips or tools
can destroy these devices. SOLDERING GUNS MUST NEVER BE USED.

xxxi
 mHARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

5. EXPLANATION OF HAZARD SYMBOLS

The symbol of drops of a liquid onto a hand shows that the material will cause bums or
irritation of human skin or tissue.

The symbol of a person wearing goggles shows that the material will injure your eyes.

The symbol of a flame shows that a material can ignite and bum you.

The symbol of a skull and crossbones shows that a material is poisonous or a danger to life.

The symbol of a human figure in a cloud shows that vapors of a material present danger to your
life or health.

xxxII
IJHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS ABOUT THIS MANUAL

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual contains information necessary to install, operate,
program, and maintain the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack
Tactical Communications Systems.

xxxIII/xxxiv
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

RF-5200
FALCON™ SERIES
MANPACK TACTICAL
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
OPERATIONS
MANUAL
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Figure 1-1. RT-1694 Manpack Receiver-Transmitter

:JjH AR RlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIE S MANPACK SYSTE MS
GENER AL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.1.1 General
ent are cross-referenced here. The
All safety precautions necessary for the protection of personnel and the equipm
is used in the manual, and a brief
WARNING or CAUTION is referenced to the paragraph number where it
items be read in their entirety
subject phrase indicating the content is provided. It is recommended that these
before perfonning the referenced procedure. References are as follows:
• WARNING - Paragraph 6.3.1: High voltages present inside equipment
• CAUTION - Paragraph 6.3.3: Do not bend or force cables.
• WARNING - Paragraph 6.4.2.1: High voltages present inside equipment
• WARNING - Paragraph 6.4.2.2: High voltages present inside equipment
injury or death
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.2.3: Inadequate or defective grounding could cause
e equipment
• CAUTION - Paragraph 8.2.3: Inadequate or defective grounding could damag
• CAUTION - Paragraph 8.5.7: Do not damage or kink coaxial feedline.
or if antenna is to be
• CAUTION - Paragraph 8.5.7.3.4: Guy antenna if winds exceed 50 miles/hour
installed for extended period of time.
result in minor shocks.
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9: Operating an ungrounded manpack radio could
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.2: Do not ship or store batteries in battery case.
lithium-sodium dioxide
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.3: Do not use solar battery charger to charge
batteries.
s with other hazardous
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.4: Do not store lithium-sulfur dioxide batterie
materials.
mble, or mutilate the
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.5: Do not charge, short circuit, incinerate, disasse
lithium-sulfur dioxide battery.
built before 1980.
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.5: Do not use lithium-sulfur dioxide battery
a lithium-sulfur diode
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.5: Do not use halon-type fire extinguisher on
battery fire.
battery is considered
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.6: A partially discharged lithium-sulfur dioxide
hazardous waste.
s in ordinary trash.
• CAUTION - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.6: Do not dispose lithium-sulfur dioxide batterie
from open flame or heat.
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.1.6: Keep lithium-sulfur dioxide batteries away
result in minor shocks.
• WARNING - Paragraph 8.5.9.2: Operating an ungrounded manpack radio could
ge.
• CAUTION - Paragraph 8.5.10: Interface cables can be damaged by static dischar

1-1
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

1.2 INTRODUCTION
1.2.1 Maintenance Levels
Harris/RF Communications designs its products and systems to be supported by up to four maintenance levels.
See Figure 1-2. Each maintenance level relies on a defined set of support documentation and equipment in order
to fulfill its maintenance tasks. The tasks perfonned at each level grow in complexity as fault isolation is
narrowed to the component causing the fault. This concept assists the maintainer by supplying only the
infonnation and materials required for that maintenance level. These levels may be combined to sustain any
particular user maintenance philosophy. The four maintenance levels are:
1.2.1.1 Levell
This level is restricted to fault recognition and detection. Fault isolation is not usually perfonned at this level. An
operator who detects a faulty condition alerts Maintenance Level II for repair.
1.2.1.2 Level II
The maintenance technician repairs the radio system by utilizing a System (Level II) manual to fault isolate to the
faulty unit (for example, receiver-transmitter, power amplifier, antenna coupler, etc.). The faulty Line Replaceable
Unit (LRU) is replaced with a spare and sent to Maintenance Level III.
1.2.1.3 Level III
The faulty unit is selViced at a facility that has support equipment available, typically a hot test bed radio system.
The suspected faulty unit is inserted into the hot test bed radio system and troubleshot down to the faulty
assembly using a Maintenance (Level III) manual. The faulty Shop Replaceable Unit (SRU) is replaced with a
spare and passed to Maintenance Level IV.
1.2.1.4 Level IV
The faulty SRU is returned to Harris/RF Communications for repair. If Level IV maintenance capabilities are
available on-site, the maintenance technician can identify the faulty component on the SRU using a Depot
Maintenance (Level IV) manual that outlines the electronic maintenance techniques and test fixtures necessary to
repair the SRU.
1.2.2 Purpose of this Manual
This manual provides the user radio system operation instructions, as well as all technical infonnation required to
support Level II maintenance as described in Paragraph 1.2.1.2.
The overall intent of this manual is to help the operator effectively use the radio system, and to help the
maintainer expedite repair of the system in a reasonable amount of time, resulting in reduced down-time and
increased system availability. Detailed infonnation that will be useful to the maintainer, such as system
configuration, equipment specifications, fault isolation and repair techniques, required tools and test equipment,
and functional descriptions of assemblies, is provided.

1-2
mH AR RIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANP ACK SYSTE MS
GENE RAL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

NORMAL
OPERATION

LEVELl
YES

TECHNICIAN
REPLACES UNIT
OR CABLE

LEVELl!
DEFECTIVE REPAIRED
UNIT UNIT

NO
REPAIRED
UNIT

TECHNICIAN REPLACES I--_"~

MODULE
LEVEL III

DEFECTIVE
MODULE

REPAIRED
LEVEL IV MODULE

TECHNICIAN REPAIRS YES

MODULE

5032E.()()1

Figure 1·2. Maintenance Flow Chart

1·3
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

1.2.3 Maintenance Support Packages

Harris/RF Communications designs maintenance packages that support these levels. Packages include the
necessary spare parts, training, technical manuals, tools, test equipment, and maintenance aids such as interface
cables, extender cards, and test fixtures.
Refer to Chapter 9, Accessories, for more infonnation on support packages designed to enhance the effectiveness
of this system.
1.2.4 Scope .
This manual contains operation information, functional description, scheduled maintenance, troubleshooting,
corrective maintenance, parts lists, and installation infonnation for the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack
Tactical Communications Systems. This publication does not supersede any previous manual or technical
documentation.
1.2.5 Warranty
Harris Corporation guarantees that if the units that make up the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack Tactical
Communications Systems fail from normal use within one year from the date of shipment due to a defect in
workmanship or materials, Harris will repair or replace the unit at no charge. Repairs made by Harris to the unit
under this warranty are warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship for 60 days from the date
of repair.
For information on how to process a claim under this warranty, and on what is not covered by this warranty, refer
to the warranty infonnation printed on the inside front cover of each unit's Level III maintenance manual.

1-4
mH AR RIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTE MS
GENER AL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.3.1 General
are advanced, integrated,
The RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack Tactical Communications Systems
59.999 9 MHz frequency range.
high-perfonnance communication systems that operate over the 1.6 MHz to
system's capabilities.
Because of its modular design, optional modules can be installed to expand the
amplifiers, antenna couplers, power
The RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack Receiver-Transmitter (R/f), power
of ultra-reliable, full-featured,
supplies, antennas, and options have been carefully integrated to create a family
and user-friendly communication products.
consist of an RT-1694
The RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack Tactical Communications Systems
Receiver-Transmitter and one of the following groups of equipment:
a. AN/PRC-138 Manpack System
1. Battery case
2. Whip antenna kit
3. Manpack radio bag
4. Ancillary kit with handset
5. Operator guide and manuals
b. AN/PRC-138(V)2 Manpack System
1. Battery case
2. Ancillary kit with handset
3. Whip antenna kit
4. Manpack radio bag
5. Ground stake kit
6. CW key with knee clip
7. Cables
8. Operator guide and manuals
c. 20 Watt System
1. RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler
2. 24 Vdc Filter Adapter Assembly (optional)
d. 125 Watt System
1. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier
2. RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply
3. RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter
4. RF-382 Antenna Coupler
5. 24 Vdc Filter Adapter Assembly (optional)

1-5
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

e. 150 Watt System

1. RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier
2. RF-382 Antenna Coupler
1.3.2 Configuration Information
Two plug-in modules are available for the RT-1694(P) Receiver-Transmitter to provide the exact radio features
desired:

• RF-5161-01 Perfonnance Option (A3 Linear Predictive Coding [LPC] VocoderPrinted Wiring Board
[PWB] Assembly)

• RF-5170 Security Option (AIA2 Encryption PWB Assembly)

For more infonnation on these options, refer to Chapter 2, Operation.
1.3.3 Features
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter is a self-contained, portable unit with built-in antenna coupler and power
amplifier assemblies. The RIf can also serve as a common exciter for use with an external power amplifier and
antenna coupler. All radio system commands are entered through the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter front panel.
This modular approach provides commonalty for ease of training, service, and maintenance, and reduces
requirements for logistical support. Advanced features of the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter are described in the
following paragraphs.
1.3.3.1 Remote Control Operation
Full remote-control operation is standard with the Rf-1694 Receiver-Transmitter. The serial asynchronous data
interface allows control using simple text-like commands. Built-in status and help menus allow operation with
laptop computers and data tenninals.
1.3.3.2 Built-In Self-Test Capability
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter is designed with built-in self-test features to pennit operators or maintenance
personnel to fully check the RIf's and external power amplifier's (if connected) perfonnance down to the module
level. Fault conditions are displayed on the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter front panel display.
1.3.3.3 Adjustable High-Contrast Display and Back-Lit Keypad
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter has adjustable backlighting in the display area. This great!y improves
operation in dark environments. Additionally, an adjustable contrast feature makes the display easy to read in
daylight.
The Night Vision Goggle (NVG) filter installed in the RT-1694B(P)/U Receiver-Transmitter allows the display
and keypad to emit low-intensity light at a specific wavelength. This makes the R/f undetectable by enemy troops
wearing night vision goggles, unless the enemy is at close range. Also, the R/f operator who is wearing night
vision goggles can comfortably look at an NVG-compatible RIf without "blooming" the goggle viewfinder.

1-6
;)JHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

1.3.3.4 Active Squelch (RWAS)

Active Squelch sends key, unkey, and keep-alive bursts with a robust serial burst wavefonn. Using these signals, a
receiver can accurately detennine the key state of the transmitter and mute audio accordingly. This traffic
detection can also be used to provide a reliable retransmit keyline.
1.3.3.5 Programming Lockout
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter has a programming lockout feature that requires the use of a password to
change operational and channel programming. This prevents operators from accidentally changing or corrupting
any preprogrammed parameters, thereby improving operational reliability. The default password is supplied on a
card which is included with this manual.
1.3.3.6 Configurablllty
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter is configured as part of the programming process. A user with a password
determines which parameters are programmed and which are selectable by the operator. Those parameters which
an operator may not select for programming are not displayed on the front panel display. This configurability
feature allows the Rtf to be configured to match mission requirements and operator skill.
1.3.3.7 Simplified Operation
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter simplifies operation and programming. One pair of arrow keys (right, left)
located on the keypad are used to scroll from parameter to parameter. A second pair of arrow keys (up, down) are
used to change the setting of the selected parameter. Numeric information (channel and frequency) is entered with
the keypad.
Operation is further simplified by grouping together data transmission characteristics (data speed, modem type,
interleaving, etc.) into one of seven preprogrammed data presets. One of six preprogrammed encryption keys is
also operator selectable.
1.3.3.8 Flexible Data Interface
A selectable synchronous/asynchronous data interface coupled with a dedicated remote control interface allows
flexibility in applications using data devices. This makes the interface to certain encryption devices simpler and
more direct. In addition, 24 volt power is available at the DATA connector to power accessories and
intercommunication systems.
1.3.4 Optional Plug-In Modules
Two optional plug-in modules are available for the RT-1694(P) Receiver-Transmitter to provide the exact radio
features desired. These modules are described in the following paragraphs. (The RF-5161-01 is standard in the
RT·1694A(p) and RT-1694B(P)/U configurations.)
1.3.4.1 RF-5161-01 Performance Option (A3 LPC Vocoder Assembly)

The A3 LPC Vocoder Assembly can be factory configured to provide either Digital Voice or Analog Voice
Security (AVS). When configured for digital voice, this assembly provides secure voice communications using
Forward Error Correction (FEC) with a similarly equipped Rtf. When used with the RF-5170 Security Option
(A lA2 Encryption PWB Assembly), encrypted digital voice provides an extremely high level of security.
When configured for AVS, this assembly provides secure voice by scrambling the transmitted audio signal.

1·7
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

1.3.4.2 RF·5170 security Option (A1A2 Encryption PWB Assembly)

This assembly provides the R/f with the ability to encrypt and decrypt digital data. If the A3 LPC Vocoder
Assembly (RF-5161-0l Performance Option) is also installed, the A1A2 Encryption PWB Assembly provides
digital voice capabilities.
1.3.5 General System Relationship
Figure 1-3 shows the typical relationship of units in the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System when used
in the AN/pRC-138 Manpack configuration. Figure 1-4 shows the typical relationship of units in the RF-5200
FALCON'" Series Manpack System when used in the 20 watt vehicular configuration. Figure 1-5 shows the
typical relationship of units in the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System when used in the 150 watt
vehicular configuration. Figure 1-6 shows the typical relationship of units in the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series
Manpack System when used in the 125 watt vehicular configuration. For more information on how to install these
different system configurations, refer to Chapter 8, Installation.
When operated in the AN/PRC-138 Manpack configuration, the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter utilizes its internal
20 watt power amplifier assembly and antenna coupler assembly. Direct Current (DC) power is provided via the
attached battery case and batteries. When operated in the vehicular configurations, the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter is the exciter and controller for the external power amplifier and antenna coupler. A power
supply or alternator!battery system provides +26.4 Vdc to the external power amplifier. The Radio Frequency
(RF) output of the power amplifier is sent to the antenna coupler. The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter
communicates with the antenna coupler via the coupler control interface provided on the power amplifier.

1·8
IJH AR RlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

RT-1694
RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER

WHIP
ANTENNA
KIT
BATTERY CASE

MANPACK
RADIO
BAG

Series Manpack System

Figure 1-3. Typical Relationship of Units In RF-5200 FALCON'"
(AN/PRC-138 Manpack Configuratio n)

1-9
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS 11 HARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

TO RIl·PA
HANDSET RT·1694 COAX CABLE
RECEIVER·
TRANSMITTER

TO
GROUND

RIl - PA CONTROL CABLE

J12

IF II

RF·5030PA·20E PAlCPLR RF·5030PA·20E PAlCPLR

REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW
rOGND

TO
VEHICULAR
ALTERNATOR/BATTERY
SYSTEM
MNPK-ll41

Figure 1-4. Typical Relationship of Units In RF-5200 FALCON"" Series Manpack System
(20 Watt Vehicular Configuration)

1-10
mH AR RIS RF-5200 FALCO N SERIES MANP ACK SYSTE MS
GENE RAL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

RIT-PA
RT·1694 COAX CABLE
RECEIVER-
TRANSMITTER

TO FRONT
GROUND VIEW

HANDSET
RIT·PA RF·5033PA-150
CONTROL CABLE POWER AMPLIFIER

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- _.
"NOTE: ANTENNA IS
CONNECTED TO
OPPOSITE SIDE OF RF-5033PA-150 PA-eOUPLER
RF-382 ANTENNA POWER AMPLIFIER CONTROL CABLE
COUPLER.

-- -. -
.....,,-.- '1--...._ - - - - - - - - - .

00_
........
o'"
TO
GROUND
D
REAR
VIEW

TO RF-382
PA-eOUPLER ANTENNA COUPLER"
VHF
COAX CABLE
TO ANTENNA
VEHICLE (50 OHM)
1694--003
ALTERNATOR/BATTERY
SYSTEM

Series Manpack System

Figure 1·5. Typical Relationship of Units In RF·5200 FALCON""
(150 Watt Vehicular Config uratio n)

1·11
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

"NOTE: ANTENNA IS
CONNECTED TO
OPPOSITE SIDE OF
RF·382 ANTENNA
TO RfT·PA COUPLER.
HANDSET RT·1694 COAX CABLE
RECEIVER·
TRANSMITTER
rClq rfAEOwq, 83'1.aa

R91il-29 .6999 c::

USB OFF CLR OFF

RfT·PA
CONTROL CABLE

RF·382
ANTENNA COUPLER" RF·S032PA·125E

o POWER AMPLIFIER

PA-eOUPLER
CONTROL CABLE
DC
POWER CABLE
/
TO
GROUND
PA·COUPLER
COAX CABLE

TO
GROUND
RF·5055PS
AC/DC POWER SUPPLY RF·S056PS
DC/DC POWER CONVERTER

DC TO
POWER CABLE VEHICLE
AC TOAC ALTERNATOR/BATTERY
POWER CABLE POWER SOURCE SYSTEM

MNPK·OO1A

Figure 1-6. Typical Relationship of Units In RF·5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System
(125 Watt Vehicular Configuration)

1·12
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

1.3.6 Specifications
The following tables provide infonnation covering the specifications of the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter, the
RF-5161-0l Perfonnance Option, the RF-5170 Security Option, the external power amplifiers, the external
antenna coupler, and the external power supplies. Refer to the following tables for specifications:

• Table 1-1 - RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Specifications

• Table 1-2 - High-Speed Data Modem Specifications

• Table 1-3 - Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) Specifications

• Table 1-4 - Voice Processor Specifications

• Table 1-5 - Frequency Hopping Specifications

• Table 1-6 - Digital Encryption Specifications

• Table 1-7 - RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler Specifications

• Table 1-8 - RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Specifications

• Table 1-9 - RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Specifications

• Table 1-10 - RF-382 Antenna Coupler Specifications

• Table 1-11 - RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Specifications

• Table 1-12 - RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Specifications

• Table 1-13 - RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply Specifications

1-13
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1-1. RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Specifications

Function Specification
GENERAL
Frequency Range 1.6 to 59.9999 MHz
Preset Channels 100
Frequency Stability ±1 x 10-6
Modes of Operation BE (single sideband, upper or lower, suppressed carrier telephony)
H3E (compatible Amplitude Modulation [AM] single sideband plus full
carrier)
J2A (Continuous Wave [CW] single sideband suppressed carrier)
F3E (Frequency Modulation [FM] telephony)
RF Input/Output Impedance 50 ohms nominal, unbalanced
Power Input +24 Vdc
Antenna Tuning Capability 50 ohm output: 1.6 to 60 MHz
8, 10, 16 ft. whips: 1.6 to 60 MHz
AS-2259/GR (RF-1936): 3.5 to 30 MHz
RF-1940 Tactical Oipole: 3 to 30 MHz
Oata Interfaces Synchronous and Asynchronous RS-232C and MIL-STO-188-114A
Temperature Range -400 C to +70 0 C (-112 0 F to +284 0 F)
Environmental MIL-STO-8IOE
Size RI'-1694 only: 26.4W x 21.60 x 7.8H em
(lO.4W x 8.50 x 3.1H in.)
With battery case: 26.4W x 33.80 x 7.8H cm
(IO.4W x 13.30 x 3.1H in.)
Weight RI'-1694(p):
3.86 kg (8.5 Ibs.) without battery
7.71 kg (171bs.) with case and two Nickel-Cadmium (Ni-Cd) batteries

RI'-1694B(p)/U:
3.38 kg (7.45 Ibs.) without battery case
5.91 kg (13.02100.) with case and two lithium batteries
Optional Modules [RT-1694(p)] RF-5161-01 Performance Option (A3 LPC Vocoder Assembly);
RF-5170 Security Option (AIA2 Encryption PWB Assembly)
NOTE
For the RT-1694A(P) and RT-1694B(P)/U configurations, the
RF-5161-0l is standard equipment.

1·14
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-1. RT-1694 Receiver-transmitter Specifications - Continued

Function Specification
RECEIVER
Sensitivity (without preamplifier) Single Sideband (SSB): -110 dBm (0.7 uV) for 10 dB SINAD
(2.7 kHz bandwidth)
AM: -98 dBm (2.8 uV) for 10 dB SINAD
(6 kHz bandwidth 30% modulation)
CW: -117 dBm (0.3 uV) for 10 dB (S+N)/N
(0.35 kHz bandwidth)
FM: -107 dBm (1.0 uV) for 10 dB SINAD
Audio Output 15 mW at 1000 ohms into external handset
Squelch Front panel selectable, noise or 150 Hz tone (PM) or RWAS (High
Frequency [HP] SSB)
Image and IF Rejection Greater than 80 dB
Spurious Responses RT-1694(P): Less than 10 spurs greater than -90 dBm equivalent input;
fewer than 500 spurs are greater than -120 dBm equivalent input

RT-1694B(P)IU: Less than -112 dBm for 99% of available 3 kHz

channels. Less than-1oo dBm for 0.8%. For 0.2%, may exceed the
above specifications.
AGC Characteristics Mode dependent, selectable from front panel
Intennodulation Distortion RT-1694(P):
In band: -45 dB or better for two -20 dBm signals within the
IF passband
Out of band: -80 dB or better for two -35 dBm signals separated
100 kHz or more

RT-1694B(P)IU:
In band: -35 dB or better for two -6 dBm (0 dBm/peak Envelope
Power [PEP]) signals at rated audio output
Out of band: Third order intercept point shall be +10 dBm or greater
Overload Protection Receiver protected to 70 Vnns

1-15
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRJS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1-1. RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Specifications - Continued

Function Specification
TRANSMITTER
Power Output SSB, CW, AME: 1,5,20 watts PEP/Average
FM: 1,5, 10 watts
Carrier Suppression Greater than 60 dB below PEP output (J3E mode)
Undesired Sideband Rejection Greater than 60 dB below PEP output
Intennodulation Distortion 1.6 - 29.9999 MHz: -24 dBc minimum
30.0 - 59.9999 MHz: -18 dBc minimum
Audio Input Handset: 1.5 mVnns into 150 ohms
Fixed Level: 0.774 Vnns into 600 ohms
NOTE

Because Harris engineers continuously strive to improve all

aspects of Harris equipment, specifications are subject to change
without notice.

1-16
mH AR RIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 1-2. High-Speed Data Modem Speci ficatio ns

Function Specification
39-TONE MODE

Data Rates 2400, 1200,600, 300, 150, 75 bits per second (bps)
Transmission Mode Half duplex
FEC Coding (14, 10,2) Reed-Solomon Code at 2400 bps
(7,3,2 ) Reed-Solomon Code at lower bps rates
Interleaving Four levels (shon, long, alternate short, alternate long)
Tone Library 39 Tones, 675 to 2812.5 Hz, 56.25-Hz tone spacing;
Doppler tracking tone: 393.75 Hz
Modulation TIme Differential Quaternary Phase Shift Keying (TDQPSK) (four
phase)
Demodulation 128-point Fast Fourier Transfonn (FFf)
Doppler Correction 75 Hz, tracking up to 3.5 Hz per second
Channel Bandwidth 3000Hz
SERIAL (SINGLE TONE) MODE (RT-1694B(P)/U ONLY)
Data Rates 75 bps (Receive [RX] and Transmit [TX])
150,300,600, 1200,2400 bps (TX only)
FEC Coding Convolutional with Viterbi soft decision decoding
Interleaving Delay O. 1.2, or 9.6 seconds
Modulation 8-ary PSK, 2400 symbols/second
Multipath Tolerance 6.5 milliseconds
Bandwidth 3000 Hz (300 - 3300 Hz)
Doppler Sync ± 75 Hz
Equalization Data Directed Equalization
Synchronization Sync on preamble
Adaptive Filtering Suppression of cenain classes of in-band interference
BINARY FSK MODE

Data Rate 300, 150. 75 bps

Transmission Mode Half duplex
Signaling Phase Continuous Binary FSK
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) Front-Panel Selectable
Modes Wide Shift: 2000 Hz ± 425 Hz (75. 150. 300 bps)
Narrow Shift: 2805 Hz ± 42.5 Hz (75 bps)
Alternate: 2000 Hz ± 85 Hz (75, 150 bps)
Variable: Program mable mark/space: 350 Hz - 3000 Hz
(75, 150.300 bps)

1-17
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1-2. High-Speed Data Modem Specifications - Continued

Function Specification
DATA INTERFACES
Data Asynchronous (4800,2400, 1200, 600, 300, 150, 75 bps), ASCII

Synchronous (2400, 1200, 600, 300, 150, 75 bps;

internal or external clock)
Control Request To Send (RTS), Clear To Send (CTS), XON-XOFF, CTRL-B
(key), CTRL-C (unkey)
Electrical RS-232C, MIL-STD-188-114A
Remote Control Full function

1-18
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTENS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-3. ALE Specifications

Function Specification
PROGRAMMING
Parameters Radio channel groups, local addresses, individual (remote) addresses,
network addresses, time of day, Link Quality Analysis (LQA) start time
and repeat intetval, antenna coupler tune time, link timeout
Retention 1 year minimum
CHANNELS
Number 100 simplex and/or half duplex
Frequency Range Operating: 1.6 to 59.9999 MHz
Full Perfonnance: 1.6 to 30 MHz
Modes Upper Sideband (USB), Lower Sideband (LSB), Amplitude Modulated
Envelope (AME), FSK, CW, data, digital voice
Channel Scan Groups 10
SCAN
Rate Five (5) channels per second
Scanned Channels 100 channels maximum
Channel Scan Groups Ten (10)
SELECTIVE CALLING
Types Individual, net, all call, selective all call may be placed from front panel
or remote. Any calls, selective any calls, and wildcard calls may be
placed from remote only. Group calls can be received, but not placed.
Channel Selection Automatic or manual
Handshake Three-way for individual, net, group, any, wildcard;
One-way for allcalls
Other Digital squelch, listen before transmit (ALE traffic only), key-to-call
ADDRESSES
Fonnat 1 to 15 character, alphanumeric
Local Addresses 20 maximum
Network Addresses ZOmaximum
Individual Addresses ZOO maximum

1-19
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1·3. ALE Specifications - Continued

Function Specification
LINK QUALITY ANALYSIS
Types Sounding (One way) and exchange (Three way handshake)
Measurement Weighted average based on SINAD and Pseudo Bit Error Rate (PBER)
as per MIL-STD-188-141A.
Start Time Immediate, or programmed time-of-day
Repeat Interval One time, or interval (hours/minutes)
Addresses Queued Ten (10) maximum
LQA Score Storage 100 channels x 200 addresses x 2 directions
SIGNALING
Modulation Phase continuous 8-ary FSK
Symbol Rate 125 baud
Bit Rate 375 bps
Coding Golay FEC, 2/3 majority vote, interleaving
Calling Cycle I to 79 seconds (depending on call type, channels scanned, and call sign
length)
BillLT-IN TEST
Functions Tested ALE, radio, power amplifier, antenna coupler
REMOTE CONTROL
Interface RS-232C
Rate 300 to 9600 baud asynchronous
Other Two stop bits, Eight data bits, no parity American National Standard
Code for Information Exchange (ASCII) character based (compatible
with existing RF-5000 remote control)

1-20
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1·4. Voice Processor Specifications

Function Specification
GENERAL
Audio Input Handset connector: 1.5 mVrms into 150 ohms;
600 ohm auxiliary connector: 0/-10 dBm
VOICE DIGITIZATION
Algorithm LPC-1O-52E
Bit Rates 2400 (single channel) or 800 bps (frequency hopping)
Bit Error Tolerance 2 x 10-2 random Bit Error Rate (BER) for Data Rate Transmission
(DRT) greater than 80
Synchronization Frame synchronization at beginning of message
Tracking Continuous synchronization during message
End of Message End of message data or loss of tracking data for two seconds
AVS
Encryption Algorithm Split band inversion with time diversity scrambling
Bands 24
Maximum Transmit Delay 0.5 second
Number of Codes 10+8

1-21
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1·5. Frequency Hopping Specifications

Function Specification
Frequency Range 2.0 MHz to 29.9950 MHz
Hopping Restrictions Wide Band and List modes not available when internal antenna coupler
is enabled or external antenna coupler is attached.
Hop Rate 20 hops/second
Data Rate 75, 150, 300 bps
Forward Error Correction Frequency diversity (all rates);
14, 10, 2 Reed-Solomon (75, 150, 300 bps)
Hop Nets Ten (to) (synchronization on only one of the ten nets at a time)
Hopping Bandwidths Wide Band:
Programmable bandwidth: 70 kHz to 2 MHz
Minimum lower frequency: 2.0 MHz
Maximum upper frequency: 29.995 MHz

Narrow Band:
Center frequency: 15 MHz $ Fc $ 29.995 MHz
Bandwidth: 300 kHz
Narrowband (NB) spacing: 5 kHz

Center frequency: 5 MHz $ Fc $ 15 MHz

Bandwidth: 100kHz
NB spacing: 2.5 kHz

Center frequency: 3.5 MHz $ Fc $ 5 MHz

Bandwidth: 50 kHz
NB spacing: 2.5 kHz

Center frequency: 1.6 MHz $ Fc $ 3.5 MHz

Bandwidth: 17.5 kHz (7.5 kHz -low; to kHz - high)

Frequency List:
Programmable bandwidth: 70 kHz to 2 MHz
Minimum lower frequency: 2.0 MHz
Maximum upper frequency: 29.995 MHz
Frequency Spacing Wide Band Mode: 5 kHz
Narrow Band Mode: 2.5 kHz, 5 kHz center frequency dependent
Frequency List Mode: 5 kHz
Frequency List 15 to 100 frequencies
Hopset Exclusions Sub-bands (Ten [to] total) - wideband hopping only
PN Generator Non-linear, repeat cycle> Five years
Initial Sync Time 29 seconds - required once per eight-hour period
Late Net Entry Time 29 seconds
In-Net Message Sync Coarse Synchronization: continuous for up to eight hours
Fine Synchronization: 300 millisecond typical after key-down
Excision Filtering Excision of up to two single frequency interfering signals within the
audio passband (typically provides greater than 25 dB equivalent
filtering)

1-22
mH AR RIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 1-6. Digital Encryption Specifications

Function Specification
GENERAL

Frequency Range The radio is capable of operating in digital voice mode from 1.6 MHz to
59.9999 MHz and meets full perfonnance specifications in this mode
from 1.6 MHz to 29.9999 MHz.
Algorithm LPC-I0-52E
Bit Rates 2400 bps in single channel or 800 bps in frequency hopping
Synchronization Frame synchronization at beginning of message
Tracking Continuous synchronization during message
End of Message End of message data or loss of tracking data for two seconds
PROGRAMMERS
The RF-5960 Master Code Programmer provides programming of the
RF-5960 Master Code Programmer up to 1 x 1052 possible
Data Encryption Option with six key codes with
combinations in a portable configuration. Operates from 115/230 Vac,
50/60 Hz, or as a portable unit on an internal BB-5901U rechargeable
Ni-Cd battery. The internal battery is automatically recharged when
operated on Alternating Current (AC).
Available Codes 1 x 1052 possible settings
Power 115/230 Vac, 50/60 Hz, internal BB-5901U rechargeable Ni-Cd battery
Size 5.38 H x 7.5 W x 8.5 Din. (11.8 H x 16.5 W x 18.7 D cm)
Weight 11.5 Ibs. (29 kg)
RF-5961 Field Code Programmer The RF-5961 Field Code Programmer is a pocket-sized unit that permits
programming of the Digital Encryption Unit option (each with six key
codes having up to 1052 combinations). A self-contained lithium battery
retains codes and has an emergency code dump feature. The RF-5960
Master Code Programmer is required to insert codes.
52
Key Codes Stores six of the available 1 x 10 codes for loading.
Power Internal lithium battery
Size 1.25 H x 1.93 W x 5.6 D inches (2.8 H x 4.2 W x 12.3 D cm)
Weight 0.5 Ibs. (1.3 kg)

1-23
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1-7. RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier Specifications

Function Specification
GENERAL
Frequency Range 1.6 to 59.99999 MHz
Modes of Operation J3E (single sideband, upper or lower, suppressed carrier telephony);
H3E (compatible AM single sideband plus full carrier telephony);
J2A MCW (single sideband suppressed carrier keyed tone);
F2B (FSK);
F3E (PM);
39-Tone DQPSK.
RF Input/Output Impedance 50 ohms nominal, unbalanced
Power Input +26.4 Vdc (per MIL-STD-1275) at 3.0 amperes, maximum
Temperature Range -40° C to +70° C (-112° F to +284° F)
Leakage. MIL-STD-8l0E (1 meter depth)
Shock/Vibration MIL-STD-81OE
Humidity MIL-STD-81OE (0 to 95%)
Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) Less than 15 minutes to the module level
Size 5.75 W x 8.13 D x 3.45 H inches
(14.6 W x 20.6 D x 8.8 H em)
Weight 5.5 Ibs. (2.5 kg)
POWER AMPLIF1ER
Power Output 20 watts PEP/average into 50 ohms, 1.6 to 30 MHz;
10 watts average FM, into 50 ohms, 20 to 60 MHz
RF Drive Requirements +20 dBm (100 mW)
ANTENNA TUNER
Antenna Tuning Capability Standard 8-, 10-, 16-, and 35-foot whips.
AS-2259/GR (RF-1936): 3.5 to 10 MHz
Tuning Time Learn Tune: <two seconds;
Memory Tune: <ten milliseconds
NOTE
The RF-5142FH Frequency Hopping option is limited to
narrowband operation when used with the RF-5030PA-20E 20
Watt Power Amplifier.

1-24
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-8. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Specifications

Function Specification
GENERAL
Frequency Range 1.6 to 29.99999 MHz
RF Input/Output Impedance 50 ohm nominal, unbalanced
Power Input +26.4 Vdc (per MIL-STD-1275) at 15 amperes, maximum
Temperature Range -40° C to +70° C (-112° F to +284° F)
Environmental MIL-STD-81OE
Leakage MIL-STD-810E (1 meter depth)
Size 7.5 W x 10.0 D x 5.5 H in. (19.0 W x 25.5 D x 14.0 H cm)
Weight 12.8 lbs. (5.8 kg)
POWER AMPLIFIER
Power Output 125 Watts PEP/average into 50 Ohms
RF Drive Requirements +20 dBm (100 mW)
Intermodulation Distortion -30 dB below PEP
Harmonic Output -40 dB

1-25
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1-9. RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Specifications

Function Specification
GENERAL
Frequency Range 1.6 to 59.99999 MHz
RF Input/Output Impedance 50 ohm nominal, unbalanced
Power Input +28.0 Vdc (per MIL-STD-1275) at 20 A maximum
Temperature Range -40° C to +70° C (-112° F to +284° F)
Environmental MIL-STD-810E
Leakage MIL-STD-81OE (l meter depth)
Size 11.0 W x 15.5 D x 7.0 H inches
(27.9 W x 39.4 D x 17.8 H cm)
Weight 33.01bs. (15.0 kg)

POWER AMPLIFIER
Power Output 150 watts PEP/Average into a 50 ohm load (1.6 MHz to 29.99999 MHz)
60 watts PEP/Average into a 50 ohm load (30.0 MHz to 59.99999 MHz)
RF Drive Requirements +20 dBm (100 mW)
Intermodulation Distortion 25 dB below 150 watt PEP (1.6 MHz to 29.99999 MHz)
25 dB below 60 watt PEP (30.0 MHz to 59.99999 MHz)
Harmonic Output 45 dB below 150 watt PEP (1.6 MHz to 29.99999 MHz)
45 dB below 60 watt PEP (30.0 MHz to 59.99999 MHz)

1-26
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION

Table 1-10. RF-382 Antenna Coupler Specifications

Function Specification
GENERAL
Rated RF Input Power, Frequency Up to 500 watts PEP
Range, and Tuning Capability 1.5 to 30 MHz: 75- to 150-ft. long-wires
(long-wires longer than 75 ft. require 1960-3006 Long-Wire Adapter),
40 to 100 feet dipoles (including RF-1912 and AS-2259/GR)
2.5 to 30 MHz: 35 ft. whips
4 to 30 MHz: 24 ft. whips
6 to 30 MHz: 15 ft. whips
Tuning Accuracy Automatically tunes to 50 ohms to within a Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio (VSWR) of 1.5: 1.
Tuning Time 25 milliseconds tuning from memory based on prior tuneup of typically
less than one second (four seconds maximum).
Efficiency Whips: 1.5 to 4 MHz, 15 to 85%; 4 to 30 MHz, 50 to 95%
Dipoles: 1.5 to 30 MHz, 60 to 95%
Features Protection from high VSWR, high temperature, RF overvoltage and
overcurrent; Built-In Test (BIT); automatic and manually-controlled
receive bypass; 25 ms tune time; 10 to 32 Vdc primary power; lightning
surge protection on all control lines; 512-channel memory
Tune Power Requirements 10 to 50 watts forward power throughout tuning cycle
Primary Power Requirements 10 to 32 Vdc at 2.5 A maximum during tuning; 1.5 A maximum after
tuning
Remote Capability Up to 250 ft. separation between transmitter and coupler
Enclosure Design Submersible to 3 ft. (.9 m) of water, designed for exposed installations.
Weight 291bs. (13.2 kg)
Size 7.5 x 11.1 x 18.5 inches (19.1 x 28.2 x 47.0 cm), including projections
6.6 x 11.1 x 15.1 inches (16.8 x 28.2 x 38.4 cm), excluding projections
Four mounting holes dimensions: 7.25 x 14.85 inches (18.4 x 37.7 cm)
Operating Temperature Range -28 0 C to +65 0 C (-18 0 F to +1500 F)
Control Lines Keyline, Key Disable, Tune Power Request, Fault and Thennal Fault
(RF-382-02 Antenna Coupler only), Retune Pulse, and Bypass
Accessories Supplied Type N RF coaxial mating connector, control cable mating connector,
cable installation material, coupler mounting hardware, installation
material, and instruction manual
VIBRATION
MIL-STD-810E Method 514.3, category 8, test procedure 1-3.2.10 (random vibration) for
ground mobile equipment
MIL-STD-810B Method 514, procedure VIII, curve Y, except 5 to 55 Hz and .15 inches
D.A. or 3.5 G (whichever is less)
MIL-STD-167-1 Type I (sinusoidal resonance search) for shipboard equipment

1-27
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1·10. RF-382 Antenna Coupler Specifications - Continued

Function Specification
SHOCK
MIL-STD-810E Method 516.3, procedure I (functional shock) for ground mobile
equipment (40 G, II ms sawtooth); procedure VI (bench handling
shock) for equipment experiencing bench-type maintenance
Temperature MIL-STD-810E, Method 501.2, procedures I and II (storage at 70° C
and operation at 65° C); Method 502.2, procedures I and II (storage and
operation at -40C)
Humidity MIL-SID-8IOE; Method 507.2, procedure II (0 to 100% relative
humidity at 65° C)
Altitude MIL-SID-8IOE; Method 500.2, procedures I and II (storage and
operating to 15,000 ft.)
Salt Fog MIL-STD-810E; Method 509.2, procedure I (5% salt solution)
Dust MIL-SID-8IOE; Method 510.2, procedures I and II (blowing dust and
sand)
Rain MIL-SID-8IOE; Method 506.2, procedure I (blowing rain)
Leakage MIL-STD-810E; Method 512.2, procedure I (basic leakage-immersion)
Options Navy gray or olive drab exterior finish
Voltage Pre-Regulator (10208-5017) for use with RF-280 and
RF-230/RF-236 Transceivers
1960-3006 Long-wire Adapter
Accessories RF-2066 Antenna Base Plate Kit
RF-285-Q4 Mounting Tray
RF-3821SSK Site Spares Kit
RF-382/ARK Assembly Repair Kit
RF-382/MRK Maintenance Repair Kit
RF-636 Dry Air Pump
RF-628 Dry Nitrogen Kit

1-28
mJH ARR lS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 1-11. RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Specifications

Function Specification

Input Voltage 110 to 240 Vac at 47 to 62 Hz nominal

Output 26.4 Vdc at 23 A
Efficiency 85% minimum
Load Regulation 300mV
Line Regulation 50mV
Output Current Duty Cycle 4:1 RX/fX
Size 7.5 W x 11.4 D x 2.5 H in. (l9.l W x 29.0 D x 6.35 Hem)
Weight 7.6 lbs. (3.45 kg)
0
Temperature Range -55 0 C to +700 C (-670 F to +158 F)
Environmental MIL-STD-81OE

1-29
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1-12. RF·5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Specifications

Function Specification
Input Voltage 12 to 28 Vdc nominal
Output 26.4 Vdc at 22 A
Efficiency 75% minimum at full load with an input voltage of 25 to 30 Vdc
Load Regulation 300mV
Line Regulation 50mV
Output Current Duty Cycle 4:1 RXtrX
Size 7.5 W x 12.75 D x 3.3 H inches (19.1 W x 32.4 D x 8.38 H cm)
Weight Illbs. (5.0 kg)
Temperature Range -55 0 C to +700 C (-fJ7° F to +1580 F)
Environmental MIL-STD-8IOE

Table 1-13. RF-5051P5-125 Power Supply Specifications

Function Specification
Input Voltage 150 - 230 AC Single Phase (240 V nominal tap selected)
Note: Tap selection is automatic.
Line Frequency 47 -440 Hz
Power Consumption (RF-5051PS-125) 1010 Watts/1450 VA at full load
Output (RF-5051PS-125) 28 Vdc at 30 A (+26.4 Vdc nominal)
Load Regulation -10 mV/ampere
Line Regulation 30 mV maximum output variation for 120/240 V ± 20% input
variation
Size 7.5 W x 13.5 D x 5.5 H in. (19.0 W x 34.3 D x 14.0 H cm)
Weight 17.3Ibs. (7.86 kg)
Temperature Range -400 C to +70 0 C (-112 0 F to +284 0 F)
Shock/Vibration MIL-STD-810E

1-30
;J)H AR RlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

1.4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR SYSTEM UNITS

1.4.1 General
Series Manpack Systems.
The following paragraphs describe the major units of the RF-5200 FALCON""
1.4.2 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter
cy range. All normal RF-5200
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter covers the 1.6 MHz to 59.9999 MHz frequen
32-charaeter, alphanumeric display
FALCON"" Series manpack functions are controlled from the front panel. A
All RF-5200 FALCON"" Series
provides system status and data entry to simplify operation and programming.
the need for exterior accessories.
Manpack System optional assemblies are installed in the chassis, eliminating
Figure 1-7 shows the 1U-1694 Receiver-Transmitter.

Figure 1-7. RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter

1-31
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

1.4.3 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler

This unit provides remote power amplifier and antenna tuning capability. Its small size and 20 watt rating make
the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler ideal for vehicular applications where the combination of
the RF-382 Antenna Coupler and an RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier are too large and the 125 watts
of power are not needed.
The RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler provides input power conditioning and receiver
protection to the transceiver, as well as transmitter amplification, hannonic filtering, and antenna matching. The
RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler is fully controlled by the transceiver and matches its
frequency range from 1.6 MHz up to 59.9999 MHz. The RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler is
shown in Figure 1-8.

Figure 1-8. RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler

1-32
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION

1.4.4 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier

The RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier automatically responds to control inputs from the RI'-1694
Receiver-Transmitter. It contains an integral power supply, control circuits, and harmonic filters, and also
provides power supply overload protection for the R!I'. Primary DC power for the R/f is routed from the source.
through protection circuits in the power amplifier, and through the control cable to the RIf. Encrypted digital
voice or modem data may be sent in either single-channel or frequency-hopping modes. The R!I' also monitors
the presence and operational status of both the power amplifier and the coupler, via the power amplifier to Rtf
control cable.

Although the power amplifier is typically located near the RIf, it can be separated by up to 150 feet (46 meters).
The power amplifier can be mounted on the RF-5071 VSM Single Shock Mount.

There are no controls or indicators on the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier, except a resettable circuit
breaker which provides overload protection to the system. The RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier is
shown in Figure 1-9.

Figure 1-9. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier

1-33
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS I) HARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

1.4.5 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier

The RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier is mounted on the RF-5073 Vehicular Shock Mount, connected to
an RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter. Like the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier, the RF-5033PA-150 150
Watt Power Amplifier is operator transparent. It requires either a separate antenna coupler or operation into a
broadband antenna system that appears to the power amplifier as a 50 ohm load (within the VSWR
specifications). An audio loudspeaker is built into the RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier. Speaker
volume is controlled from the R/f front panel. The RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier is shown in Figure
I-tO.

Figure 1-10. RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier

1-34
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

1.4.6 RF-382 Automatic Antenna Coupler

The RF-382 Antenna Coupler is a 500 Watt PEP/250 watt average fast tune automatic antenna coupler. This unit
automatically matches the output of the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Wan Power Amplifier to a wide range of whip,
dipole, and long-wire antennas over the full operating range of the system. After an initial tuning cycle, the tune
time of the RF-382 Antenna Coupler is 25 milliseconds. The initial tune cycle time is typically less than one
second.
All RF-382 Antenna Coupler operation is automatic in response to control signals from the Rtf (via the power
amplifier). Coupler status is reported back to the Rtf through the power amplifier control cable. There are no
operator controls on the coupler. The RF-382 Antenna Coupler is shown in Figure 1-11.

Figure 1-11. RF-382 Automatic Antenna Coupler

1-35
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

1.4.7 RF·5055PS AC/DC Power Supply

The RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply mounts directly to the vehicle, and provides power to the RF-5056PS
DC/DC Power Converter. The RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply accepts AC input from commercial 110 Vac to
240 Vac at 47 Hz to 62 Hz. The RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter routes the RF-5055PS AC/DC Power
Supply's output to the external power amplifier. The RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply is shown in Figure 1-12.

Figure 1·12. RF·5055PS AC/DC Power Supply

1·36
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

1.4.8 RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter

The RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter will be mounted under the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power
Amplifier, and share the same shock mount. The RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter provides a regulated 26.4
Vdc output, and will accept the following DC input sources:

• Vehicle 12 volt DC electrical system

• Vehicle 24 volt DC electrical system

• Tactical vehicle 28 volt DC electrical system

• 26.4 volt DC from the RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply
When power from the RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply is present at the AUX DC INPUT connector on the
RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter, the RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter powers down its internal
regulator to conserve vehicle battery life. The auxiliary DC input passes directly to the 26 VDC OUTPUT
connector. The RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter is shown in Figure 1-13.

Figure 1-13. RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter

1-37
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

1.4.9 RF-5051P5-125 Power Supply

The RF-5051PS-125 Power Supply provides 24 Vdc at 30 amperes from 90 Vac to 300 Vac, 47 Hz to 400 Hz
sources. It is typically used for fixed station operation of RF-52oo FALCON"" 125 Watt transceiver systems. The
RF-5051PS-125 Power Supply can be mounted in an RF-5071VSM Shock Mount. The RF-5051PS-125 Power
Supply is shown in Figure 1-14.

Figure 1-14. RF-5051PS-125 Power Supply

1-38
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

1.5 PARTS LISTS OF ITEMS SHIPPED WITH UNITS

Table 1-14 through Table 1-19 list the ancillary parts kits for the radio system units. Table 1-20 provides the
manufacturers of the items listed in this manual.

Table 1-14. AN/PRC.138 Ancillary Parts Kit (10372-0900-01)

Cage
Qty Description Part Number
Code
1 Connector U-316/U 80058
6 Fuse 7A, 125V F15-0001-015 14304
4 Fuse 2.0A QA 125V PIC F15-ooo1-009 14304
1 Straight Plug, 10 Pin MS3116J12-lOS 96906
1 Audio Plug, 6 Contact J69-ooo1-623 14304
1 BNC Connector Cable Plug UG-88C/U 80058
1 Handset, H-250/U 10075-1344-01 14304
1 UHF-F/BNC-M Connector Adaptor UG-255/U 80058

Table 1-15. RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier Ancillary Parts Kit (10225-9600-01)
Cage
Qty Description Part Number
Code
1 Ground Strap 10208-0009 14304
2 High Voltage Wire Assembly Kit 10251-0042 14304
2 Flatwasher #5/16 SS .063 AN960C516 88044
1 Lockwasher .375 X.5OOX.022 H-3370 14304
1 Hex Head Bolt 5/16-24X1/2 H-6302 14304
10 Flatwasher .281X.625X.065 MS15795-81O 96906
1 Connector, Straight 10 Pin MS3116J12-lOP 96906
1 Cable Assembly. 20W PNCU DC 10181-9827 14304
4 Hex Head Bolt 1/4-20X7/8 MS35307-307 96906
5 Lockwasher 1/4 MS35338-139 96906
5 Nut 1/4-20 MS35649-2254 96906
2 Connector BNC Cable Plug UG-88C/U 80058
1 Wing Nut MS35425-71 96906
1 Template, RF-5030PA-20E 10225-9602-01 14304
2 Configuration Label, RF-5030PA-20E 10225-6019-01 14304

1-39
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1-16. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Ancillary Parts Kit (10225-9000)

Part Number Cage

Qty Description
Code
1 Plug, Straight MS3116Jl4-5S 96906
I COIUlector, Straight 10 Pin MS3116Jl2-IOP 96906
1 Connector N Cable Plug M39012/01-0005 81349
I Connector BNC Cable Plug UG-88CIU 80058
1 Connector, Modified 10181-2640 14304
I Ground Strap 7147-1167-3 14304
3 Fuse 25A 32V PIC FI5-0001-018 14304

Table 1-17. RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Ancillary Parts Kit (10497-0300-01)

Qty Description Part Number Cage

Code
I 5-Position Straight Plug Socket Connector MS3116Jl4-5S 81349
1 19-Pin Straight Plug Connector MS3116Jl4-19P 81349
I Circular Plug Connector MS3116J8-33P 81349
1 Straight N Plug Connector M39012/01-0005 81349
1 Braided Ground Strap 7147-1167-3 14304

1-40
mJH ARR lS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 1-18. RF-382 Antenna Coupler Ancillary Parts Kit (10208-0002)

Cage
Qty Description Part Number Code
10075-1041 14304
1 Connector, 14 Pin Socket
MS3420-12A 96906
1 Sleeve For P2
M39012/01-0005 81349
1 Connector N Cable Plug
E50-ooo2-oo8 14304
1 Shrink Sleeving 1/2" Black
MS 15795-812 96906
8 Flat Washer .344X.688X.065
MS35307-333 96906
4 Hex Head Bolt 5/16-18X7/8
MS35338-140 96906
4 Lock Washer 5/16
MS35649-2314 96906
4 Nut 5/16-18
F-0016 14304
3 Fuse 6.0A QA 250V 3AG
W10-0008-222 14304
2 Wire #18 Red PVC
J03-ooo1-026 14304
2 Faston 1/4 22-18AWG
WlO-ooo6-000 14304
1 Wire #22 Black PVC
E50-0002-oo5 14304
1 Shrink Sleeving 3/16" BLK
10208-0009 14304
1 Ground Strap
10208-1006 14304
1 Warning Label
E59-ooo3-020 14304
2 Lug Ring #1/4 12-1OGA Plain
10251·0042 14304
1 High Voltage Wire Assembly Kit

-9010)
Table 1-19. RF-5051 PS-125 Power Supply Ancillary Parts Kit (10181
Cage
Qty Description Part Number Code
10181-9831 14304
1 AC Power Cable Assembly
M55181/3-03 81349
1 Connector Plug, 4 Pin Male
F03-0003-022 14304
5 FUSE 20A Ceramic Slow Blow 250V 3AG
F-0001 14304
5 FUSE lI8A QA 250V 3AG
7147-1167-3 14304
1 Ground Strap

1-41
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mlHARRlS
GENERAL INFORMATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 1-20. List of Manufacturers

Cage Code Manufacturer Name and Address
11083 Caterpillar Incorporated
100 Northeast Adams Street
Peoria, IL 61629-8000
14304 Harris Corporation
RF Communications Division
1680 University Avenue
Rochester, NY 14610-1887
37695 MESC Electronics Systems, Inc.
1313 Production Road
Fort Wayne, IN 46808-1164
80058 Joint Electronics Type Designation System
Fonnerly Communication Electronics Subpanel of
Standardization Panel Joint Communications Electronics
Committee
81349 Military Specifications
Promulgated by Military
Departments/Agencies
Under Authority of Defense
Standardization Manual 4120 3-M
88044 Aeronautical Standards Group
Department of the Navy and Air Force
89536 Fluke Corporation
6920 Seaway Boulevard
P.O. Box 9090
Everen, WA 98206-9090
96906 Military Standards
Promulgated by Military Departments
Under Authority of Defense
Standardization Manual 4120 3-M

1-42
(lJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL INFORMATION

1.6 LIST OF ITEMS REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED

Table 1-21 lists the test equipment required for troubleshooting and repairing the radio system, and Table 1-22
lists the tools and materials required for removing and replacing radio system units.

Table 1-21. Test Equipment Required

Cage
Description Part Number
Code
Digital Multimeter 77/BN 89536

Table 1-22. Required Tools and Materials

Cage
Description Part Number
Code
Wrench, Adjustable IB7536 11083

1.7 DESTROYING THE RT-1694 RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER

If the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter will be compromised, discharge a firearm directly into the front panel of the
Rtf. The firearm should be aimed directly at the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and at the keypad. This will
render the Rtf inoperative.
If time pennits, place and detonate a small explosive charge in close proximity to the R!f front panel display. This
will also render the R!f inoperative.

1-43/1-44
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

CHAPTER 2

OPERATION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains all information necessary for operation of the RF-5200 FALCON"" Series Manpack
Systems. This information consists of operator controls and indicators, and operating instructions.
2.2 OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
2.2.1 General
Table 2-1 lists the functions, and Figure 2-1 shows the locations of the controls and indicators for the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter. Table 2-2 lists the functions, and Figure 2-2 shows the locations of the controls and
indicators for the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier. Table 2-3 lists the functions, and Figure 2-3
shows the locations of the controls and indicators for the RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier. Table 2-4
lists the functions, and Figure 2-4 shows the locations of the controls and indicators for the RF-505SPS AC/DC
Power Supply. Table 2-5 lists the functions, and Figure 2-5 shows the locations of the controls and indicators for
the RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter. Table 2-6 lists the functions, and Figure 2-6 shows the locations of
controls and indicators for the RF-505IPS-125 Power Supply. Table 2-7 lists the functions, and Figure 2-7 shows
the locations of controls and indicators for the RF-382 Antenna Coupler. The RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power
Amplifier/Coupler has no operator controls and indicators.
Table 2-1. RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Operating Controls and Indicators
Key Control/Indicator Function
(Figure 2-1)
I Liquid Crystal Display Display of current operational and/or programmed information
2 f- Selects item to change.
3 -+ Selects item to change.
4 J- Scrolls through menu selections.
5 i Scrolls through menu selections.
6 LIGHT Controls backlight intensity and contrast of the display.
7 CALL Initiates Forced Wakeup feature in Single Sideband (SSB);
initiates a SYNC sequence in HOP and initiates a call sequence
in Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) mode.
8 CLEAR Oears programming entries and is used to control ALE
sequences, scan/stop in ALE, and (RT-1694B(P)/U
configuration only) SSB scan mode. Generates hopset, and
halts a sync request in hopping.
9 ENTER Enters a program parameter change.
10 Opr Adjusts Transmit (TX) power, Beat Frequency Oscillator
(BFO), views Link Quality Analysis (LQA) scores, retunes
antenna coupler, views time, selects Engineering Order Wire
(BOW) destination, and enters/exits scan mode.
11 Alphanumeric Keypad Used to enter numeric and alphabetic data.
12 PRGM Allows operator to program channel, interface, and option
parameters from a sequence of menus.
13 Channel Switch Selects operating channel (l through 9, and M) for SSB or net
HOP operation.

2-1
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-1. RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Operating COntrols and Indicators - COntinued

Key Function
COntrol/Indicator
(Figure 2-1)
14 Function Switch
OFF Thms system ON/OFF.
SSB Single channel operation (Upper Sideband [USB], Lower
Sideband [LSB], Amplitude Modulated Envelope [AME],
Continuous Wave [CW], Frequency Modulation [FM))
HOP Frequency-hoppinglElectronic Counter-Counter Measure
(ECCM) operation
ALE Automatic link establishment operation
RMT Remote control mode via remote data port (15)
TEST Allows operator access to System Test, Version Display,
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR), and Battery Test
options.
ZERO Allows operator to zeroize (erase) all channel senings and
programmable parameters and return unit to default status.
(Operator must pull switch out to reach the ZERO position.)
15 Volume Control Knob When rotated, the knob controls the volume of the audio signal
from the handset or the RF-5033PA-150 150 Wan Power
Amplifier loudspeaker.

2-2
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

rCHl r FREQ MHZl S~DB

R@j-Z9 . 5~j00 C:=

USB OFF CLR OFF

Figure 2-1. RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Operating Controls and Indicators

2-3
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-2. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Operating Controls and Indicators
Key
(Figure 2-2) Control/Indicator Function
1 CBl Resets CB 1 Circuit Breaker.

~J11
J8
J9

GND
oJ120
J10

MNPK..()()4

Figure 2-2. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Operating Controls and Indicators

2-4
mlH AR RlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

ols and Indicators

Table 2-3. RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Operating Contr
Key
(Figure 2-3) Control/Indicator Function

1 SPKRON/OFF 1\uns the intema110udspeaker on or off.

2 CBl RESET Resets CB1 Circuit Breaker.

ON ~DIO
0000 00
SPKR ~ J7 00000000
0000000000
OFFJ6 1L-- 1
---J
0000000000
AUXPWR 000000000000
000000000000

J2.
000000000000

~
000000000000
RESET 0000000000
0000000000
J3 00000000
0000 00
PACONTROL

MNPK-005

ols and Indicators

Figure 2-3. RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Operating Contr

2-5
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
OPERATION

Table 2-4. RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Operating Controls and Indicators
Key
(Figure 2-4) Control/Indicator Function
I POWER ON/OFF Turns the power supply on or off.

J2 +26VDC OUT

MNPK-017

Figure 2-4. RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Operating Controls and Indicators

2-6
mlHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-5. RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Operating Controls and Indicators
Key
(Figure 2-5) Control/Indicator Function
1 ON/OFF Thrns the power converter on or off or sets it to be controlled
by an external ignition switch.

NOTE

The RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter detects Direct Current

(DC) power on the AUX DC INPUT connector, and
automatically passes that power to the 26 VDC OUTPUT
connector.

'---------'
@ J1
12/28 VDC IN
REMOVE BOTTOM COVER TO REPLACE FUSES

MNPK-Q18

Figure 2-5. RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Operating Controls and Indicators

2·7
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mlHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-6. RF-5051PS-125 Power Supply Operating Controls and Indicators

Key
(Figure 2-6) Control/Indicator Function
1 Power Indicator Indicates when the unit is turned on.
2 On/Off Switch Turns the power supply on or off.

~ a9 0 0

( \
OFF
(
(
\
\ J~
( \
"0
ACIN
(
(
\
\
J~
+28 VDC

95-150 VAC
187-300 VAC
47-440 HZ @
GND
(
( \
\
0 0 ~ m 0 0

5OOOE·037

Figure 2-6. RF-5051PS-125 Power Supply Operating Controls and Indicators

2-8
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-7. RF-382 Antenna Coupler Operating Controls and Indicators

Key
(Figure 2·7) Control/Indicator Function
1 50 Ohm N-Connector Switches between El High Voltage Insulator antenna port and
Switch Lever Ann 13 50 Ohm N-connector antenna port.

_ML_
--
@

J3500HM
N-eONNECTOR
1 ANTENNA PORT E1 HIGH VOLTAGE
(RF-382-03/-Q4 (RF-382-Q3I-Q4 INSULATOR ANTENNA
CONFIGURATIONS CONFIGURATIONS PORT 382A-Q01(C)
ONLY) ONLY)

Figure 2-7. RF-382 Antenna Coupler Operating Controls and Indicators

2·9
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.3 INITIAL SETTINGS AND TURN-ON

Initial settings and tum-on consists of powering up the units, running Built-In Test (BIT), and placing the units
into the desired mode of operation. Table 2-8 provides the initial settings and tum-on procedure.

NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-8. Initial Settings and Turn-On Procedure

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 ON/OFF Switch on power Place switch in the ON position. Power supply turns on and the
supply (if applicable) power on indicator on the
power supply (if applicable)
lights.
2 FUNCfION knob on Tum clockwise from OFF position to The Rtf displays the
Receiver-Transmitter SSB position. following screen:
(R/T)
••••••••
••••••••
followed by:

*INmALIZING*
* * * *WAIT* * * *

When initializing is complete,

the Rtf displays the following
screen:

R05-04.1600
USB OFF CLR ON
====
Refer to Paragraph 2.5.1.1 for
complete front panel indicator
descriptions.
3 FUNCfION knob on Rtf Tum clockwise from SSB position to The Rtf displays an
TEST position. initialization screen:

*INITIALIZING*
* * * *WAIT* * * *
followed by:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

with TEST flashing.

2-10
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-8. Initial Settings and Turn-On Procedure - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
4 ENTER key Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

••••••••
••••••••
followed by:

** SELF TEST **
* IN PROGRESS
If no errors occur during BIT,
the R{f displays the following
screent:

SELF TEST DONE

** NO ERRORS **
5 FUNCfION knob on Rff Tum counterclockwise from TEST The R/f displays main screen
position to desired mode of operation. of the desired mode, and is
now ready for normal
operation.
t If BIT fails during initial power-up, refer to Chapter 5 for troubleshooting procedures.

2-11
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.3.1 System Self-Test

System self-test consists of the following tests:

a. Executing BIT to verify that all modules of the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System are
operating properly.
b. Verifying finnware revision level of each module within the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack
System.
c. Measuring the VSWR using the default frequency of the currently selected SSB channel. The VSWR
measurement displays VSWR as calculated from the forward and reflected power at the output of the
power amplifier. This display also indicates the transmit power.
d. Measuring the battery voltage and charge levels
NOTE
If the FUNCfION or CHANNEL control is changed during a
self-test. a fault condition will probably be displayed (because
the test routine was not allowed to sequence through all of the
tests). A test sequence should be allowed to finish before any
new control. keyboard. or remote control command is issued.
Table 2-9 provides the system self-test procedure. Table 2-10 provides the finnware version display procedure.
Table 2-11 provides the VSWR test procedure. and Table 2-12 provides the battery test procedure.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedures.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-9. 5elf-Test Procedure
Step COntrol Action Observe
1 FUNCfION knob on R/f Tum clockwise to TEST position. The R/f displays an
initialization screen:

••••••••
••••••••
followed by:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

TEST is flashing.

2-12
(lJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-9. self-Test Procedure - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
2 ENTER key Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

••••••••
••••••••
followed by:

** SELF TEST **
* IN PROGRESS *
If no errors occur during BIT,
the R/f displays the following
screen:

SELF TEST DONE

** NO ERRORS **

If an error occurs during BIT,

the R/f displays the following
screen:

MODULE#: A##
FAULT #: F##

Refer to Chapter 5 for

recommended troubleshooting
procedures.

After passing BIT, the display

returns to the following
screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

TEST is flashing.
3 ENTER key Press and release. The display returns to the
following screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

TEST is flashing.

2-13
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-10. Firmware Version Display Procedure

Step Control Action Observe
1 FUNCfION knob on R/f Tum clockwise to TEST position. The R/f displays an
initialization screen:

••••••••
••••••••
followed by:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

TEST is flashing.
2 -7 Press repeatedly to select VERSION. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

VERSION is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The finnware version for
module A IA 1 will be
displayed:

MODULE: OIA
REVISION: 8211
4 i and J, Press and release. Scroll through all finnware
versions for all installed
modules.
5 CLEAR or ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

VERSION is flashing.

2-14
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-11. VSWR Test Procedure

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 FUNCfION knob on R/f 'fum clockwise to TEST position. The R/f displays an
initialization screen:

••••••••
••••••••
followed by:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

TEST is flashing.
2 ~ Press repeatedly to select VSWR. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

VSWR is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

VSWR FREQUENCY?
25.‫סס‬OO
MHZ

25.000 is flashing.
4 i and J.., or numeric Enter the desired frequency if The R/f will display the new
keypad different from default value. frequency value as it is
entered. The value entered
will be flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen t:

POWER: 20 WATT
VSWR: 1.1: 1
t If VSWR measures greater than 3.0:1, refer to Chapter 5 for recommended troubleshooting procedures.

2-15
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-12. Battery Test Procedure

Step Control Action Observe
1 FUNCTION knob on R/f Tum clockwise to TEST position. The R/f displays an
initialization screen:

••••••••
••••••••
followed by:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

TEST is flashing.
2 CLEAR or ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

VSWR is flashing.
3 ~ Press repeatedly to select BATTERY. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

BATTERY is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen*:

BATTERY: 28.4 V
FULL CHARGE
5 CLEAR or ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY

BATTERY is flashing.
6 Function Switch Rotate counterclockwise to desired The R/f displays the screen
mode of operation. from the last time it was
placed in the desired mode.
*The battery voltage range is 28.0 to 20.0 volts. The charge levels are FULL, MEDIUM, or LOW.

2-16
mHARRIS RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.3.2 Zerolzlng the System

Zeroize erases all programmed parameters and option settings and returns to default status. Table 2-13 provides
the zeroizing procedure.
NOTE
ZEROIZE should be used with caution. Settings cannot be
recovered and must be programmed. A PASSWORD protection
system prevents unauthorized personnel from selecting or
changing the programmed parameters.
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-13. Zerolze Procedure
Step COntrol Action Observe
1 FUNCTION switch Rotate clockwise to ZERO. The The R!I' displays the
switch's knob must be pulled out past following screen:
end stop to rotate it to the ZERO
position. ZEROIZETHE
RADIO: NO

NO is flashing.
2 i and J, Press and release. YES is displayed. The R!I' displays the
following screen:

ZEROIZETHE
RADIO: YES

YES is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R!I' displays the
following screen:

ZEROIZING ...
PLEASE WAIT

When zeroizing is complete,

the R!I' displays the following
screen:

ZEROIZETHE
RADIO: NO

NO is flashing.
4 FUNCTION Switch Rotate counterclockwise to desired The R!I' displays the main
mode of operation. The switch's knob screen of the desired mode.
must be pulled out slightly to rotate it.

2-17
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
OPERATION

2.4 SPECIAL KEY OPERATION

Many of the keys found on the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter front panel keypad have specialized functions or
menus. The following paragraphs provide information on the operation of these keys.

2.4.1 LIGHT Key Operation

The LIGHT key allows control of backlight intensity, display contrast, backlight operation, and keypad
backlighting. The NV_MOMENTARY configuration results in the keypad backlight being turned off and the
display backlight being on momentarily. Table 2-14 provides the LIGHT key operation procedures.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedures.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-14. LIght Key Operation
Step COntrol Action Observe
1 LIGHT Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

LIGHT CONTRAST
[MAX]
••••
[MAX] is flashing.
2 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly to select [MAX] changes to • • • •
backlight level. and finally to [MIN] (or vice
versa) indicating the relative
level of display backlighting.
3 f- and--+ Press and release. Selects CONTRAST.
4 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly to select • • • • changes to [MAX]
contrast level. or [MIN] indicating the
relative level of display
contrast.
5 ENfER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

LIGHT OPERATION
MOMENTARY
6 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly. The R/f display scrolls
through the light operation
choices. Available choices are
ON,MOMENTAR~orOFF.
NOTE: ON is only available
when powered via the front
panel. This is to prevent
excessive battery drain.
7 LIGHT or ENfER Press and release. The R/f returns to normal
SSB, ALE, HOP, or TEST
operation.

2-18
mJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.4.2 OPTion Key Operation

The OPTIon key allows the operator to perfonn the following procedures:
a. Retune the antenna coupler independent of current status.
b. Adjust transmit power. When the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter is keyed, the bar graph indicates the
transmit power level. The selected power setting is indicated by the length and width of the bars.
c. Display the current time.
d. Enable or disable SSB Scan.
e. Adjust the BFa, if enabled.
NOTE

BFa operation must be enabled through the SSB configuration

menu when the radio is being programmed. BFa support is only
for USB voice, LSB voice, and CW operation. The data field
must be set to OFF.
Table 2-15 provides the coupler retune procedure, Table 2-16 provides the transmit power adjustment procedure.
Table 2-17 provides the time setting procedure, Table 2-18 provides the SSB Scan enable/disable procedure, and
Table 2-19 provides the BFa adjustment procedure.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-15. Coupler Retune Procedure
Step Control Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

RETUNE POWER
TIME SCAN~

RETUNE is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays:

R054l4.1600 ====
TUNING COUPLER

After the retuning is

completed, the Rtf displays:

R054l4.1600 ====
TUNE COMPLETE

and returns to the following

screen:

R054l4.l600 ====
USB OFF CLR ON

2-19
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS rIJ HARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-16. Transmit Power Adjustment Procedure

Step Control Action Observe
I OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

RETUNE POWER
TIME SCAN~

RETUNE is flashing.
2 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
POWER. following screen:

RETUNE POWER
TIME SCAN~

POWER is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

TXPOWER
MED

The current power level is

flashing.
4 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
power settings. Available
choices are LOW, MED, and
HIGH. When the desired
power setting is displayed,
stop scrolling.
5 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

R05-04.1600 ===
USB OFF CLR ON

2-20
{lJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-17. Time Setting Procedure

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

RETUNE POWER
TIME SCAN---+

RETUNE is flashing.
2 t- and---+ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
TIME. following screen:

RETUNE POWER
TIME SCAN---+

TIME is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

RADIO TIME
11:51:00
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

R05....{)4.1600 =
USB OFF CLR ON

2-21
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·18. SSB SCan Enable/Disable Procedure

Step Control Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

RETUNE POWER
TIME SCAN~

RETUNE is flashing.
2 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
SCAN. following screen:

RETUNE POWER
TIME SCAN~

SCAN is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SSB SCAN MODE:

DISABLED
4 i and J, Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SSB SCAN MODE:

ENABLED
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

R05-04.1600 --
USB OFF CLR ON

NOTE
If the R/T is powered off after SSB Scan has been enabled, the
R/T will default back to SSB Scan disabled when it is powered
on.

2-22
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2·19. BFO Adjustment Procedure

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

RETUNE POWER
TIME SCAN--+

RETUNE is flashing.
2 f- and--+ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
BFO. following screen:

f-BFO

BFO is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

BFO +‫סס‬oo HZ
FREQ: 01.600
4 i and J.. Press and release. Adjusts the BFO offset in 10
Hz increments. A + or - is
displayed after the receive
frequency to indicate a BFO
offset. If a new channel is
selected, this BFO offset value
is lost. The programmed
receive frequency appears if
the channel is selected again.
5 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

R05-04.1600 =
USB OFF CLR ON

2·23
 RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5 SYSTEM OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING

The following paragraphs provide instructions for the nonna! operation and programming of the RF-5200
FALCON .... Series Manpack System. The RF-5200 FALCON .... Series Manpack System is able to operate in three
distinct modes:

• SSB

• ALE

• Frequency Hopping
NOTE

SSB mode is actually single channel mode, not Single Sideband.

USB, LSB, Amplitude Modulation (AM), CW, and FM can all
be accessed when the R/f is in SSB mode.
ALE and Frequency Hopping modes require specific hardware to be installed in the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter. Refer to Chapter I, Paragraph 1.3.2 for system hardware configuration infonnation.
Table 2-20 provides an index to the paragraphs for complete operation and programming infonnation for each of
the available operating modes.
For advanced system programming infonnation, refer to Paragraph 2.6.
Table 2·20. RF-5200 FALCON .... Manpack System Normal Operation Index
Operating Mode Paragraph
SSB 2.5.1
ALE 2.5.2
Frequency Hopping 2.5.3

NOTE

Some areas of operation may not be available for modification

depending on system security programming. Refer to Paragraph
2.6.3.7.1 for the procedure on entering a password.

2.5.1 SSB Operation

The following paragraphs describe the nonna! operation of a RF-5200 FALCON .... Series Manpack System
operating in SSB mode.
2.5.1.1 Front Panel Display Indicators

Table 2-21 lists the functions, and Figure 2-8 shows the locations of the front panel indicators when the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter is in receive mode.
Table 2-22 lists the functions, and Figure 2-9 shows the locations of the front panel indicators when the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter is in transmit mode.
Table 2-23 lists the functions, and Figure 2-10 shows the locations of the front panel indicators when the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter is in remote mode.

2-24
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-21. Front Panel Display - Receive Mode Indicators

Key Indicator Function
(Figure 2-8)
1 Rtf Status An uR" in this position indicates that the R/T is in receive
mode.
2 Channel Indicates on which channel the R/T is receiving.
3 RX Frequency Indicates the frequency (in MHz) to which the Rtf is tuned.
4 Signal Strength (S-Meter) Indicates the strength of the receive signal.
5 Squelch Indicates the status of squelch (ON/OFF).
6 Encryption Indicates the encryption key used to decrypt the receive signal.
7 Data Indicates the type of preset being used. Up to seven data
presets are selectable, plus OFF, Analog Voice Security (AVS),
and Digital Voice (DV) (three additional presets are available
in hopping).
8 Mode Indicates the operating mode of the Rtf (USB, LSB, AMB,
CW,FM).

~-+-- FREQ. MHZ - - - ,

R05 - 0 --,. 1600 t

u.
.
USB FAX 1 KEY3 ON
DATA --...l L - ENCR .--J

MNPK-006

Figure 2-8. Front Panel Display - Receive Mode Indicators

2-25
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS tlJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·22. Front Panel Display - Transmit Mode Indicators

Key Indicator Function
(Figure 2-9)
1 R/f Status A "T" in this position indicates that the R/f is in transmit
mode.
2 Channel Indicates on which channel the R/f is transmitting.
3 TX Frequency Indicates the frequency on which the R/f is transmitting.
4 Power Meter Indicates the strength of the transmitted signal.
S Encryption Indicates the encryption key used to encrypt the transmitted
signal.
6 Data Indicates the type of data preset being used. Up to seven data
presets are selectable, plus OFF, AVS, and DV (three
additional presets are available in hopping).
7 Key Source Indicates the source of keying action (MIC, OAT, AUX).

...--+-- FREQ. MHZ S 3

T37--11. 7800 ~imiim .....•....

MI C OFF CLR
DATA ----l L - ENCR.--J L sa ---l

MNPK-<107

Figure 2-9. Front Panel Display - Transmit Indicators

2·26
mH AR RIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 2-23. Front Panel Display - Remote Mode Indicators

Key
(Figure Indicator Function
2-10)
1 R/f Status A "T" in this position indicates that the R/T is in transmit
mode; an "R" in this position indicates that the R!f is in
receive mode.
2 Channel Indicates the channel to which the R!f is tuned.
3 Remote Indicates that the Rtf is operating in remote mode.
e mode
4 Signal Strength (S-Meter) Indicates the strength of the receive signal (receiv
only).
5 Power Meter Indicates the strength of the transmit signal (transmit mode
only).

L...... MOoe---l l - DAT~ ENCR ---l L sa--J

r-- FREQ. MH7"'+ ---.

5..........
T31 •........
=::: I:::: - .
-REMOTE-
L...... MOoe---l l - DAT~ L - ENCR ---l L sa--J

MNPK-ooB

Figure 2-10. Front Panel Display - Remote Indicators

2-27
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.1.2 Placing the RF-5200 FALCON'" series Manpack System In SSB Operation

Table 2-24 provides the procedure to set the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System to SSB mode.

NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-24. Procedure to Configure the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System to SSB
Mode
Step Control Action Observe
1 Function Switch Rotate clockwise or counterclockwise The Rtf displays the
to the SSB position. following screen:

*INITIALIZING*
* * * *WAIT* * * *

followed by:

R05-04.l600
USB OFF CLR ON
===
Referto Paragraph 2.5.1.1 and
see Figures 2-8 through 2-10
for a detailed description of
the front panel indicators.

2.5.1.3 Selecting a Channel

Table 2-25 provides the procedure to select a channel in SSB mode.

Table 2-25. Procedure to Select A Channel in SSB Mode

Step Control Action Observe
1 Channel Switch Rotate to desired channel number (l The Rtf displays the
through 9). following screen:

R05-04.1600 --
USB OFF CLR ON
2 Channel Switch Rotate to M position. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

R12-21.2250 --
LSB OFF CLR ON
3 i and J" or numeric Press and release. The radio will begin receiving
keypad plus ENTER on the new channel (0 through
99), and the TX mode and
frequency is updated.

2-28
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.5.1.4 Receive Only Channels

Any channel may be programmed as receive only.

Receive Only allows the operator to monitor communications on a frequency, but does not allow transmission on
that frequency. If the radio is keyed on a receive-only channel, the radio sounds a warning tone.
Receive Only is for SSB operation only.
2.5.1.5 Scratchpad Channel
NOTE

If the scratchpad channel has not been enabled, the password

must be entered to use the scratchpad channel.
If the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter has been programmed to enable a scratchpad channel, Channel 00 can be
selected as a scratchpad channel. A scratchpad channel can be configured for operating mode, data preset, and
encryption key. It also allows the operator to select a receive and transmit frequency without going into the
program menus. Table 2-26 provides the procedure to select a scratchpad channel, and program the receive and
transmit frequency.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2·26. Procedure to Select a SCratchpad Channel
Step Control Action Observe
1 Channel Switch Rotate to M position. The R/f displays the
following screen:

R12-21.2250
LSB OFF CLR ON
===
2 Numeric Keypad Press 00. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ROO-21.2250 --
LSB OFF CLR ON
3 ENTER Press and release. The radio will begin receiving
on the listed frequency (the
desired frequency has not
been programmed yet).
4 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
the frequency indicator. following screen:

ROO-21.2250 --
LSB OFF CLR ON

The frequency indicator is

flashing.

2·29
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-26. Procedure to Select a SCratchpad Channel - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 i and ..L, or numeric Press and release repeatedly, or enter The desired RX frequency is
keypad plus ENTER the desired receive frequency on the displayed.
numeric keypad. Enter the leading
zero for frequencies below 10 MHz
(that is, 08.990 MHz).
f-- and ~ Selects which digit will be modified.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

RX: 21.2250 MHZ

TX: 21.2250 MHZ

The transmit frequency is

flashing.
7 i and ..L, or numeric Press and release repeatedly, or enter The Rtf displays the
keypad plus ENTER the desired transmit frequency on the following screen:
numeric keypad. Enter the leading
zero for frequencies below 10 MHz RX: 21.2250 MHZ
(that is, 08.990 MHz). The transmit TX: 21.2250 MHZ
frequency does not have to be the
same as the receive frequency.
f-- and ~ Selects which digit will be modified.

2-30
mJH ARR lS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

2.5.1.6 Selecting a Temporary Operating Mode

operating modes, the mode of
If the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter has been programmed to allow temporary
programming. Place the radio in
operation for any channel may be temporarily changed without affecting overall
g a temporary operating mode for
SSB mode per Paragraph 2.5.1. Table 2-27 provides the procedure for selectin
the RF-5200 FALCON"" Series Manpack System.
NOTE

If the temporary operating mode feature has not been enabled,

the password must be entered to select a temporary operating
mode.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-27. Procedure for selecting a Temporary Operating Mode
Control Action Observe
Step
~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
I
the mode indicator. following screen:

R05-Q4.1600 ===
USB OFF CLR ON

Mode indicator is flashing.

i and J., Press and release repeatedly until the The R/f scrolls through the
2
desired operating mode is displayed. mode selections. Allowable
selections are USB, LSB,
AMB, FM, and CWO When the
desired mode of operation is
displayed, stop scrolling. t

ENTER Press and release. The R/f begins operating in

3 the desired mode.
change to OFF because
t When AME, FM, or CW mode is selected, the data preset and encryption key fields
these configurations are not valid for these modes.

2-31
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.1.7 Selecting a Data Preset

Data presets consist of preselected sets of modem parameters, selected and named during programming. If
permitted, the operator may select anyone of up to seven presets or DV, AVS, or OFF.
If a data preset is selected, the radio can still be keyed with the front panel microphone or the accessory key line.

If an option is not installed, the corresponding preset name will not be available for selection.

When CW, FM, or AME modes are selected, the data preset value defaults to OFF.
Place the radio in SSB mode per Paragraph 2.5.1. Table 2-28 provides the procedure for selecting a data preset.
NOTE
If the data preset has not been enabled, the password must be
entered to use the data preset.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-28. Procedure for Selecting a Data Preset
Step Control Action Observe
} f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
the data indicator. following screen:

R05-04.1600 --
USB FAX} CLR ON

The data indicator is flashing.

2 i and.l Press and release repeatedly until the The R/f scrolls through the
desired data preset is displayed. available data preset options,
including DV and AVS.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f is programmed for
the desired data preset.

2-32
mH AR RIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

2.5.1.8 Selecting an Encryption Key

through KEY6. The encryption
The encryption indicator on the front panel can be configured to CLR, or KEYl
configured for CW, PM, or AME
key can be selected for use with DV, AVS, or a data preset. When the system is
no key is selected, voice communications is
operation, the encryption key automatically defaults to CLR. When
depend ing on the setting in the
CLR. When a modem preset is selected, voice communications is CLR or AVS,
OP_LOCK programming menu located in the SECUR selections.
NOTE

While keyed, if KEYX appears in the encryption field, the radio

is sending encrypted messages. While keyed, if CLR appears in
the encryption field, the radio is not sending encrypted data or
voice.
selecting an encryption
Place the radio in SSB mode per Paragraph 2.5.1. Table 2-29 provides the procedure for
key.
Table 2-29. Procedure for Selecting an Encryption Key
Control Action Observe
Step
I t- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/I' displays the
the encryption display indicator. following screen:

R05-04.1600 ====
USB OFF CLR ON

The encryption indicator is

flashing.

2 i and J. Press and release repeatedly until the The encryption display
desired encryption key is displayed. indicator will scroll through
the available encryption keys
and CLR.

3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screent:

R05-04. 1600 ====

USB OFF KEY3 ON

t If AVS operation has been programmed for the system and no encryption
key has been selected, the error
message NO ENCRYPTION KEYS PROGRAMMED will be displayed on the
R/I'. Program
the R/I' with an encryption key, or use clear voice.

2·33
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.1.9 Selecting Squelch

Although the specific squelch threshold (LOW, MED, or HIGH) is detennined during programming, squelch is
turned on or off during system operation. Place the radio in SSB mode per Paragraph 2.5.1. Table 2-30 provides
the procedure for turning squelch on or off.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-30. Procedure for Selecting Squelch
Step COntrol Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release to select the squelch The R/T displays the
display indicator. following screen:

R05-04.l600
USB OFF CLR OFF
===
The squelch indicator is
flashing.
2 i and J.. Press and release until the desired The squelch display indicator
squelch setting is displayed. toggles between OFF and ON.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/T displays the
following screen:

R05-04.l600
USB OFF CLR ON
===

2·34
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.5.1.10 Selecting SSB Scan

SSB Scan operation is based on standard squelch operation in USB mode. Channels 0 through 9 are always
scanned in ascending order. SSB Scan will scan through all 10 channels in S seconds when no signals are present.
If a signal is detected on a channel by means of a squelch break, the receiver-transmitter will remain on that
channel until two seconds after the signal is no longer present. If another signal is detected within that time, the
receiver-transmitter will remain on the channel. If no signal is detected, the receiver-transmitter resumes SSB
Scan operation.
Table 2-18 provides the procedure for enabling and disabling SSB Scan operation. Table 2-31 provides the
procedure for initiating and pausing SSB Scan operation.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-31. Procedure for Initiating and Pausing SSB Scan Operation
Step COntrol Action Observe
1 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ROS-{)4.1600 ====
USB OFF CLR OFF

The channel and frequency

indicators are sequencing
through the programmed
channels.
2 None None. If the R/f detects a signal on
one of the programmed
channels, the R/f remains on
that channel until two seconds
after a signal is no longer
present.
3 CLEAR, or the Press and release. The R/f stops sequencing
Push-To-Talk button on through the programmed
the handset channels, and displays the
following screen:

ROS-{)4.1600 ====
USB OFF CLR OFF

2-35
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.2 ALE Operation (MIL-STD-188-141A)

ALE operation automatically sets up a link with another station or group of stations on the best available channel.
This is done by assigning each station in a network an individual call sign (self address) and by programming
groups of channels on which each station may be called.
NOTE
Each station in a network must be programmed exactly the same
in order for proper ALE operation.
ALE depends on a process called LQA. An LQA may be performed automatically at predetermined intervals, or
as needed by the operator. During an LQA, a station contacts other stations, either as individuals or as a network,
on each channel available for communication, and makes a measurement (score) of signal quality for each. The
scores are ranked and stored for future use.
Each station scans its assigned channels when it is not linked in communication. When a call is initiated, the
calling station checks the scores associated with the target station to determine the best channel and calls the
station on that channel. If communication is not established on that channel, the calling station tries the two next
best channels. If communication is still not established, the calling station will use the highest available frequency
and progress downward through the list until a link is established or all channels fail. The two stations
automatically link when an acceptable channel is found and both operators are alerted both audibly and visually.
A similar procedure is used to link networks of individual stations.
To form an ALE network, each station must be programmed with certain network information. This information
includes the call sign by which each station will be called (self address), the group of channels that each station
will use, and the call sign or individual address of each other station in the network, along with the group or
groups of channels that each will use. Up to ten channel groups may be programmed with ALE.
Three types of addresses (or call signs) are possible with MIL-STD-188-141A ALE, each consisting of an
alphanumeric name up to 15 characters long:
• SELF ADDRESS: Identifies each unit. Each unit may have up to 20 self addresses.

• INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS: Identifies an individual station to be called. Up to 200 individual addresses

may be stored.
• NET ADDRESS: Identifies a number of individual stations which can be called together. Up to 20 net
addresses may be stored.
Each address is assigned a channel group which contains a list of channels on which a unit will scan. This also
determines the possible channels on which communication with that address is possible. Up to 100 channels in ten
possible channel groups may be stored.
ALE allows a variety of calls to be made. Individual calls are made to a specific station using the appropriate
individual address. Calls are made to nets by using the appropriate net address. If programming allows, the
following calls may also be made directly from the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter front panel:
• ALL CALL: An ALL CALL uses the address ALL to call all ALE stations using a broadcast format. An
ALL CALL does not request a response and does not designate a specific address. The ALL CALL
message is a unidirectional type that contains the ALL CALL identifier and the initiating (calling)
station's address. When an ALL CALL message is successfully received, the receiving station or stations
will change to linked state and be ready for voice or data communications.
• ANY CALL: An ANY CALL uses the address ANY to call all ALE stations in the same manner as with
the ALL CALL, except the individual stations respond at one of 16 random intervals for linking purposes.

2-36
;))H AR RlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

CALLs are made by entering the

From the RI'-1694 Receiver-Transmitter front panel, ALL CALLs and ANY
station should program a self or
three appropriate letters as if they were a calling address. This means that no
es".
individual address of ALL or ANY as these are considered to be "reserved address
ALE algorithm. Other
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter utilizes a MIL-STD-188-l4l A compatible
d by the RT-169 4 Receiver-Transmitter, but
MIL-STD-188-l41A ALE compatible call types that can be receive
not sent, include the following:

• SELECTIVE ANY: Any station ending in a certain character

• DOUBLE SELECTIVE ANY: Any station ending in two specific characters

• GROUP: Random replying stations that are not programmed with the sender

• WILDCARD: Calls that use the "1" to represent any character

them is described in Paragraph 2.7.
Many of these call types may be used from a remote terminal. Operation using
e Displays (AMD). The AMD
ALE allows the transmission of short text messages called Automatic Messag
codes to any selected station or net.
function enables the stations to communicate short messages or prearranged
or the remote terminal. Up to ten
The AMD functions can be performed from the front panel of the radio
be programmed.
messages (in buffers 0 through 9), each containing up to 87 characters, may
An EOW is a message typed from
ALE also allows the transmission of EOW using an external terminal device.
a typical data transfer, an EOW has
the remote port, while linked with the modem off, to another station. Unlike
exceeds 300 characters, the radio
forward error correction and an acknowledgement sent back. When the EOW
which is usually shorter. Radio terminal
sends the message in blocks of 300 characters each, until the last block,
transfer.
echo stops when the buffer is full, which would normally only occur for a file
2.5.2.1 Front Panel Display Indicators
the radio is unlinked, it can be in
During ALE operation, the radio can be in a linked or unlinked state. When
either the scan mode or stop mode.
the radio is unlinked and
Table 2-32 lists the functions, and Figure 2-11 shows a typical R!f display when
scanning in ALE mode.
NOTE

When operating a manpack configuration radio system in ALE

mode, the Rff automatically enters Sleep Mode. This is
indicated by the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) display remaining
unchanged for a period of time, then quickly scanning through
the programmed channel group before pausing again. The
duration of these pauses is directly proportional to the MAX
CHANNELS TO SCAN parameter, and the actual length of time
required to scan through the channel group.
the radio is linked in ALE mode,
Table 2-33 lists the functions, and Figure 2-12 shows a typical Rtf display when
and is unkeyed.
the radio is linked in ALE mode
Table 2-34 lists the functions, and Figure 2-13 shows a typical Rtf display when
and after the radio has been keyed.
the radio is unlinked and stopped
Table 2-35 lists the functions, and Figure 2-14 shows a typical Rtf display when
in ALE mode.

2-37
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-32. Front Panel Display - ALE Unlinked/Scanning Mode Indicators

Key
(Figure Indicator Function
2-11)
1 R/f Status An "R" in this position indicates that the RIT is in receive
mode.
2 Channel Indicates which channel the R/f is scanning.
3 Scan Indicator Indicates the R/f is currently in scan operation.
4 RX AMD Messages Indicates the number of unread receive AMD messages.
5 Encryption Indicates the encryption key used to encrypt the received
signal.
6 Data Indicates the type of data transmission being received. Up to
seven data presets are selectable, plus OFF, AVS, and DY.

.....---- FREa. MHZ +---, S 3 6 9 +06

R01 *SCAN*
OFF CLR M2
L..MODE.......J DATA ---J L - ENCR - - '

5
MNPK-Q09

Figure 2-11. Typical RIT Display when Unlinked and Scanning During ALE Operation

2-38
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-33. Front Panel Display - ALE Linked Mode Indicators Before Keying
Key
(Figure Indicator Function
2-12)
1 R/f Status An "R" in this position indicates that the R/f is in receive
mode.
2 Channel Indicates which channel the R/f is using.
3 Status Indicates that the R/f is in linked mode.
4 Address The address of the station to which the R/f is linked.

. . . . . - - FREQ. MHZ -+----. S 3 6 9 +06

R05 LINKED
AREA33HQ _ _
l.- MODE -.l l - - DATA L - ENCA --.J L sa-.J

MNPK-Ol0

Figure 2-12. Typical RJT Display when Linked during ALE Operation (Unkeyed)

2-39
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-34. Front Panel Display - ALE Linked Mode Indicators (After Keying)
Key
(Figure Indicator Function
2-13)
1 R/T Status An "R" in this position indicates that the R/T is in receive
mode.
2 Channel Indicates to which channel the Rtf is tuned.
3 Address The address of the station to which the R/T is linked. The first
seven characters of the address are displayed.
4 Signal Strength (S-Meter) Indicates how strong the received signal is.
5 Encryption Indicates the encryption key used to encrypt the received
signal.
6 Data Indicates the type of data transmission being used. Up to seven
data presets are selectable, plus OFF, AVS, and DY.
7 Mode Indicates the operating mode of the Rtf (USB, LSB, AME,
FM,CW).

r--- FREO. MHZ -t----,

- .
Re5 AREA33H L ..
USB OFF CLR
MODE .....J L - - DATA L - ENCR

MNPK-Ol1

Figure 2-13. Typical RIT Display when Linked During ALE Operation (After Keying)

2·40
(lJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-35. Front Panel Display - ALE Unlinked/Stopped Mode Indicators

Key
(Figure Indicator Function
2-14)
1 Rtf Status An "R" in this position indicates that the Rtf is in receive
mode.
2 Channel Indicates to which channel the Rtf is tuned.
3 RX Frequency Indicates the frequency (in MHz) to which the Rtf is tuned.
4 Signal Strength (S-Meter) Indicates the strength of the receive signal.
5 Encryption Indicates the encryption key used to encrypt the received
signal.
6 Data Indicates the type of data transmission being used.
7 Mode Indicates the operating mode of the Rtf (USB, LSB, AMB,
FM, CW)o

r---- FREQ. MHZ +---,

: _ .
R01-10.0000 5
I .

USB OFF CLR

MODE -..l L . - DATA L - ENCR

MNPK.()12

Figure 2-14. Typical RIT Display when Unlinked and Stopped During ALE Operation

2-41
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS I) HARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.2.2 Placing the RF-5200 FALCON'" series Manpack System In ALE Operation
Table 2-36 provides the procedure for placing the RF-5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System in ALE mode.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-36. Procedure to Place the FALCON'" Manpack System In ALE Mode
Step Control Action Observe
I Function Switch Rotate clockwise or counterclockwise The RfI' displays the
to the ALE position. following screen:

*INillALIZING*
* * * *WAIT* * * *

followed by:

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR

The channel number is

changing.
2 CLEAR Press and release. The RfI' is placed in stop
mode and displays the
following screen:

ROI-lO.OOOO --
USB OFF CLR
3 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The current channel display
indicator scrolls through the
list of channels programmed
into the self-address channel
group.
4 CLEAR Press and release. The radio resumes scanning
and displays the following
screen:

ROI *SCAN*
OFF CLR

2-42
I) HARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.5.2.3 Placing an Automatic call

An automatic call is one in which the best available channel is selected by ALE. When an AUTO call is initiated,
the calling station checks the scores associated with the target station (if available) to detennine the best channel
and calls the station on that channel. If communication is not established on that channel, the calling station tries
the two next best channels. If communication is still not established, the calling station will use the highest
available frequency and progress downward through the list until a link is established or all channels fail. The two
stations automatically link when an acceptable channel is found, and both operators are alerted both audibly and
viSUally.
If the call does not succeed on one of these channels, or if no scores are available, ALE attempts to place the call
using all of the target address' channel lists, starting with the highest frequency channel and advancing through
the list to the lowest frequency channel. This procedure is continued until the call is successfully placed.
Only addresses programmed into the calling radio can be called during an AUTO call. If a call is attempted to an
unknown address, an error message is displayed. Refer to Table 2-37.
The following paragraphs provide instructions for placing automatic individual/net calls, ALL CALLs, and ANY
CALLS.
2.5.2.3.1 Placing an Automatic Individual/Net call

Place the R!f into ALE mode per Paragraph 2.5.2.2. Table 2-37 provides the procedure to place an automatic
individual/net call.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

2·43
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-37. Procedure to Place an Automatic Individual/Net call

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 CALL Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.
2 rand,!. Press and release repeatedly until The R/f toggles between
AUTO is displayed (if necessary). AUTO and MANUAL, and
displays the following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.
3 +- and-+ Press and release until The R/f displays the
INDIVIDUAL/NET is displayed (if following screen:
necessary).
CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

INDIVIDUAL/NET is
flashing.
4 rand ,!. Press and release repeatedly until The R/f scrolls through the
INDIVIDUAL/NET is displayed (if list of call types
necessary). (INDIVIDUAL/NET, ALL,
AND ANY), and displays the
following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

INDIVIDUAL/NET is
flashing.
S ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CALL ADDRESS?
AREA33HQ ______

AREA33HQ is flashing.

2-44
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-37. Procedure to Place an Automatic Individual/Net Call - Continued

Step COntrol Action Observe
6 i and ..1.. or numeric Press and release repeatedly until the The R/f displays the
keypad desired station address or net is following screen:
displayed (if different from that
displayed). CALL ADDRESS?
AREA33HQ _

AREA33HQ is flashing.
7 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

T05 CALLING
AREA33HQ _

followed by:

R05 CALLING
AREA33HQ _

The two screens toggle back

and forth several times.

If the call is successful. the

R/T displays the following
screen:

R05 LINKED:
AREA33HQ _

followed by:

R05 AREA33HQ
USB OFFCLR

If this is a net call:

RESPREV from _
will appear for each net
member responding. Refer to
Table 2-39.

The radios are ready for

communications.

2·45
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-37. Procedure to Place an Automatic Individual/Net C8U- Continued

Step Control Action Observe
7 If the call failed, error tones
(Cont.) are heard, and the R/f
displays the following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
NO RESPONSE

followed by

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR

2·46
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.5.2.3.2 Placing an Automatic ALL CALL

An automatic ALL CALL is initiated from the scan mode. Place the R/f into ALE scan mode per Paragraph
2.5.2.2. Table 2-38 provides the procedure to place an automatic ALL CALL.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-38. Procedure to Place an Automatic ALL CALL
Step Control Action Observe
1 CALL Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.
2 i and J.. Press and release until AUTO is The Rtf displays the
displayed (if necessary). following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release until The R/f displays the
INDIVIDUAL/NET is selected (if follOWing screen:
necessary).
CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

INDIVIDUAL/NET is
flashing.

2-47
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·38. Procedure to Place an Automatic ALL CALL - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
4 t and.!. Press and release repeatedly until ALL The R/f scrolls through the
is displayed (if necessary). list of call types, and displays
the following screen:

CALL: AUTO
ALL

ALL is flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

T05 CALLING:
ALL --------

followed by:

R05 CALLING:
ALL --------

The R/f displays the

following screen:

R05LINKED:
ALL --------

2-48
mH AR RIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

2.5.2.3.3 Placing an Automatic ANY CALL

An automatic ANY CALL is initiated from the scan mode. The call is
made to all stations scanning on a given
into ALE
e of linking. Place the R/f
channel. Stations then respond at one of 16 random intervals for the purpos
ure to place an automatic ANY CALL.
scan mode per Paragraph 2.5.2.2. Table 2-39 provides the proced
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-39. Procedure to Place an Automatic ANY CALL
Action Observe
Step Control
Press and release. The Rtf displays the
1 CALL
following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.

i and J., Press and release until AUTO is The Rtf displays the
2
displayed (if necessary). following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIV IDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.

~and~ Press and release until The Rtf displays the

3
INDIVIDUAL/NET is flashing. following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

INDIVIDUAL/NET is
flashing.

i and J., Press and release repeatedly until The R/I' scrolls through the
4
ANY is displayed (if necessary). list of call types, and displays
the following screen:

CALL: AUTO
ANY

ANY is flashing.

2-49
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-39. Procedure to Place an Automatic ANY CALL - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

T05 CALLING:
ANY --------

followed by:

R05 CALLING
ANY ------

The two screens toggle back

and forth several times.

As units respond, the Rtf

momentarily displays the
following screen:

RSPFROM:
AREA3 --------

The Rtf then displays the

following screen:

R05LINKED:
ANY --------

2-50
(lJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.5.2.4 Placing a Manual call

A manual call is one in which the channel is selected by the operator. The following paragraphs provide
instructions for placing manual individual/net calls, ALL CALLs, and ANY CALLS.

2.5.2.4.1 Placing a Manual Individual/Net Call

Place the Rtf into ALE mode per Paragraph 2.5.2.2. Table 2-40 provides the procedure to place a manual
individual/net call.

NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-40. Procedure to Place a Manual Individual/Net Call

Step COntrol Action Observe
I CALL Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.
2 i and J, Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf toggles between
MANUAL is displayed (if necessary). AUTO and MANUAL, and
displays the following screen:

CALL: MANUAL
INDIVIDUAL/NET

MANUAL is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release until The Rtf displays the
INDIVIDUAL/NET is flashing. following screen:

CALL: MANUAL
INDIVIDUAL/NET

INDIVIDUAL/NET is
flashing.
4 i and J, Press and release repeatedly until The Rff scrolls through the
INDIVIDUAL/NET is displayed (if list of call types, and displays
necessary). the following screen:

CALL: MANUAL
INDIVIDUAL/NET

INDIVIDUAL/NET is
flashing.

2-51
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-40. Procedure to Place a Manual Individual/Net Call - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 ENTER Press and release. The RIT displays the
following screen:

CALL ADDRESS?
----------
The first underscore (cursor)
is flashing.
6 i and ,1., or numeric Press and release repeatedly until the The RIT displays the
keypad desired station address or net is following screen:
displayed (if different from that
displayed). CALL ADDRESS?
AREA33HQ ______

The target address is flashing.

7 ENTER Press and release. The RIT displays the
following screen:

AREA33HQ------
CALL ON CHAN? 00

The channel number is

flashing.
8 i and ,1., or numeric Press and release repeatedly until the The RIT displays the
keypad desired channel is displayed (if following screen:
different from that displayed).
AREA33HQ------
CALL ON CHAN? 23

The channel number is

flashing.

2·52
Em HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-40. Procedure to Place a Manuallndlvldual/Net call - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
9 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

T23 CALLING:
AREA33HQ ______

followed by:

R23 CALLING:
AREA33HQ ______

If the call is successful. the

Rtf displays the following
screen:

R23 LINKED:
AREA33HQ ______

If the call failed. error tones

are heard. and the R/f
displays the following screen:

R23 *SCAN*
NO RESPONSE

followed by

R04 *SCAN*
OFF CLR

The channel number scrolls

through programmed
channels.

2-53
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;J)HARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.2.4.2 Placing a Manual ALL CALL

An ALL CALL is initiated from scan mode. Place the Rtf into ALE scan mode per Paragraph 2.5.2.2. Table 2-41
provides the procedure to place a manual ALL CALL.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-41. Procedure to Place a Manual ALL CALL
Step Control Action Observe
1 CALL Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.
2 i and J., Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf toggles between
MANUAL is displayed (if necessary). AUTO and MANUAL, and
displays the following screen:

CALL: MANUAL
INDIVIDUAL/NET

MANUAL is flashing.
3 f- and-+ Press and release until The R/T displays the
INDIVIDUAL/NET is flashing. following screen:

CALL: MANUAL
INDIVIDUAL/NET

INDIVIDUAL/NET is
flashing.
4 i and J., Press and release repeatedly until ALL The R/T scrolls through the
is displayed (if necessary). list of call types, and displays
the following screen:

CALL: MANUAL
ALL

ALL is flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/T displays the
following screen:

ALL--------
CALL ON CHAN? 00

The channel number is

flashing.

2·54
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-41. Procedure to Place a Manual ALL CALL - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 i and J,., or numeric Press and release repeatedly until the The Rtf displays the
keypad desired channel is displayed (if following screen:
different from that displayed).
ALL--------
CALL ON CHAN? 23

The channel number is

flashing.
7 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

T23 CALLING:
ALL ------

followed by:

R23 CALLING:
ALL - - - - - -

The R/f displays the

following screen:

R23 LINKED:
ALL ------

2-55
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.2.4.3 Placing a Manual ANY CALL

An ANY CALL is initiated from scan mode. Place the R/f into ALE scan mode per Paragraph 2.5.2.2. Table 2-42
provides the procedure to place a manual ANY CALL.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-42. Procedure to Place a Manual ANY CALL
Step Control Action Observe
I CALL Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CALL: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.
2 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly until The R/f toggles between
MANUAL is displayed (if necessary). AUTO and MANUAL, and
displays the following screen:

CALL: MANUAL
INDIVIDUAL/NET

MANUAL is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release until The R{f displays the
INDIVIDUAL/NET is flashing. following screen:

CALL: MANUAL
INDIVIDUAL/NET

INDIVIDUAL/NET is
flashing.
4 iand J.. Press and release repeatedly until The R{f scrolls through the
ANY is displayed (if necessary). list of call types, and displays
the following screen;

CALL: MANUAL
ANY

ANY is flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R{f displays the
following screen:

ANY--------
CALL ON CHAN? 00

The channel number is

flashing.

2-56
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-42. Procedure to Place a Manual ANY CALL - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 i and -1" or numeric Press and release repeatedly until the The Rtf displays the
keypad desired station address is displayed (if following screen:
different from that displayed).
ANY--------
CALL ON CHAN? 23

The channel number is

flashing.
7 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

T05 CALLING:
ANY --------

followed by:

R05 CALLING:
ANY --------

As units respond, the R/f

momentarily displays the
following screen:

R05 CALLING:
RSP FROM AREA3

The R/f then displays the

following screen:

R05 LINKED:
ANY --------

2-57
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.2.5 Receiving a Call

Table 2-43 provides the procedure for receiving a call.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-43. Procedure for Receiving a Call
Step Control Action Observe
1 None None When an incoming call or
LQA request is received, the
Rtf displays the following
screen:

ROI-I1.7800 =
SIGNAL RECEIVED

2 None None If the incoming call is not

addressed to the unit, the R/f
resumes scanning operation
and displays the following
screen:

ROt *SCAN*
OFF CLR
3 None None If the preamble message
indicates an incoming call is
addressed to the receiving
unit, then receipt of the call is
acknowledged to the
originating unit and both units
prompt their operators with an
audible beep, and the Rtf
displays the following screen:

R05 LINKED
AREA33HQ ______

which remains on the display

until the radio is keyed.

2-58
IJHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.5.2.6 Terminating a can

Table 2-44 provides the procedure for tenninating a call.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-44. Procedure for Terminating a call
Step Control Action Observe
I CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TERMINATE LINK
YES

YES is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. Link tennination tones are
transmitted and the link is
tenninated; the R/f resumes
scanning and displays the
following screen:

ROl *SCAN*
OFF CLR

TO RETURN TO THE CALL

3 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f operates with its

current link and displays the
following screen:

ROl LINKED
AREA33HQ ______

-OR-
r and J. Press and release. The YES field toggles to NO.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f operates with its
current link and displays the
following screen:

ROl LINKED
AREA33HQ ______

2·59
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.2.7 OPTion Key Functions

The following paragraphs describe the OPTion key functions available when in ALE mode.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
a. LQA - Two types of LQA are available:
1. EXCHANGE LQA - Provides a more accurate two-way channel evaluation, but takes longer to
complete. Table 2-45 provides the procedure to execute an Exchange LQA.
2. SOUND LQA - Provides only a one-way channel evaluation, but is completed in a shorter period of
time. Table 2-46 provides the procedure to execute a Sound LQA.
LQAs initiated from the OPT key are executed immediately and are one-time LQAs only.
b. SCORES - The LQA score indicates the relative quality of the channel. A score of "- - - " represents a
channel where no valid measurement has been made. If a measurement was made, scores can range from
o(poorest channel) to 100 (best channel). Table 2-47 provides the procedure to view LQA scores.
c. TIME - Allows the viewing of radio time. Table 2-48 provides the procedure for viewing radio time.
d. POWER - Allows the selection of transmitter output power. Table 2-49 provides the procedure to select
transmitter output power.
e. RETUNE - Retunes the antenna coupler. Table 2-50 provides the procedure for retuning the antenna
coupler.
f. EOW_TO - EOW Destination allows the operator to select the distant station that is to receive the EOW
data from a remote terminal. Table 2-51 provides the procedure to send an EOW.
NOTE
The operator can only set the EOW destination after the radio
has been linked.
g. TX_MSG - A transmit AMD is a text message that is sent to another individual or net. A transmit AMD
message may be sent when the Rtf is either linked or scanning. Upon completion of the AMD
transmission, the R{f returns to its previous state. The TX_MSG menu selection allows the operator to:
1. Send a Transmit AMD message. Table 2-53 provides the procedure to send a Transmit AMD
message.
2. Edit/Create a Transmit AMD Message. When editing a transmit AMD message, the cursor appears on
the first character of the message buffer.
• If no message has been previously entered into the buffer (that is, the buffer is empty),
underscores appear in the display. Use the numeric keypad to enter a new message into the
buffer. Refer to Paragraph 2.6.2 for complete instructions.

• If the cursor is on the first character of an existing message when a key on the keypad is
pressed, all characters in the message are deleted and the entire message line on the display
appears as flashing underscore characters. Use the numeric keypad to enter a new message into
the buffer. Refer to Paragraph 2.6.2 for complete instructions.

2-60
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

• Repeatedly pressing the zero key (0) accesses a series of special characters in addition to a zero.
These characters are (in order):
o [SPACE] , ' . " I \ _ : ; * & ! ? @ # $ % + - = < > A ( ) [

• The left arrow (f-) and right arrow (-+) move the cursor around the message buffer.

• CLEAR deletes the character under the cursor as well as all characters to the right of the cursor.
Table 2-52 provides the procedure to edit a Transmit AMD message.
h. RX_MSG - A Receive AMD is a message sent by another individual. Receive AMOs may be reviewed
or deleted. The Rtf saves the ten most recently received AMDs (ten is the maximum number of AMDs
that can be saved). When enabled, the AUTO MESSAGE DISPLAY feature scrolls the RX AMD across
the display as it is received. Refer to Paragraph 2.6.4.5 for programming information.
When reviewing a Receive AMD message, the top line of the display shows the date and time of receipt
for the message. Up to the first ten characters of the sending address are displayed and are blinking. When
a message is received by the RIf, an M# notification is displayed in the SQUELCH area of the standard
ALE display, where # is the number of unread messages.
When AUTO MESSAGE DISPLAY is disabled, there are two ways of reviewing Receive AMD
messages:
1. This procedure is used for reviewing unread messages only. Table 2-54 provides the procedure to
review unread Receive AMD messages from the standard ALE display screen
2. This is used to review any stored Receive AMD message. Table 2-55 provides the procedure to
review any Receive AMD message.
When AUTO MESSAGE DISPLAY is enabled, the Receive Message automatically scrolls across the
display as it is received. To automatically receive and display a received message, the radio may be any of
the following:

• Scanning

• Stop scan

• Linked
If an RX message is received while in the LIGHT, CALL, or OPTion key menus, the automatic display
and scrolling of the incoming message is inhibited. Only alert tones are heard.
Figure 2-15 shows the typical progression of front panel displays as an RX AMD message is received by
the RIf. No action is necessary by the operator.
After a message has been automatically displayed, the unread message indicator increments by one. After
the messages have been reviewed, the indicator is no longer displayed on the front panel.

2-61
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-45. Procedure to Execute an Exchange LQA

Step Control Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
2 f-or~ Press and release to select LQA (if The Rtf displays the
necessary). following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

IMMEDIATE LQA
EXCHANGE

EXCHANGE is flashing.
4 i and J, Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf displays the
EXCHANGE is displayed (if following screen:
necessary).
IMMEDIATE LQA
EXCHANGE

EXCHANGE is flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

EXCHANGE WITH?
AREA33HQ _______

The target address is flashing.

2-62
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-45. Procedure to Execute an Exchange LQA - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 i and J-, or numeric Press and release repeatedly to enter The Rtf displays the
keypad the address of the station or net with following screen:
which the LQA is to be exchanged (if
different from that displayed). EXCHANGE WITH?
AREA33HQ _______

The target address is flashing.

7 ENTER Press and release. While the LQA is active, the
Rtf displays the following
screen:

T06 EXCHANGING:
AREA33HQ _______

followed by:

R06 EXCHANGING:
AREA33HQ _______

followed by:

RESPFROM:
AREA33HQ _______

The target address is flashing.

These three screens repeat

until all frequencies have been
evaluated.

Upon completion of the LQA.

the Rtf returns to scan mode
and displays the following
screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR

2-63
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-46. Procedure to Execute a Sound LQA

Step Control Action Observe
I OPT Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
2 f-or~ Press and release to select LQA (if The R/f displays the
necessary). following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

IMMEDIATE LQA
EXCHANGE

EXCHANGE is flashing.
4 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly until the The R/f displays the
desired SOUND is displayed (if following screen:
necessary).
IMMEDIATE LQA
SOUND

SOUND is flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SOUND USING?
STATION3 -------

The target address is flashing.

2-64
mJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-46. Procedure to Execute a SOund LQA - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 i and J.., or numeric Press and release repeatedly to enter The Rtf displays the
keypad the address of the station or net with following screen:
which the LQA is to be exchanged (if
different from that displayed). SOUND USING?
STATION4 - - - - - - -

The target address is flashing.

7 ENTER Press and release. While the LQA is active, the
Rtf displays the following
screen:

T06 SOUNDING:
STATION4 - - - - - - -

The unit continues until all

frequencies have been
evaluated.

Upon completion of the LQA,

the Rtf returns to scan mode
and displays the following
screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFFCLR

Table 2-47. Procedure to View LQA SCores

Step Control Action Observe
I OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
2 ~or~ Press and release to select SCORES The R!T displays the
(if necessary). following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

SCORES is flashing.

2-65
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-47. Procedure to View LOA SCores - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SELECf ADDRESS
AREA33HQ _______

The target address is flashing.

4 i and.!., or numeric Press and release repeatedly until the The R/f displays the
keypad desired target address is displayed (if following screen:
different from that displayed).
SELECf ADDRESS
AREA33HQ _______

The target address is flashing.

5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:
AREA33HQ _______
CHAN: 12 SC: 090
6 i and.!. Press and release repeatedly until the The R/f displays the
desired channels are displayed. following screen:

AREA33HQ _______
CHAN: 12 SC: 090
7 OPT or ENTER Press and release. The R/f returns to normal
ALE operation and displays
the following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFFCLR

2-66
II HA RR IS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-48. Procedure to View Radio Time

Control Action Observe
Step
1 OPT Press and release. The R/I' displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE -+

LQA is flashing.
Press and release to select TIME (if The R/I' displays the
2 ~or-+
necessary). following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE -+

TIME is flashing.

3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

RADIO TIME
11:23:32

The current time is flashing.

4 OPT or ENTER Press and release. The R/f returns to normal

ALE operation and displays
the following screen:

R05 "'SCAN'"
OFF CLR

2-67
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS El)HARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-49. Procedure to Select Transmitter Output Power

Step Control Action Observe
I OPT Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
2 f-or~ Press and release to select POWER (if The R/f displays the
necessary). following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

POWER is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TXPOWER
HIGH

The current transmit power

level is flashing.
4 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly until the The R/f scrolls through the
desired power setting is displayed. list of available power
settings. Acceptable transmit
power choices are HIGH,
MED and LOW. The R/f
displays the following screen:

TXPOWER
HIGH

The desired transmit power

level is flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f returns to normal
ALE operation and displays
the following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFFCLR

2·68
mJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-50. Procedure to Retune the Antenna Coupler

Step Control Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
2 f-or~ Press and release to select RETUNE The Rtf displays the
(if necessary). following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

RETUNE is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf returns to nonnal
ALE operation and displays
the following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR

The antenna coupler will

retune during the next call or
LQA.

Table 2-51. Procedure to Send an EOW*

Step Control Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
2 ~ Press and release to select EOW_TO The R/T displays the
(if necessary). following screen:

f- EOW_TO TX_MSG
RX_MSG

EOW_TO is flashing.
* EOWs are sent usmg a remote tennmal after the radiO IS hnked to the destmatlon statlon. The data preset must
be either OFF, AOS, or OY.

2·69
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-51. Procedure to Send an EOW - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
3 ENrER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SEND EOW TO?

-----------
The target address is flashing.
4 i and J, or numeric Press and release repeatedly to enter The Rtf displays the
keypad the address of the desired station. following screen:

SEND EOW TO?

AREA33HQ. ____

The target address is flashing.

S ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

~ EOW_TO TX_MSG
RX_MSG

EOW_TO is flashing.
6 CfRL plus B on the Press and release the two keys The remote tenninal display
remote tenninal keypad simultaneously. shows the following screen:

EOW TO (AREA33HQ)

7 Remote tenninal keypad Press and release repeatedly to The desired EOW message
compose the EOW message. will be displayed on the
remote tenninal display.
8 CfRL plus C on the Press and release the two keys The remote tenninal indicates
remote tenninal keypad simultaneously. that the EOW message is
being transmitted. Upon
completion of the
transmission, the Rtf returns
to link mode.

2-70
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2·52. Procedure to Edit an AMD Message

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The R/T displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
2 f-or~ Press and release to select TX_MSG. The R/T displays the
following screen:

f- EOW_TO TX_MSG
RX_MSG

TKMSG is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

TXMESSAGE:
SEND EDIT

SEND is flashing.
4 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
EDIT. following screen:

TXMESSAGE:
SEND EDIT

EDIT is flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SELECTTX MSG:
... MESSAGE .... ~

AMD message to be edited is

flashing. New messages are
indicated by:

in the MESSAGE area.

2-71
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·52. Procedure to Edit an AMD Message - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 i and.! Press and release repeatedly until the The R/T scrolls through the
desired message is displayed. list of stored messages and
displays the following screen:

SELECf TX MSG:
... MESSAGE .... ~

AMD message to be edited is

flashing.
7 ENTER Press and release. The R/T displays the
following screen:

EDIT TX MESSAGE:
NOW IS THE TIME~

The first character of the

message is flashing.
8 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to access The R/T displays the
the portion of the existing message to following screen:
edit
EDIT TX MESSAGE:
ALL GOOD MEN TO~

D is flashing.
-QR-
Numeric Keypad Press and release repeatedly to enter a The R/T displays the
new message. following screen:

Refer to Paragraph 2.6.2 for complete EDIT TX MESSAGE:

procedures for entering alphanumeric -------------
characters.
is flashing.
9 ENTER Press and release to exit edit mode and The R/T displays the
save message. following screen:

SEND MESSAGE?
NO

NO is flashing.

2-72
mH AR RIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 2·52. Procedure to Edit an AMD Message - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
Press and release repeatedly to select The R!f displays the
10 t and J.. following screen:
NO.

SEND MESSAGE?
NO

NO is flashing.

-OR-
t and J.. Press and release repeatedly to select The R!f displays the
YES. following screen:

SEND MESSAGE?
YES

YES is flashing.

Press and release. If NO is selected at the SEND

11 ENTER
MESSAGE prompt. the R/f
displays the following screen:

TXME SSAG E:
SEND EDIT

EDIT is flashing.

If YES is selected at the

SEND MESSAGE prompt.
the call sequence begins and
the Rtf displays the
appropriate screens.

2-73
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-53. Procedure to Transmit an AMD Message

Step Control Action Observe
1 OPT Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.
2 f-or~ Press and release to select TX_MSG. The R/f displays the
follOWing screen:

f- EOW_TO TX_MSG
RX_MSG

TX_MSG is flashing.
3 ENfER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TXMESSAGE:
SEND EDIT

SEND is flashing.
4 f- and ~ Press and release repeated!y to select The R/f displays the
SEND (if necessary). following screen:

TXMESSAGE:
SEND EDIT

SEND is flashing.
5 ENfER Press and release. The R/T displays the
following screen:

SELECT TX MSG:
... MESSAGE .... ~

AMD message to be sent is

flashing.

2-74
mH AR RIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 2-53. Procedure to Transmit an AMD Message - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
6 i and J, Press and release repeatedly until the The R/I' scrolls through the
desired message is displayed. list of stored messages and
displays the following screen:

SELECf TX MSG:
" . MESSAGE .... ~

AMD message to be sent is

flashing.

7 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' displays the

following screen:

SEND: AUTO
INDIVIDUAL/NET

AUTO is flashing.

8 For complete infonnation and

procedures to complete an automatic
call, refer to Paragraph 2.5.2.3.

For complete infonnation and

procedures to complete a manual call,
refer to Paragraph 2.5.2.4.

2-75
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
It HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·54. Procedure to Review an Unread Receive AMD Message from the ALE Display
Step COntrol Action Observe
1 Function knob Rotate to ALE position. The R/f displays the
following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR M3
2 f- and--+ Press and release repeatedly until M3 The R/f displays the
is selected. following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR M3

M and the number of

messages are flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

12{24/92 16:42
FROM: AREA33HQ --+
4 i and J. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
list of unread messages and
displays the following screen:

12{24/92 16:42
FROM: AREA33HQ --+
5 f- and--+ Press and release repeatedly to scroll The R/f displays the
through the entire AMD message. following screen:

... MESSAGE ... --+

6 ENTER Press and release. After the last message has
been read, the Rrr displays
the following screen:

f-- EOW_TO TKMSG

RX_MSG

RKMSG is flashing.
7 OPT Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR

2-76
II HA RR IS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-55. Procedure to Review Any Receive AMD Message

Control Action Observe
Step
Rotate to ALE position. The R/I' displays the
1 Function knob
following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR

Press and release. The R/I' displays the

2 OPr
following screen:

LQA SCORES TIME

POWER RETUNE ~

LQA is flashing.

Press and release to select RX_MSG The R/I' displays the

3 ~or~
(if necessary). following screen:

~ EOW_TO TX_MSG
RX_MSG

TI,-MSG is flashing.

4 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' displays the

following screen:

RXME SSAG E:
REVIEW DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.

Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the

5
REVIEW (if necessary). following screen:

RXME SSAG E:
REVIEW DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.

ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

6
following screen:

12{24/92 16:42
FROM: AREA33HQ ~

2-n
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·55. Procedure to Review Any Receive AMD Message - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
7 i and J. Press and release repeatedly until the The R/f scrolls through the
desired message is displayed. list of stored messages and
displays the following screen:

12/24/92 16:42
FROM: AREA33HQ ~

8 +- and~ Press and release repeatedly to scroll The R/f displays the
through entire message. following screen:

. .. MESSAGE ...
9 OPT Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

R05 *SCAN*
OFF CLR

2-78
m)HARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

R0Lf *SCAN*
OFF CLR
- :..........
R0Lf 08 . 7090 . : .. .
RECEIVING CALL
- ·
T0Lf 08 . 7090 ....................•...
.. :

RECEIVING CALL

RECEIVING
MESSAGE

12/2Lf/92 23:Lf2
FROM: AREA 33 HQ
MESSAGE SCROLLS FROM RIGHT TO LEFT
~~~~~~~~~

12/2Lf/92 23:Lf2
HQ HOW IS THE TI
MNPK.()13

Figure 2-15. Typical Front Panel Displays During RX AMD Receipt

AUTO MESSAGE DISPLAY Enabled

2·79
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.5.3 Frequency Hopping

For two or more units to communicate in frequency hopping mode, each unit must be programmed with identical
net parameters.
In all procedures discussed in the following paragraphs, Radio 1 refers to any radio in the network, while Radio 2
refers to any other radio in the network.
2.5.3.1 Front Panel Display Indicators
The front panel display in frequency hopping mode is similar to that of SSB mode (refer to Paragraph 2.5.1.1).
The difference between the displays is that the frequency field of the SSB display is replaced with a SYNC
message, and the mode and squelch fields are blank.
2.5.3.2 Placing the RF·5200 FALCON'" Series Manpack System Into Frequency Hopping
Mode
Table 2-56 provides the procedure for placing the RF-5200 FALCON"" Series Manpack System into frequency
hopping mode.
When the system is initially placed in frequency hopping mode, or when the CHANNEL switch is moved to a
new position, the front panel will display a NO SYNC message. The unit must perform an initial synchronization
before it is able to communicate with other units. Refer to Paragraph 2.5.3.3 for instructions on performing an
initial synchronization.
If an antenna coupler is used in the system, it will automatically tune to the center frequency of the net and will be
limited to narrow band hopping.
Table 2·56. Procedure to Place the RF·5200 FALCON"" series Manpack System Into
Frequency Hopping Mode
Step Control Action Observe
1 Function Switch Rotate clockwise or counterclockwise The R/f displays the
to the HOP position. following screen:

*INITIALIZING*
* * * * WAIT * * * *

followed by:

R05-NOSYNC
WAIT ...

2-80
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.5.3.3 Initial Synchronization

Initial synchronization is the process by which two or more units are synchronized and form a net. It is also the
process by which a unit is synchronized with other units which are part of an existing net, which is referred to as
Late Net Entry. Refer to Paragraph 2.5.3.5.
NOTE
An Initial Synchronization must be performed at least every
eight (8) hours.
Place Radio I and Radio 2 in frequency hopping mode as described in Paragraph 2.5.3.2, or rotate the channel
switches to a different net. Radio 1 sends a Sync Request as described in Table 2-57. The Sync Request message
is then received by all units in hop mode with identical net parameters as Radio 1. When the Sync Request is
received by a unit, an audible beep alerts the operator and a message appears on the display. Radio 2 then sends a
Sync Response within five seconds as described in Table 2-58.
During the initial synchronization process, any additional units in hop mode with the same net parameters acquire
synchronization and enter the net if they receive the Sync Request sent by Radio 1 as well as the Sync Response
sent by Radio 2. There are no actions required by the operators of these units, referred to as Passive Units.
Table 2-57. Procedure to send a Sync Request - Radio 1
Step Control Action Observe
I CALL Press and release. Radio 1 sends a Sync Request
message and the R/f displays
the following screen:

R05-NOSYNC
AWAITING SYNC~30

2·81
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-58. Procedure to Perform Initial Synchronization - Radio 2

Step Control Action Observe
1 None None An audible beep is heard, and
the R/f displays the following
screen:

R05-NOSYNC
SYNC REQ RCV~02

2 CALL Press and release within five seconds The synchronization process
of the receipt of a Sync Request. begins and the Rtf displays
the following screen:

T05-NOSYNC
RESPTOSYNC~18

Approximately 30 seconds are

required to complete the
synchronization process.

If the synchronization process

is successful, all R/fs in the
net display the following
screen:

R05-IN SYNC
OFF CLR

If the synchronization process

fails, Radio 1 displays the
following screen:

R05-NOSYNC
SYNC FAILED

2-82
IJH AR RlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
-
2.5.3.4 Loss of Net Synchronization

If a unit displays an IN SYNC message on its front panel, but communicatio

n with other units is failing, the unit
be rotated out of its current
may no longer be in synchronization. To refonn the Net, the Channel switch must ned.
desired net position. The Initial Synchronization process must then be perfon
position, then returned to the
Refer to Paragraph 2.5.3.3.
2.5.3.5 Late Net Entry
additional units can enter the net
When two or more units have acquired synchronization and have formed a net,
2.5.3.3.
by executing the identical Initial Synchronization sequence. Refer to Paragraph
2.5.3.6 Exiting From, or Dissolving the Net
the net:
When a unit is in a net (displaying IN SYNC), there are four ways to exit from
the net. Since different units
a. Eight hours after a unit has entered a net, the unit automatically exits from
ing units to remain synchronized. However,
may enter the net at various times, it is possible for remain
ing NO SYNc.
these remaining units are not able to communicate with the unit display
b. Rotate the Channel knob to a different setting.
c. Rotate the Function knob to a different mode of operation.
d. Rotate the Function knob to the OFF position, powering down the unit.
2.5.3.7 Sending and Receiving Data Messages
method used in SSB operation.
When two or more units have fonned a net, data messages are sent using the same
and accepts data from the data
When the request to send input to the unit is activated, the transmitter is keyed
that the message is a data message
terminal for transmission. At the receive end, the unit automatically detennines
data tennina!. There are no long
and detects the data rate. The receive unit outputs the demodulated data to the
preamble or synchronization delays associated with these messages.
are different from the six
Three data presets and DV are selectable in frequency hopping mode. These presets
available in SSB and ALE modes.
2.5.3.8 Sending and Receiving Voice Messages
d if the units are equipped
When two or more units have fonned a net, voice messages can be sent and receive
with Linear Predictive Coding (LPC).
d, the unit assumes that a
At the transmit end, when the microphone keyline or the audio keyline is activate
digitized and transmitted.
digitized voice message is being sent. The microphone or audio input is
d voice message and
At the receive end, the unit automatically detennines that the message is a digitize
associated with these
demodulates it accordingly. There are no long preamble or synchronization delays
messages.
tion field) or encrypted digitized
The transmitted message may be clear digitized voice (select CLR in the encryp
keys.
voice (if Digital Encryption is installed) by selecting one of the six programmable
Analog clear voice and AVS modes are not available when frequency hopping.

2·83
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6 ADVANCED OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING

2.6.1 General

The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter is programmed from the front panel or by remote control. This section covers
front-panel programming only. Remote programming is discussed in Paragraph 2.8.
NOTE
A password protection system prevents unauthorized personnel
from selecting or changing programming parameters.
Programming may be done from the front panel keypad. A programming menu appears on the front panel display.
If any program items on the menu are locked out by the lockout feature, they will not appear on the display and
cannot be selected for change. Program items may also be missing if certain options have not been installed in the
Rtf. In order to unlock program items, the radio operator needs to know the password programmed into the radio.
Selecting the appropriate menu item and entering the correct password allows qualified personnel access to all
program items.

When a programming menu is displayed, the ~ and ~ keys, as well as the CLEAR and ENTER keys, are active.
In general, the~ and ~ keys are used to select the program headings and the ENTER key is used to access or
view the program parameters. If the operator makes a mistake in the program process, pressing CLEAR returns
the previous entry to the display or erases a character when using the alphanumeric keys.
When changing the value of a programming parameter, the i and J, keys, as well as CLEAR and ENTER, are
active. The alphanumeric keys are also active if they can be used to enter a value for an item.
A selected programming item or its current value is always flashing. At this point, the operator has three choices:
a. Press CLEAR to return to the previous display (or to erase a character when using alphanumeric keys).
b. Press ENTER to accept the current value of the item.
NOTE
When the ENTER key is pressed at the end of a list of items that
program a parameter, the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter returns
to the top entry of the list or to the main programming menu.
c. Enter a new value using the i and J, keys or the alphanumeric keys to select the value, then press
ENTER.
To exit the programming mode at any time, press the PRGM key.
The following paragraphs provide programming instructions for the radio.

2-84
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.2 Entering Alphanumeric Names

Whenever the front-panel operation calls for an alphanumeric name to be used, enter the name by one of two
methods:
a. Use the i and J, keys to scroll through programmed names; press ENTER to enter the data.
b. Use the alphanumeric keypad. Each of the number keys (except 0 and 9) has one number and three letters.
The 9 key has two letters and a question mark (only used as a wildcard during ALE operation). To enter
an alphanumeric name, repeatedly press the appropriate number/letter key until the desired alphanumeric
character appears. Each time the key is pressed, the next character shown on the key is displayed. When
the desired number or letter appears, press either the ~ key or the next number/letter to be entered. The
~ key is required when the next character is on the same key as the current character. This enters the
selected lener or number and advances the cursor to the next cursor position. See Figure 2-16 for an
example of entering an alphanumeric name.

gggg =F a
(1(1(1(1
•• =A

=x
a
a
•• =1

5OOOE·045

Figure 2-16. Example of Entering an Alphanumeric Name (FAX1)

2-85
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.3 SSB Programming

Table 2-59 provides an index to the programming instructions for SSB operation. Figure 2-17 shows how SSB
programming relates to the LCD display. Figure 2-18 is a summary of all SSB programming parameters.

Table 2-59. SSB Programming Index

Menu Radio Parameter to Be Reference
Selection Programmed Paragraph
CHAN Channel configuration parameters 2.6.3.2
FILL Load encryption keys using a fill gun 2.6.3.3
DATA Data presets 2.6.3.4
CFIG General radio configuration 2.6.3.5
KEYS Encryption keys 2.6.3.6
SECUR Password operations 2.6.3.7

2.6.3.1 Accessing SSB Programming Menu

Table 2-60 provides the procedure to access the SSB programming menu.

NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-60. Procedure to Access the SSB Programming Menu

Step COntrol Action Observe
I Function Switch Rotate clockwise or counterclockwise The R/f displays the
to the SSB position. following screen:

R05-04.1600 --
USB OFF CLR ON
2 PRGM Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR
CHAN is flashing.

If the R/f displays any

programming screen other
than shown here, refer to
Paragraph 2.6.3.7.1 for
instructions on entering a
password.

NOTE: The keys menu choice will not be displayed if the encryption option is not installed.

2-86
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

ALI

:ff-
CHANNEL FILL DATA PRESETS
- Channel Number - Program with Fill Gun - Preset Number
- Receive Frequency -Interface
- Transmit Frequency - Modem Type
- Modulation - Baud Rate
-AGe Speed - Shift Frequencies
-IF Bandwidth - Interleaving
- Receive Only Channel - Preset Name

- Enter Password
- Radio - Add or Modify Key - Select New Password
- Ports - Delete Key - Programming Lockout
- Options - Operational Lockout
-Time

MNPK-Q52

Figure 2-17. SSB Programming Selections

2-87
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

SUMMARY - SSB Programming

• Channel Number • Ports

• Receive Frequency - Remote or Data
Async Rate
• Transmit Frequency
Async Bits
• Modulation Async Stop Bits
• AGC Async Parity
• IF Bandwidth Async Row Control
AsyncEcho
• Receive-Only Channel
TX Sync Clock Source
-Protocol
Async Polarity
• Options
-1 kW Power Amplifier
- Prepost Selector
DATA PRESETS - Prepost Antenna
- Prepost Scanrate
• Preset Number Time
• Interface
• Modem Type
• Baud Rate
- Shift Frequencies
• Change Key
• Interleaving
• Delete Key

CONFIGURATION SECURITY

• Radio Enter Password

- Transmit Power • Select a New Password
-RWAS Programming Lockout
- Unkey Mask - Channel
-Fill
-Data
- Configuration
-Keys
• Operational Lockout
- Modulation
- Data Preset
- Encryption Key

Figure 2-18. SSB Programming Summary

2-88
I) HARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.3.2 Channel Configuration Programming

Channel configuration programming allows the operator to change channel information. A summary of each
programmable parameter is provided:
a. Channel Number - Selects the channel number for which the remaining configuration parameters will be
programmed.
b. Receive Frequency - Programs the receive frequency for the selected channel.
c. Transmit Frequency - Programs the transmit frequency for the selected channel. If simplex mode is
desired, the transmit frequency is the same as the receive frequency.
d. Modulation - Programs the modulation mode for the selected channel. May select from USB, LSB,
AME,andCW.
e. Automatic Gain Control (AGC) - Programs AGC speed for the selected channel. May select from SLOW
or MED (for use with internal modem), MED or FAST (for CW operation or if static present), and DATA
(for use with external data modems).
f. Intermediate Frequency (IF) Bandwidth - Programs the IF bandwidth for the selected channel. Select IF
bandwidth for each channel based on the radio mode and option selected. Nonnal bandwidth settings are
2.7 kHz (USB, LSB), 1.0 kHz (CW), 3.0 kHz (MODEM, AME, DV). When modem, digital voice, or
AVS is selected, the 3 kHz bandwidth is automatically set. For voice and CW, select the narrowest IF
bandwidth that provides acceptable operational performance. When using external voice or data
equipment connected through the DATA connector, consult the equipment manual for proper bandwidth
selection.
g. Receive Only Channel- Programs a channel so that transmissions on the programmed frequency can be
received, but prevents the operator from transmitting on that channel.
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-61 provides the procedure to access channel
configuration parameters.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

2·89
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·61. Procedure to Access Channel Configuration Parameters

Step Control Action Observe
1 f-and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
CHAN (if necessary). following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CRG KEYS SECUR

CHAN is flashing.
2 ENfER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHANNEL NUMBER
TO CHANGE: 06

The channel number is

flashing.
3 i and .1, or numeric Press and release until desired channel Desired channel number is
keypad number is displayed. flashing.
4 ENfER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen for the
selected channel:

RXFREQ CH06
14.5784 MHZ

The receive frequency is

flashing.
5 Numeric keypad Enter in desired frequency in MHz (no The Rtf displays the new
decimal point is necessary). Must be frequency information as it is
in the range of 1.6 MHz to 59.9999 typed in.
MHz.

If the desired frequency is less than 10

MHz, the frequency must be entered
using a leading zero.
6 ENfER Press and release. The R/T accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen
for the selected channel:

TXFREQ CH06
14.6784 MHZ

The transmit frequency is

flashing. The receive
frequency is used as the
default value.

2-90
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-61. Procedure to Access Channel Configuration Parameters - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
7 Numeric keypad Enter in desired frequency (if different The R/f displays the new
from receive frequency) in MHz (no frequency infonnation as it is
decimal point is necessary). Must be typed in
in the range of 1.6 MHz to 59.9999
MHz.

None If transmit frequency is the same as

receive frequency (simplex operation)

CLEAR Press and release. Resets to original transmit

frequency.
8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

MODULATION CH 06
USB

The modulation mode is

flashing.
9 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
available modulation modes.
When the desired mode of
modulation is displayed, stop
scrolling.
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

AGCSPEED CH06
MED

The AGC speed is flashing.

11 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
available AGC speeds
(SLOW, MED, FAST, and
DATA). When the desired
AGC speed is displayed, stop
scrolling.

2·91
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
Ell HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-61. Procedure to Access Channel COnfiguration Parameters - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

IF BANDWIDTH CH06
2.7 KHZ

The IF bandwidth is flashing.

13 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
available IF bandwidths (1.5,
2.0,2.4,2.7,3.0 kHz). When
the desired bandwidth is
displayed, stop scrolling.
14 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RXONLY CH06
NO

NO is flashing.
15 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
receive only setting is
displayed, stop toggling.
16 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL NUMBER
TOCHANOE: 06

The channel number is

flashing.
17 i and J.., or numeric Press and release. Select a new channel number
keypad to program.
18 PROM Press and release. The Rtf exits programming
mode and displays the
standard SSB display.

2·92
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.6.3.3 Programming the RIT Encryption Keys Using the Fill Gun
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter can be loaded with encryption data using the RF-5961 Field Code
Programmer (also referred to as the fill gun). The fill gun is loaded by an RF-5960 Master Code Programmer.
Refer to the RF-5960/RF-5961 Operations Manual for details on these units. When prompted to do so by the R/T.
attach the RF-5961 Fill Gun to the AUDIO/FILL connector on the front panel of the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter.
NOTE

If the RF-5961 Field Code Programmer red low battery Light

Emitting Diode (LED) lights during loading or filling. the data
transfer may be invalid. Replace the internal 9-volt battery as
soon as possible to avoid faulty encryption variables. Refer to
the RF-5960/RF-5961 Operations Manual for battery
replacement procedure.
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-62 provides the procedure for programming
the R/T using the fill gun.

2-93
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-62. Procedure to Program RIT Using the Fill Gun

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
FILL. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

FILL is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CONNECT FILL GUN

THEN PRESS ENTER

ENTER is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

DESTROY EXISTING
KEYS? NO

NO is flashing.
4 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
and NO. When YES is
displayed, stop toggling.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f is loaded with the
encryption keys from the fill
gun. Upon completion of the
fill, the R/f displays the
following screen:

RADIO
FILLED
6 ENTER or CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

2-94
mJH AR RlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATIOt-l
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS ;=

2.6.3.4 Programming Data Presets

with a specific data device. If the
Data presets configure the internal modem for operation at a specific data rate,
data presets are available (0-6),
modem is not installed, DATA will not appear on the programming display. Seven
and each data preset defines the following five parameters:
on on either the data
a. Interface Type - Programs the R/I' for either synchronous or asynchronous operati
port (ASYNC RMT PORT),
port or the remote port. The three available choices are asynchronous remote
DATA PORT). Be
asynchronous data port (ASYNC DATA PORf), and synchronous data port (SYNC
tible with the data
sure the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter data port parameters agree and are compa
device interface.
choices:
b. Modem Type - selects the desired waveform. The following are the available
1. FSKNS - Center Frequency 2805 Hz ± 42.5 Hz
2. FSKWS - Center Frequency 2000 Hz ± 425 Hz
3. FSK-A - Center Frequency 2000 Hz ± 85 Hz
mark, and 1275 Hz for
4. FSK-V - Mark/space frequencies. Default value is 1070 Hz ± 100 Hz for
space. Mark and space range is 350 Hz to 3250 Hz.
5. 39-Tone - QPSK to 2400 bits per second (bps)
6. Serial-Tone - MIL-STD-188-1l0A to 2400 bps
for synchronous data
c. Baud Rate - Baud rate is a function of modem type. When the modem is enabled
onous port data rate. The
transmission, the over-the-air baud rate command also controls the synchr
following are the available baud rate selections by modem type:
1. FSKNS: 75
2. FSKWS: 75, 150, 300
3. FSKA: 75, 150
4. FSK-V: 75, 150, 300
5. 39-Tone: 75, 150,300,600, 1200,2400
6. Serial-Tone: RX 75; TX 75, 150,300,600, 1200.2400
ze data errors due to
d. Interleaving - Used only with the 39-tone and serial-tone waveforms to minimi
ns:
fading and burst noise interference. The following are the interleaving selectio
1. Long: both 39- and serial-tone
2. Short: both 39- and serial-tone
3. Zero: serial-tone only
4. Alternate Long: 39-tone only
5. Alternate Short: 39-tone only
meric name can be
e. Preset Name - After selecting the values for a data preset, any four-digit alphanu
name is not defined fo r a
chosen. The programmer can select names such as FAX I, PC2, etc. If a preset
data preset. the preset will be called DATx, where x is number 0 through 6.
s the procedure for programmi ng
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-63 provide
the data presets.

2-95
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-63. Procedure for Programming Data Presets

Step Control Action Observe
1 f- and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/I' displays the
DATA. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

DATA is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' displays the
following screen:

DATA PRESET TO
CHANGE: 4 [DAT4]

The data preset is flashing.

3 i and ,1., or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The R/I' displays the
keypad following screen: data preset
to be changed (from 0 to 6).

DATA PRESET TO
CHANGE: 4 [DAT4]
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

INTERFACE [DAT4]
ASYNC DATA PORT

The interface data pon is

flashing.
5 i and ,1. Press and release repeatedly. The R/I' scrolls through the
three available choices for
interface configuration. When
the desired interface
configuration is displayed.
stop scrolling.
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

MODEM TYPE
39 TONE [DAT4]

The modem waveform type is

flashing.

2-96
mH AR RIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 2-63. Procedure for Programming Data Presets - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
7
available choices for modem
waveform. When the desired
waveform is displayed, stop
scrolling.

8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the

programmed value and
displays the following screen:

MODEM BAUD RATE

2400 [DAT4]

The baud rate is flashing.

9 i and! Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
available choices for baud rate
based on the selected modem
type. When the desired baud
rate is displayed. stop
scrolling. If the modem type is
not FSK-V, proceed to step
14.

10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the

programmed value and, if
FSK-V modem type is
selected, the R{f displays the
following screen:

FSK-V MARK FREQ

1070 HZ [DAT4]

The mark frequency is

flashing.

If any other screen is

displayed, proceed to step 14.

11 Numeric Keypad Enter in desired mark frequency. Must The Rtf displays the new
be in the range of 350 Hz to 3250 Hz. mark frequency as it is typed
in.

2·97
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-63. Procedure for Programming Data Presets - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
12 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' accepts the
programmed value and,
displays the following screen:

FSK-V SPACE FREQ

1200 HZ [DAT4]

The space frequency is

flashing.
13 Numeric Keypad Enter in desired space frequency. The R/I' displays the new
Must be in the range of 350 Hz to space frequency as it is typed
3250Hz. in.
14 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' accepts the
programmed value and,
displays the following screen:

INTERLEAVING
SHORf [DAT4]

The current interleave

selection is flashing.
15 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The R/I' scrolls through the
available choices for
interleaving. When the desired
interleaving is displayed, stop
scrolling.
16 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' accepts the
programmed value and,
displays the following screen:

NEW PRESET NAME

FAX1 [DAT4]

The preset name is flashing.

17 Alphanumeric Keypad Enter in desired preset name (if The R/f displays the
desired). Refer to Paragraph 2.6.2 for following screen:
detailed instructions.
NEW PRESET NAME
FAXl [DAT4]

The preset name is flashing.

2-98
IJH AR RlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS

Table 2-63. Procedure for Programming Data Presets - COntinued

Control Action Observe
Step
ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
18
following screen:

AcrIVATE PRESET?
YES [FAXl]

YES is flashing.

19 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly until YES The R/f toggles between YES
is displayed (if necessary). and NO, and displays the
following screen:

AcrIVATE PRESET?
YES [FAX1]

YES is flashing.

20 ENTER Press and release. The R/f activates the new

preset and displays the
following screen:

DATA PRESET TO
CHANGE: 4 [FAXl]

The data preset is flashing.

21 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFlG KEYS SECUR

DATA is flashing.

2-99
RF-52oo FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.3.5 Programming Configuration Parameters

The Configuration Parameters (CFIG) define radio and data port configuration, detennine the options installed in
the system, and set the time of day. The following are configuration parameters which may be programmed:
a. RADIO - Programs radio configuration.
b. PORTS - Programs port configuration.
c. OPTIONS - Defines which options are being used.
d. TIME - Progrnms the time of day.
The following paragraphs provide infonnation on programming the configuration parameters.
NOTE

In order for net operation to perfonn properly, many of the radio

configuration parameters must be programmed identically across
the net.
2.6.3.5.1 Programming the Radio Configuration
The following are radio configuration parameters which may be programmed:
a. Transmit Power - Available transmit power levels are LOW, MED, and HIGH.
b. Active Squelch - enables or disables the RWAS active squelch feature. Default setting is DISABLE.
c. Unkey Mask - When unkey mask is enables, the receiving radio will not squelch on end of message
transmission signal.
d. Change RWAS Key - Modifies the two digit numeric RWAS key.
e. Squelch Level- When squelch is turned on during operation, it goes to the level set during programming.
Available squelch levels are LOW, MED, and HIGH.
f. CW Offset - Selects offset or CW tone from the displayed carrier frequency. Available offset values are
oHz and 1000Hz.
g. Antenna Port for 20 W Amp - Selects antenna port to be used by a 20 watt power amplifier. The
following are choices:
1. AUTOmatic
2. TUNE
3. BNC
h. Error Beeps - Allows activation or suppression of audio beeps in response to invalid key entries.
i. Compression - Turns audio compression on or off.
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-64 provides the procedure for programming
the radio configuration.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

2-100
(II HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-64. Procedure to Program Radio Configuration Parameters

Step Control Action Observe
I ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R{I' displays the
CFIG. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR
CFIG is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R{I' displays the
following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

RADIO is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
RADIO (if necessary). following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

RADIO is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TXPOWER
HIGH

The transmit power level is

flashing.
5 i and .1, or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
keypad three available power senings.
Available power settings are
LOW, MED, and HIGH.
When the desired power
sening is displayed, stop
scrolling.

2-101
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·64. Procedure to Program Radio Configuration Parameters - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RWAS
DISABLE

The current RWAS setting is

flashing.
7 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between
ENABLE and DISABLE.
When the desired RWAS
setting is displayed, stop
toggling.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

UNKEYMASK
ENABLE

The current unkey mask

setting is flashing.
9 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between
ENABLE and DISABLE.
When the desired UNKEY
MASK setting is displayed,
stop toggling.
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANGE RWAS KEY

YES

YES is flashing.
11 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO. When YES is
displayed, stop toggling.
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RWASKEY
--

2-102
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2·64. Procedure to Program Radio COnfiguration Parameters - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
13 Numeric Keypad Press and release repeatedly to enter a The R/f accepts the
new RWAS key. programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RWASKEY
--
For Active Squelch
compatibility, radios within a
network must be set to the
same RWAS key.
14 ENTER Press and release. The Rrr accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

SQUELCH LEVEL
HIGH

The current squelch level is

flashing.
15 i and .1, or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
keypad three available squelch
settings. Acceptable squelch
levels are HIGH, MED, and
LOW. When the desired
squelch setting is displayed.
stop scrolling.
16 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CWOFFSET
OHZ

o HZ is flashing.
17 i and .1, or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between 0 Hz
keypad and 1000 Hz. When the
desired offset setting is
displayed. stop toggling.
18 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ANTENNA PORT
FOR20W AMP: AUTO

The current antenna port

selection is flashing.

2-103
 IJH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

- Continued
Table 2-64. Procedure to Program Radio Configuration Parameters
Control Action Observe
Step
iand ! Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
19
available antenna port
selections. Available
selections are AUTO, TUNE,
and BNC. When the desired
antenna port selection is
displayed, stop toggling.

ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the

20
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

SILENCE ERROR
BEEPS? NO

The current selection is

flashing.

21 i and! Press and release repeatedly. The R{f toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
error beep setting is displayed,
stop toggling.

22 ENTER Press and release. The R{f displays the

following screen:

INTERNAL COUPLER
ENABLED

The current selection is

flashing.

23 i and! Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between

ENABLED and BYPASSED.
When the desired compression
setting is displayed, stop
toggling.

24 ENTER Press and release. The R{f accepts the

programmed value and
displays the following screen:

FM DEVIATION
8.0 KHZ

The current selection is

flashing.

25 i and! Press and release. The Rtf scrolls through the

available choices for FM
Deviation: 5, 6.5, and 8.0.
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2·64. Procedure to Program Radio Configuration Parameters - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
26 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

FMSQUELCH
TONE

The current selection is

flashing.
27 i and J.. Press and release. The R/f toggles between
NOISE and TONE. When the
desired error beep setting is
displayed, stop toggling.
28 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

FMTRANSMIT
TONE: ON

The current selection is

flashing.
29 i and J.. Press and release. The R/T toggles between ON
and OFF. When the desired
error beep setting is displayed.
stop toggling.
30 ENTER Press and release. The R/T accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RECEIVER PREAMP
ENABLED

The current selection is

flashing.
31 i and J.. Press and release. The R/T toggles between
ENABLED and BYPASS.
When the desired error beep
setting is displayed. stop
toggling.

2·105
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-64. Procedure to Program Radio COnfiguration Parameters - COntinued

Step Control Action Observe
32 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RADIO PORfS
OPTIONS TIME

RADIO is flashing.
33 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

CFlG is flashing.

2-106
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.3.5.2 Programming Port COnfiguration

The remote port, the data port, and port communication protocol may be programmed.
The configuration parameters to be programmed for each port are identical (except where noted). The following
are port parameters which may be programmed:
a. ASYNC RATE - The ASYNC RATE defines the baud rate used to communicate with an external data
device via the asynchronous data port. The interface baud rate can be different than the over-the-air baud
rate, as defined by the MODEM BAUD RATE command. This allows a data terminal or personal
computer to be used as both the remote control unit and as a data message device.
NOTE
It is recommended that the 2400 bps setting be used for the
asynchronous interface. Long remote control cables (beyond 10
meters) limit the maximum speed of operation.
Available asynchronous rate selections in bits per second are 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and
9600.
b. ASYNC BITS - Defines the number of bits per character. The options are 7 or 8 bits.
c. ASYNC STOP BIT - The stop bits options are 1 or 2.
d. ASYNC PARITY - Available parity settings are ODD, EVEN, and NONE.
e. ASYNC FLOW CONTROL (XON/XOFF) - The flow control commands are DISABLE or ENABLE.
f. ASYNC ECHO - The ASYNC ECHO commands are ON and OFF.
g. TX SYNC CLOCK SOURCE (for data port only) - Defines the source of the synchronous clock signal
for the data port only. The selection is INTERNAL or EXTERNAL.
Use PROTOCOL to select the asynchronous port signal levels. This defmes asynchronous interface type. The
selections are RS-232 and MIL-188.
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-65 provides the procedure for programming
the remote port configuration. Table 2-66 provides the procedure for programming the data port configuration.
Table 2-67 provides the procedure to define protocol.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

2-107
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-65. Procedure to Program Port Configuration Parameters

Control Action Observe
Step
I f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
CFIG. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

CFIG is flashing.

2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

RADIO PORfS
OPTIONS TIME

RADIO is flashing.

3 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
PORTS. following screen:

RADIO PORfS
OPTIONS TIME

PORfS is flashing.

4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

REMOTE DATA
PROTOCOL

REMOTE is flashing.

5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

REM ASYNC RATE

2400

The current rate is flashing.

6 iand ,1. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
available rates. Available rates
are 75, ISO, 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, and 9600. When
the desired rate is displayed,
stop scrolling.

2-108
ED HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-65. Procedure to Program Port Configuration Parameters - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
7 ENTER Press and release. The R/T accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

REM DATA BITS

8

The current number of data

bits is flashing.
8 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The R/T toggles between 7
and 8. When the desired data
bit value is displayed, stop
scrolling.
9 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RMT STOP BITS

1

The current number of stop

bits is flashing.
10 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The R/T toggles between 1
and 2. When the desired stop
bit value is displayed, stop
toggling.
11 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RMT PARITY
NONE

The current parity selection is

flashing.
12 i and J.., or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
keypad available parity settings.
Available settings are ODD,
EVEN, and NONE. When the
desired parity setting is
displayed, stop scrolling.

2-109
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-65. Procedure to Program Port Configuration Parameters - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
13 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RMT XON/XOFF
DISABLE

The current selection is

flashing.
14 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between
ENABLE and DISABLE.
When the desired control
setting is displayed, stop
toggling.
15 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

RMT ASYNC ECHO

ON

The current selection is

flashing.
16 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between ON
and OFF. When the desired
echo setting is displayed, stop
toggling.
17 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

REMOTE DATA
PROTOCOL

REMOTE is flashing.

2-110
mJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-66. Procedure to Program Data Configuration Parameters

Step COntrol Action Observe
I ~ and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
CFIG. following screen:

CHAN FllL DATA

CAG KEYS SECUR

CAG is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

RADIO is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
PORTS. following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

PORTS is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rff displays the
following screen:

REMOTE DATA
PROTOCOL

REMOTE is flashing.
5 Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
DATA. following screen:

REMOTE DATA
PROTOCOL

DATA is flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rff displays the
following screen:

DAT ASYNC RATE

2400

The current asynchronous

baud rate is flashing.

2-111
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Continued
Table 2-66. Procedure to Program Data Configuration Parameters -
Control Action Observe
Step
7 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
available rates. Available rates
are 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200,
2400,4 800, and 9600. VVhen
the desired rate is displayed,
stop scrolling.

8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the

programmed value and
displays the following screen:

OAT DATA BITS

8

The current number of

asynchronous data bits is
flashing.

9 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
available data bit values.
Available values are 5, 6. 7,
and 8. When the desired data
bit value is displayed, stop
scrolling.

10 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the

programmed value and
displays the following screen:

OAT STOP BITS

1

The current number of

asynchronous stop bits is
flashing.

11 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between I

and 2. When the desired stop
bit value is displayed, stop
toggling.

12 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the

programmed value and
displays the following screen:

OAT PARITY
NONE

The current asynchronous

parity setting is flashing.

2·112
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-66. Procedure to Program Data Configuration Parameters - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
13 iand -l. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
available parity settings.
Available choices are ODD,
EVEN, and NONE. When the
desired parity setting is
displayed, stop scrolling.
14 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

DATA XON/XOFF
DISABLE

The current selection is

flashing.
15 iand -l. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between
ENABLE and DISABLE.
When the desired control
setting is displayed, stop
toggling.
16 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

OAT ASYNC ECHO

ON

The current selection is

flashing.
17 i and-l. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between ON
and OFF. When the desired
echo setting is displayed, stop
toggling.
18 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

TX DATA CLOCK
SOURCE INTERNAL

The current Data Oock

Synchronous Source is
flashing.

2-113
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
II HA RR IS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

- Continued
Table 2-66. Procedure to Program Data Configuration Parameters
Control Action Observe
Step
i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between
19
INTERNAL and
EXTERNAL. When the
desired echo setting is
displayed, stop toggling.

ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the

20
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

REMOTE DATA
PROTOCOL

DATA is flashing.

Table 2-67. Procedure to Define Protocol

Control Action Observe
Step
1 +- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
CFIG. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

CFIG is flashing.

ENTER Press and release. The R/I' displays the

2
following screen:

RADIO POlUS
OPTIONS TIME

RADIO is flashing.

+- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/I' displays the
3
PORTS. following screen:

RADIO POlUS
OPTIONS TIME

POIITS is flashing.

ENTER Press and release. The R{f displays the

4
following screen:

REMOTE DATA
PROTOCOL

REMOTE is flashing.

2·114
tlJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-67. Procedure to Define Protocol- Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
PROTOCOL. following screen:

REMOTE DATA
PROTOCOL

PROTOCOL is flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ASYNC PORT LEVEL

R5-232

The current asynchronous port

voltage level is flashing.
7 i and.L Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between
MIL-188 and RS-232. When
the desired protocol is
displayed, stop toggling.
8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

REMOTE DATA
PROTOCOL

PROTOCOL is flashing.
9 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

PORTS is flashing.

2-115
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.3.5.3 Programming Options COnfiguration

OPTIONS configuration is necessary to detennine which options are used with the system.
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-68 provides the procedure for options
configuration.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-68. Procedure to Define Radio Options Configuration
Step COntrol Action Observe
I ~ and-+ Press and release repeatedly to select The R!f displays the
CFIG. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

CFIG is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R!f displays the
following screen:

RADIO PORfS
OPTIONS TIME

RADIO is flashing.
3 ~ and-+ Press and release repeatedly to select The R!f displays the
OPTIONS. following screen:

RADIO PORfS
OPTIONS TIME

OPTIONS is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

RF-3230 I KW PA
INSTALLED NO

The current selection is

flashing.
5 i and,1. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
and NO. Select NO.

2·116
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2·68. Procedure to Define Radio Options Configuration - Continued

Step COntrol Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

PREPOSTSELECfOR
DISABLE

The current selection is

flashing.
7 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
available choices. Available
choices are ENABLE,
PRESELECf ONLY,
POSTSELECf ONLY, and
DISABLE. Select DISABLE.
8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

PREPOST ANTENNA
SINGLE RX/fX

The current selection is

flashing.
9 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rrr toggles between
SINGLE RXrrX and
SEPARATE TX & RX. Select
SINGLE RX/fX.
10 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

PREPOST SCANRATE
SLOW

The current scanrate is

flashing.
11 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
available choices. Available
choices are SLOW, FAST, and
BYPASS/FAST. Select
BYPASS/FAST.
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

OPTIONS is flashing.

2-117
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.3.5.4 Programming System Time

The TIME configuration sets the internal RT-1694 Receiver-Transminer real-time clock. The clock uses the
24-hour time fonnat (for example, 1:00 p.m. equals 13:(0).
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-69 provides the procedure to program system
time.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-69. Procedure to Program System Time
Step Control Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
CFIG. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

CFIG is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

RADIO is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f detennines which
TIME. options are currently being
used, and displays the
following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

TIME is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TIME 10:13:52
NEW 10:13:52

The new time field is flashing.

2-118
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-69. Procedure to Program System Time - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
5 Numeric Keypad Enter desired time. The R/f displays the
following screen:

TIME 10:13:52
NEW 12:05:00

12:05:00 is flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

RADIO PORTS
OPTIONS TIME

TIME is flashing.
7 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

CFIG is flashing.

2-119
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
ED HA RR IS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.6.3.6 Programming Encryption Keys

6l-0l Performance Option and
The KEYS configuration selection only appears on the display if the RF-51
.
RF-5170 Security Option are installed in the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter
time (KEY 1 through KEY6). An
Up to six encryption key variables may be stored in the transceiver at any given
has been entered into the radio, the
encryption key variable is a l2-digit numeric string. Once an encryption key
key may not be viewed.
s the procedure to add or modify an
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-70 provide
encryption key. Table 2-71 provides the procedure to delete an encryption key.

Table 2-70. Procedure to Add or Modify an Encryption Key

Control Action Observe
Step
Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
KEYS. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CAG KEYS SECUR

KEYS is flashing.

2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

ENCRYPTION KEY
TO CHANGE: KEY4

The encryption key to be

changed is flashing.

3 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
encryption key names. When
the desired encryption key is
displayed, stop scrolling.

4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the

programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANGE DELETE
[KEY4]

CHANGE is flashing.

5 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf accepts the
CHANGE (if necessary). programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANGE DELETE
[KEY4]

CHANGE is flashing.

2-120
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-70. Procedure to Add or Modify an Encryption Key - COntinued

Step Control Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The RIf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

ENTER NEW [KEY4]

0‫סס‬oo5022000

0‫סס‬oo5022000 is flashing.
7 Numeric Keypad Enter I to 12 digits for a key The RIf accepts the
variable t. programmed value and
displays the following screen:

ENTER NEW [KEY4]

0‫סס‬oo5024000

0‫סס‬oo5024000 is flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The RIf displays the
following screen:

ENCRYPTION KEY
TO CHANGE: KEY4

The encryption key which has

just been modified is flashing.
9 CLEAR Press and release. The RIf displays the
following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

KEYS is flashing.
t If an error is made during entry, press the CLEAR key to back space the cursor as necessary, and reenter
the number(s).

2-121
 mH AR RIS
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-71. Procedure to Delete an Encryption Key

Action Observe
Step Control
r and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
1
KEYS. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECU R

KEYS is flashing.

ENfER Press and release. The R/f displays the

2
following screen:

ENCRYPTION KEY
TO CHANGE: KEY4

KEY4 is flashing.

3 i and i, or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
keypad encryption key names. When
the desired encryption key is
displayed, stop scrolling.

4 ENfER Press and release. The R/T accepts the

programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANGE DELETE
[KEY4]

CHANGE is flashing.

rand~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/T accepts the
5
DELETE. programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANGE DELETE
[KEY4]

DELETE is flashing.

ENTER Press and release. The R/T accepts the

6
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

DELETE [KEY4]
NO

NO is flashing.

iand i Press and release repeatedly. The R/T toggles between YES
7
and NO. When YES is
displayed, stop toggling.

2-122
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2·71. Procedure to Delete an Encryption Key - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf deletes the selected
encryption key and displays
the following screen:

ENCRYPTION KEY
TO CHANGE: KEY4

The current key that has just

been deleted is flashing.
9 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

KEYS is flashing.

2-123
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.3.7 Programming security

SECUR programming prevents accidental alteration of RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter operation and program
information. It also allows an experienced radio operator to override the lockout feature and access all the radio
capabilities. After the radio is zeroized, or before it has been programmed, only the SECUR parameter appears on
the display.
Since locked-out items do not appear, they cannot be selected for change. This lockout method is invisible to the
operator. In order to alter program items that have been locked out, the radio operator needs to know the password
that was programmed into the radio.
2.6.3.7.1 Password Programming
NOTE
The default password is found on a card which is included with
this manual.
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-72 provides the procedure to enter a
password. Table 2-73 provides the procedure to select a new password.
Table 2·72. Procedure to Enter A Password
Step Control Action Observe
I f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R{f displays the
SECUR. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R{f displays the
following screen:

ENTER PASSWORD
0‫ס‬0ooooo

0‫ס‬0ooooo is flashing.
3 Numeric Keypad Enter password. The R{f displays the
following screent:

ENTER PASSWORD
27660094
t Pressing the PRGM key returns the display to the standard SSB screen. This allows an operator who
accidentally accesses this menu to return to normal operation.

2·124
;)JHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-72. Procedure to Enter A Password - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
OP_LOCK

PASSWORD is flashing.
S CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAN ALL DATA

CAG KEYS SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
Pressmg the PRGM key returns the display to the standard SSB screen. This allows an operator who
accidentally accesses this menu to return to normal operation.

Table 2-73. Procedure to Select A New Password

Step Control Action Observe
I f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
SECUR. following screen:

CHAN ALL DATA

CFlG KEYS SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
OP_LOCK

PASSWORD is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SET NEW PASSWORD

0‫סס‬oo00

0‫ס‬0ooooo is flashing.

2-125
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
11 HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-73. Procedure to Select A New Password - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
4 Numeric Keypad Enter desired password. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ENTER PASSWORD
27660094

27660094 is flashing.
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

27660094
PASSWORD OK? NO

NO is flashing.
6 i and-1. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.
7 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
OP_LOCK

PASSWORD is flashing.
8 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

SECUR is flashing.

2-126
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.3.7.2 Lockout Programming

Programming the lockout prevents programming of any (or all) of the main programming items (CHAN, FILL,
DATA, CFIG, and KEYS). If programming is not to be allowed for a menu item, it must be programmed for NO.
If programming is to be allowed for a menu item, it must be programmed for YES.

Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-74 provides the procedure to program lockout.
Table 2-74. Procedure to Program Lockout
Step Control Action Observe
1 t- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
SECUR. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFIG KEYS SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
OP_LOCK

PASSWORD is flashing.
3 t- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
LOCKOUT. following screen:

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

"CHAN" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.
5 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.

2-127
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-74. Procedure to Program Lockout - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
6
following screen:

"Fll...L" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

7 i and J. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.

ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

8
following screen:

"DATA" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

9 i and J. Press and release repeatedly. The R/T toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.

ENTER Press and release. The R/T displays the

10
following screen:

"CFIG" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

i and J. Press and release repeatedly. The RIT toggles between YES
11
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.

ENTER Press and release. The RIT displays the

12
following screen:

"KEYS" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

2-128
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2·74. Procedure to Program Lockout - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
13 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.
14 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.

2.6.3.7.3 Programming Operational Lockout

Programming operational lockout prevents an operator from selecting or changing an operational function. Each
operator-controllable parameter is reviewed.
When YES is selected, an operator may change that parameter. When NO is selected, the item does appear on the
front panel display, but is locked out; therefore, it is not available for change. A default selection can be made for
the data preset and encryption key.
Access the SSB programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.3.1. Table 2-75 provides the procedure to program
operational lockout.
Table 2-75. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout
Step Control Action Observe
1 +- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
SECUR. following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CAG KEYS SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
OP_LOCK

PASSWORD is flashing.
3 +- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rff displays the
OP_LOCK. following screen:

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
OP_LOCK

OP_LOCK is flashing.

2-129
 mJH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-75. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
Press and release. The R/f displays the
4 ENTER
following screen:

ALLOW MODULATION
CHANGE? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
S
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.

ENfER Press and release. The R/f displays the

6
following screen:

ALLOW DAT PRESET

CHANGE? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
7
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.

If NO is selected, proceed to
step 10.

ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

S
following screen:

DEFAULT DATA
PRESET: [DAT4]

The current default data preset

is flashing.

i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rff scrolls through the
9
data preset names. When the
desired default data preset is
displayed, stop toggling.

2-130
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-75. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ALLOW ENCR KEY

CHANGE? YES

The current selection is

flashing.
11 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.

If YES is selected, proceed to

step 14.
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

DEFAULT ENCR
KEY: [KEY1]

The current default encryption

key is flashing.
13 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
encryption keys. When the
desired default encryption key
is displayed, stop toggling.
14 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ALLOW CHANNEL 0
CHANGE? YES

YES is flashing.
15 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
and NO. When the desired
selection is displayed, stop
toggling.
16 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ALLOWBFO
OPERATION? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

2-131
 (II HA RR IS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2·75. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
17 i and J. desired
and NO. When
selection is displayed. stop
toggling.

Press and release. The Rtf displays the

18 ENTER
following screen:

VOICE OPER WITH

ENCR DATA ? CLR

The current selection is

flashing.

i and J. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between CLR
19
and AVS. When the desired
voice operation mode is
displayed. stop toggling.

ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

20
following screen:

PASSWORD LOCK OUT

OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.

21 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

CHAN FILL DATA

CFlG KEYS SECUR

SECUR is flashing.

2-132
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.6.4 ALE Programming

The following parameters must be programmed before operation in coordination with the other sites in the net If
the parameters are not coordinated, the system may function, but overall reliability is reduced.

• Channel Groups

• Self Addresses

• Individual Addresses

• Net Addresses

• Maximum Channels Scanned

• Maximum System Tune Time

For optimum performance, the following parameters should also be programmed:

• Radio Silence

• Listen Before Transmit

• Key To Call

• Link TImeout
Table 2-76 provides an index to the programming instructions for ALE operation. Figure 2-19 shows how ALE
programming relates to the LCD display. Figure 2-20 provides a summary of ALE programming.
Table 2-76. SSB/ALE Programming Index
Menu Radio Parameter to Be Reference
Selection Programmed Paragraph
CHAN_GRP Channel Group Parameters 2.6.4.2
ADDRESS Station Addresses 2.6.4.3
LQA LQA Frequency 2.6.4.4
CRG ALE Parameters 2.6.4.5
SECUR Security 2.6.4.6

2-133
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
IfMUN
HA RR IS
ICAT IONS
RF COM
OPERATION

CHANNEL GROUP ADDRESS

- Add Channel to Group - Add Addresses
- Delete Channel from Group - Review Addresses
- Review Channel Group - Delete Address

rCH, r FAEO_, ~

CHAN GRP ADDRESS

LQA -CFIG SECUR

- Maximum Channels Scanned

- Usten-Before-Transmit
- Key-to-Call
- Maximum System Tune lime
- Radio Silence
- Link limeout - Enter Password
- Link to ANY CALLS - Programming Lockout
- Program LOA Events - Link to ALL CALLS - Operational Lockout
- Review LOA Events - Automatic Message Display (AMD)
- Delete LOA Event
MNPK..{)53

Figure 2-19. ALE Programming Selections

2-134
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

SUMMARY - ALE Programming

• Enter Password
• Programming Lockout
- Channel Group
- Address
-LQA
- Configuration
• Operational Lockout

--=-- Figure 2-20. ALE Programming Summary

5000E - 067

2-135
 ;JH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.6.4.1 Accessing ALE Programming Menu

Table 2-77 provides the procedure to access the ALE Programming Menu.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-71. Procedure to Access the ALE Programming Menu
Control Action Observe
Step
I Function Switch Rotate clockwise or counterclockwise The R/f displays the
to the ALE position. following screen:

* INITIALIZING *
* * * * WAIT * * * *

followed by:

RlO*SCAN*
DATS KEY3

2 PRGM Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

2.6.4.2 Programming Channel Group

by first selecting a channel group.
This parameter allows channels to be assigned to channel groups. This is done
to ten channe l groups (0 through 9), each
Individual channels can then be added to or deleted from the group. Up
containing up to 20 channels, may be programmed.
s the procedure to add a channel to
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1. Table 2-78 provide
channel group. Table 2-80 provides
a channel group. Table 2-79 provides the procedure to delete a channel from a
the procedure to review a channel group.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

2-136
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-78. Procedure to Add a Channel to a Channel Group

Step Control Action Observe
1 f- and--+ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
CHAKGRP. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CHAN_GRP is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ENTER CHANNEL
GROUP? 8

The current channel group is

flashing.
3 i and ,1., or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
keypad available channel groups.
When the desired channel
group is displayed, stop
scrolling.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8:
ADD CHANNEL

ADD is flashing.
5 i and ,1. Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f scrolls through the
ADD. available selections. Available
selections are ADD,
REVIEW, and DELETE.
When the desired selection is
displayed, stop scrolling.
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
ADD CHANNEL? - -

- - is flashing.

2-137
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-78. Procedure to Add a Channel to a Channel Group - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
7 i and .1, or numeric Enter desired channel. Channel The Rtf displays the
keypad numbers less than ten should be following screen:
entered with a leading zero.
CHANNEL GROUP 8:
ADD CHANNEL? 45

45 is flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
ADD CHANNEL? --

- - is flashing.

To enter an additional
channel, return to step 7.

To exit the menu, proceed to

step to.
9 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8:
ADD CHANNEL

ADD is flashing.
to CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ENTER CHANNEL
GROUP? 8

8 is flashing.
11 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAKGRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CHAN_GRP is flashing.

2-138
ED HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-79. Procedure to Delete a Channel From a Channel Group

Step Control Action Observe
I f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
CHAKGRP. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CHAN_GRP is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ENTER CHANNEL
GROUP: 8

The current channel group is

flashing.
3 i and J.., or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
keypad available channel groups.
When the desired channel
group is displayed, stop
scrolling.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
ADD CHANNEL

ADD is flashing.
5 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f scrolls through ADD,
DELETE. DELETE, and REVIEW.
When DELETE is displayed,
stop scrolling.
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
DEL CHANNEL: 03

The current selection is

flashing.

2-139
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·79. Procedure to Delete a Channel From a Channel Group - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
7 i and J.., Numeric Keypad Enter desired channel group. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
DEL CHANNEL: 45

45 is flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
DEL CHANNEL? 04

The channel number to be

deleted is flashing.
9 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 0:
DELETE CHANNEL

DELETE is flashing.
10 CLEAR Press and release. The R{f displays the
following screen:

ENTER CHANNEL
GROUP: 8

The current channel group is

flashing.
11 CLEAR Press and release. The R{f displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CHAN_GRP is flashing.

2-140
ED HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-80. Procedure to Review a Channel Group

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
CHAKGRP. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CHAN_GRP is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ENTER CHANNEL
GROUP: 8

The current channel group is

flashing.
3 i and J." or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
keypad available channel groups.
When the desired channel
group is displayed, stop
scrolling.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
ADD CHANNEL

ADD is flashing.
5 iand J., Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf scrolls through ADD,
REVIEW. DELETE, and REVIEW.
When REVIEW is displayed,
stop scrolling.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
CHANNEL LIST: 00

2-141
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-80. Procedure to Review a Channel Group - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
iand-l -, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f scrolls through the
7
channel list.

CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the

8
following screen:

CHANNEL GROUP 8
REVIEW CHANNEL

CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the

9
following screen:

ENTER CHANNEL
GROUP: 8

10 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CHAN_GRP is flashing.

2-142
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.4.3 Programming Addresses

Address parameters allow the user to add, review, or delete self, individual, and net addresses. ALE allows up to
20 self addresses, 200 individual addresses, and 20 net addresses. Table 2-81 provides the procedure to add a self
address. Table 2-82 provides the procedure to add an individual address. Table 2-83 provides the procedure to add
a net address.
NOTE
A default self address of one to three characters must be
programmed before ALE can operate.
2.6.4.3.1 Add a self Address
The self address consists of the name of the address and channel group. Up to 20 self addresses can be
programmed into the radio.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2·81. Procedure to Add a Self Address
Step Control Action Observe
1 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
ADDRESS. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

ADD is flashing.
3 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
ADD (if necessary). following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

ADD is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

SELF is flashing.

2-143
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
mHARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-81. Procedure to Add a Self Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
SELF (if necessary). following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

SELF is flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SELF ADDRESS?
--------
________ is flashing.

When displaying an ALE

address, any unused character
positions will be filled in with
an underscore.
7 Numeric Keypad Enter desired address. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SELF ADDRESS?
SELFI ----

The current selection is

flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SELFI ----
CHANNEL GROUP?

The current selection is

flashing.

2-144
t)JHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-81. Procedure to Add a Self Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
9 i and -1.., or numeric Enter desired channel group. If a The Rtf displays the
keypad mistake is made during address following screen:
programming, the address must be
deleted, then re-entered. SELFI - - - -
CHANNEL GROUP? 9

9 is flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

SELF is flashing.
11 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:
-
ADD REVIEW
DELETE
12 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

2-145
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.4.3.2 Add an Individual Address

The INDIVIDUAL display prompts entry of up to 200 individual addresses (limited to 15 alphanumeric
characters). An individual address consists of the name of the station address, a channel group, and a previously
programmed self address called the associated self.

Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1.

Table 2-82. Procedure to Program an Individual Address

Step Control Action Observe
1 +- and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
ADDRESS. following screen:

CHAKGRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CHAKGRP is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

SELF is flashing.
3 +- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
INDIVIDUAL. following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

INDIVIDUAL is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

INDIVIDUAL ADDR?

________ is flashing.

5 Numeric Keypad Enter desired address. The R{f displays the

following screen:

INDIVIDUAL ADDR?
BASE _

The new address (BASE) is

flashing.

2-146
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-82. Procedure to Program an Individual Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

BASE ----
CHANNEL GROUP? -
- is flashing.
7 i and -1-, or numeric Enter desired channel group. The Rtf displays the
keypad following screen:

BASE --------
CHANNEL GROUP? 9

The desired channel group is

flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ASSOCIATED SELF!
-----------
-----------
is flashing.
9 i and -1-, or numeric Enter desired associated self address. The R/f displays the
keypad following screen:

ASSOCIATED SELF!
SELF2 --------

The desired associated self

address is flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

INDIVIDUAL is flashing.

2-147
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.4.3.3 Add a Net Address

The NET display allows entry of up to 20 NET addresses (limited to 15 alphanumeric characters) that consist of
the name of the text address, a previously programmed self address called the associated self, and a list of up to
30 net members.

Net members are previously programmed addresses. The addresses can be self or individual addresses; however,
the only self address that can be a member of a net must be the associated self address of the net.

Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1.

NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-83. Procedure to Add a Net Address

Step Control Action Observe
I ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
ADDRESS (if necessary). following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

ADD is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
ADD (if necessary). following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

ADD is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

SELF is flashing.

2-148
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-83. Procedure to Add a Net Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 +- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
NET (if necessary). following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

NET is flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NET ADDRESS?
---------------
The row of underscores is
flashing. When displaying an
ALE address, any unused
character positions will be
filled in with an underscore.
7 i and .1, or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf displays the
keypad following screen:

NET ADDRESS?
NET I -----------

The desired net address is

flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NET1
-----------
CHANNEL GROUP? -

The current channel group is

flashing.
9 i and .1, or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The R/f displays the
keypad following screen:

NET1
-----------
CHANNEL GROUP? 5

The current channel group is

flashing.

2-149
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-83. Procedure to Add a Net Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ASSOCIATED SELF?
---------------
The current associated self
address is flashing.
11 t and J" or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf displays the
keypad following screen:
Use an existing self address as
programmed in Paragraph 2.6.4.3.1. ASSOCIATED SELF?
SELF3

The desired associated self

address is displayed.
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD MEMBER 01
---------------
The row of underscores is
flashing.

2-150
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-83. Procedure to Add a Net Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
13 i and J.., or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf displays the
keypad following screen:
Use an existing individual address or
self address as programmed in ADD MEMBER 01
Paragraph 2.6.4.3.2. TACl ------------

Net member order must be the same The desired selection is

for all stations in a net; i.e. the same flashing.
number of members must be
programmed into each Rtf in exactly
the same order and with the same
number of characters in each net
member station address (call sign).
The associated self address is also a
member of the net. Failure to maintain
this order among net members results
in net call linking failures.
14 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SELF INDIVIDUAL
NET

NET is flashing.

2-151
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.4.3.4 Reviewing a Self Address

Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1. Table 2-84 provides the procedure to review a self
address.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-84. Procedure to Review a Self Address
Step COntrol Action Observe
I ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rff displays the
ADDRESS. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rff displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

ADD is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rff displays the
REVIEW. following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rff displays the
following screen:

REVIEW ADDRESS
TYPE? SELF

SELF is flashing.

2-152
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-84. Procedure to Review a self Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf scrolls through the
SELF is displayed (if necessary). list of address types. Available
choices are SELF,
INDIVIDUAL, and NET.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SELF ADDRESS?
--------------
The row of underscores is
flashing.
7 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
list of programmed self
addresses, and displays the
following screen:

SELF ADDRESS?
SELFl --------

A self address is flashing.

8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the programmed
channel group for the self
address entered.

SELFI --------
CHANNEL GROUP: 7

The current channel group is

flashing.
9 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf returns to the
following screen:

REVIEW ADDRESS
TYPE? SELF

SELF is flashing.

2-153
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-84. Procedure to Review a Self Address - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
10 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.
11 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.

2-154
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.6.4.3.5 Reviewing an Individual Address

Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1. Table 2-85 provides the procedure to review an
individual address.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-85. Procedure to Review an Individual Address
Step Control Action Observe
I t- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
ADDRESS. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

ADD is flashing.
3 t- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
REVIEW. following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

REVIEW ADDRESS
TYPE? SELF

SELF is flashing.
S i and J- Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf scrolls through the
INDIVIDUAL is displayed (if list of address types. Available
necessary). address types are SELF,
INDIVIDUAL, and NET.

2-155
 ;J)H AR RlS
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

ued
Table 2-85. Procedure to Review an Individual Address - Contin
Action Observe
Step Control
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS?
---- ---- ---- ---
The row of underscores is
flashing.

7 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
list of individual addresses,
and displays the following
screen:

INDIVIDUAL ADDRESS?
1136 ---- ----

An individual address is
flashing.

8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf accepts the

programmed value and
displays the programmed
channel group for the
individual address entered.

1136 ---- ----

CHANNEL GROUP: 7

The current channel group is

flashing.

9 ENTER Press and release. The R/T displays the

associated self address for the
individual address just
entered.

ASSOCIATED SELF:
SELFI ---- ----

The current associated self

address is flashing.

2·156
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-85. Procedure to Review an Individual Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf returns to the
following screen:

REVIEW ADDRESS
TYPE? INDIVIDUAL

INDIVIDUAL is flashing.
11 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.
12 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CAG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.

2-157
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.4.3.6 Reviewing a Net Address

The NET display flashes to prompt viewing of NET addresses. The net address consists of the name of the
address, a channel group, a previously programmed self address called the associated self, and a list of up to 30
net members.
Net member order must be the same for all stations in a net. That is, the same number of members must be
programmed into each R/f in exactly the same order and with the same number of characters in each net member
station address (call sign). Failure to maintain this order among net members results in net call linking failures.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1. Table 2-86 provides the procedure to review a net
address.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-86. Procedure to Review a Net Address
Step COntrol Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
ADDRESS. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

ADD is flashing.
3 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
REVIEW. following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' displays the
following screen:

REVIEW ADDRESS
TYPE? SELF

SELF is flashing.
5 i and .L Press and release repeatedly until NET The R/I' scrolls through the
is displayed (if necessary). list of address types. Available
choices are SELF,
INDIVIDUAL, and NET.

2-158
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-86. Procedure to Review a Net Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The RIf displays the
following screen:

NET ADDRESS?

The row of underscores is

flashing.
7 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The RIf scrolls through the
list of net addresses, and
displays the following screen:

NET ADDRESS?
1746 _

A net address is flashing.

8 ENTER Press and release. The RIf accepts the
programmed value and
displays the programmed
channel group for the net
address entered.
1746 _
CHANNEL GROUP: 7

The current channel group is

flashing.
9 ENTER Press and release. The RIf displays the
associated self address for the
net address just entered.

ASSOCIATED SELF:
SELF1 _

SELFI is flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The RIf displays the net
members, displaying the
following screen:

NET MEMBER 01
UNITl _

UNITl is flashing.

2-159
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-86. Procedure to Review a Net Address - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
11 t and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The R/I' scrolls through the
list of net members,
displaying the following
screen:

NET MEMBER 01
UNIT1 --------

An individual or self address

is flashing.
12 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' returns to the
following screen:

REVIEW ADDRESS
TYPE? NET

NET is flashing.
13 CLEAR Press and release. The R/I' returns to the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.
14 CLEAR Press and release. The R/I' displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.

2-160
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.6.4.3.7 Deleting an Address

Exercise caution when removing addresses. At least one self address (one to three characters) and one individual
address must be programmed for ALE operation.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1. Table 2-87 provides the procedure to delete an
address.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-87. Procedure to Delete An Address

Step Control Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
ADDRESS. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CHAN_GRP is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

SELF is flashing.
3 Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
DELETE. following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

DELETE is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

DELETE ADDRESS?

The row of underscores is

flashing.
5 i and J" or numeric Enter desired address if different from The Rtf displays the
keypad that displayed. following screen:

DELETE ADDRESS?
1136 _

1136 is flashing.

2·161
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-87. Procedure to Delete An Address - Continued

Step COntrol Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f deletes the desired
address and displays the
following screen:

ADD REVIEW
DELETE

DELETE is flashing.
7 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

ADDRESS is flashing.

2-162
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.6.4.4 Programming LQA Events

When programming LQA events, an event may be PROGRAMmed, REVIEWed, or DELETEd. Two types of
LQAs are available:
a. EXCHANGE - An exchange LQA is one where there is two-way communication between the radio
executing and the radio receiving the LQA. After the receiving radio gets information about the sending
radio's signal, the receiving radio keys so that the initiating radio can get signal information about the
receiving radio. Only net and individual addresses are used in exchange LQAs. The following are
parameters which may be programmed for an Exchange LQA:
1. Repeat Interval- Enter the repeat interval in 24-hour format. Enter 00:00 to send the LQA only once
or press ENTER without entering an interval time.
2. Start TIme - Enter the start time in 24-hour format Press ENTER without changing current time to
execute the LQA immediately. Current time is displayed in brackets.
After leaving program operation, TImed LQA (TLQA) displays in the upper right comer of the operation
screen while scanning if an LQA is programmed to execute later.
b. SOUND - A sound LQA is a one-way transmission. The radio executing the sound sends out its signal
for all other radios to gather score information about how well they are receiving the signal. The receiving
radios do not return any information. Only self-addresses are used during sound LQAs. The following are
parameters which may be programmed for a sound LQA:
1. Repeat Interval- Enter the repeat interval in 24-hour format. Enter 00:00 to send the LQA only once
or press ENTER without entering an interval time.
2. Start TIme - Enter the start time in 24-hour format. Press ENTER without changing current time to
execute the LQA immediately. Current time is displayed in brackets.
2.6.4.4.1 Programming Exchange LOA Events
Table 2-88 provides instructions for programming Exchange LQA events.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

2-163
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-88. Procedure to Program an Exchange LQA

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 f-and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
LQA. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

LQA is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
3 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
PROGRAM (if necessary). following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LQATYPE?
EXCHANGE SOUND

EXCHANGE is flashing.
5 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
EXCHANGE (if necessary). following screen:

LQATYPE?
EXCHANGE SOUND

EXCHANGE is flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

EXCHANGE WITH?

The row of underscores is

flashing.

2-164
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-88. Procedure to Program an Exchange LOA - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
7 i and J.., or numeric Enter desired address if different from The Rtf displays the
keypad that displayed. following screen:

EXCHANGE WITH?
lNETI ----------

lNETI is flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

EXCHANGE REPEAT
INTERVAL? ----
- -:- - is flashing.
9 Numeric Keypad Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

EXCHANGE REPEAT
INTERVAL? 02:00

The desired exchange repeat

interval is flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

EXCHANGE START
TIME? 07:19

The current radio time is

flashing.
11 Numeric Keypad Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

EXCHANGE STARr
TIME? 12:30

The desired exchange start

time is flashing.

2-165
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
OPERATION

Table 2-88. Procedure to Program an Exchange LQA - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
13 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

LQA is flashing.

2-166
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.4.4.2 Programming Sound LOA Events

Table 2-89 provides instructions for programming Sound LQA events.

Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1.

NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-89. Procedure to Program a Sound LOA Event

Step Control Action Observe
I ~and4 Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
LQA. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

LQA is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
3 ~and4 Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
PROGRAM (if necessary). following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LQA TYPE?
EXCHANGE SOUND

EXCHANGE is flashing.
S ~and4 Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
SOUND (if necessary). following screen:

LQA TYPE?
EXCHANGE SOUND

SOUND is flashing.

2-167
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·89. Procedure to Program a Sound LOA Event - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SOUND USING?

The row of underscores is

flashing.
7 i and J.., or numeric Enter desired self address if different The Rtf displays the
keypad from that displayed. following screen:

SOUND USING?
SELF1 _

The desired self address is

flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SOUND REPEAT
INTERVAL? ----

- -:- - is flashing.
9 Numeric Keypad Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SOUND REPEAT
INTERVAL? 01:30

The desired repeat interval

time is flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SOUND START
TIME? 07:19

The current radio time is

flashing.

2-168
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-89. Procedure to Program a Sound LQA Event - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
11 Numeric Keypad Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

SOUND START
TIME? 12:30

The desired start time is

flashing.
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
13 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CRG SECUR

LQA is flashing.

2-169
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IjHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.4.4.3 Reviewing LOA Events

Table 2-90 provides instructions for reviewing LQA events.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2·90. Procedure to Review LOA Events

Step Control Action Observe
1 f-and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
LQA. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

LQA is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
3 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
REVIEW (if necessary). following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

REVIEW is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

VIEWLQA?
--------------
The row of underscores is
flashing.

2-170
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-90. Procedure to Review LOA Events - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 t and .1, or numeric Enter desired address if different from The R/f displays the
keypad that displayed. following screen:

VIEWLQA?
1136 _

The desired target address is

flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

EXCHANGE REPEAT
INTERVAL: 01:30

The exchange or sound repeat

interval is flashing.
7 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

EXCHANGE START
TIME: 20:00

The scheduled stan time for

the next LQA event is
flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
9 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CAG SECUR

LQA is flashing.

2·171
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.4.4.4 Deleting an LQA Event

Table 2-91 provides the procedure to delete an LQA Event.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-91. Procedure to Delete An LQA Event

Step Control Action Observe
1 f- and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
LQA. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

LQA is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

PROGRAM is flashing.
3 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
DELETE (if necessary). following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

DELETE is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

DELETELQA?
--------------
The row of underscores is
flashing.

2-172
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-91. Procedure to Delete An LQA Event - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 i and t, or numeric Enter desired address if different from The R/f displays the
keypad that displayed. following screen:

DELETELQA?
1121 _

The target address whose

LQA is to be deleted is
flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

PROGRAM REVIEW
DELETE

DELETE is flashing.
7 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

CHAKGRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

LQA is flashing.

2-173
 ;J)H AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.6.4.5 Programming Configuration

Configuration parameters consist of the following:
the calling station how
a. Maximum Channels To Scan - The MAX CHANNELS TO SCAN feature tells
and still receive the
long to call so that the receiving stations have a chance to complete a scan cycle
calls and LQAs. Setting
signal. The larger the number of channels scanned, the longer it takes to perform
decreases the probability
the number smaller than the number of channels scanned by the target stations
of linking with called stations. From 1 to 100 channels can be scanne d.
using that channel for
b. Listen-Before-Transmit - This feature listens for ALE signals on a channel before
next best channel and listens
an LQA or call. If ALE signals are on the charmel, the radio advances to the
again, continuing until it finds a charmel where no ALE signals are present.
hone. In key-to-call
c. Key to Call- KEY TO CALL allows a call to be made by keying the microp
on is available only when
operation, the Rtf repeats a call to the last address called. Key-to-call operati
the radio is scanning.
the length of time the
d. Maximum System Tune Time - The MAX SYSTEM TUNE TIME feature sets
amplifi er, radio, and other
calling station waits for the target station to tune its antenna coupler, power
seconds.
tunable items, and respond to the call. The allowable range is from 01 to 60
e to an incoming call or
e. Radio Silence - RADIO SILENCE prevents ALE from transmitting in respons
silence avoids unnecessary interference
LQA request. Automatic LQA initiation is also inhibited. Radio
or detection.
f. Link Timeout - LINK TIMEOUT is a feature that does either of the following:
not received ALE
• Returns the Rtf from the linked mode to scan if it has not been keyed or has
signals for a period of time (from 1 to 60 minutes).

• Allows the Rtf to remain linked indefinitely.

from responding to ANY
g. Link to ANY CALLS - LINK TO ANY CALLS enables or disables the Rtf
CALLS. If NO is selected, the R!f does not respond to an ANY CALL.
from responding to ALL
h. Link to ALL CALLS - LINK TO ALL CALLS enables or disables the Rtf
an ALL CALL.
CALLS. If NO is selected, the Rtf does not stop scanning to respond to
i. Automatic Message Display - Allows the operator to send and receive AMDs.
Table 2-92 provides the procedure to program ALE configuration.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

2·174
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2·92. Procedure to Program ALE Configuration

Step COntrol Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The RIf displays the
CFIG. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CFIG is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The RIf displays the
following screen:

MAX CHANNELS TO
SCAN? 012

The current value is flashing.

3 i and J.., or numeric Enter desired maximum number of The RIf displays the
keypad channels if different from that following screen:
displayed.
MAX CHANNELS TO
SCAN? 025

The desired maximum

number of channels to scan is
flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The RIf displays the
following screen:

LISTEN BEFORE
TRANSMIT: ON

The current setting is flashing.

5 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The RIf toggles between ON
and OFF and displays the
following screen:

LISTEN BEFORE
TRANSMIT: ON

The desired setting is flashing.

6 ENTER Press and release. The RIf displays the
following screen:

KEY TO CALL
OFF

The current setting is flashing.

2-175
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
II HA RR IS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-92. Procedure to Program ALE Configuration - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
i and ,I, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between ON
7
and OFF and displays the
following screen:

KEY TO CALL
OFF

The desired setting is flashing.

ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

8
following screen:

MAX SYSTEM TUNE

TIME: 3 SECONDS

The current maximum tune

time of the target station is
flashing.

i and ,1" or numeric Enter desired maximum tune time for The R/f displays the
9
keypad the target station if different from that following screen:
displayed.
MAX SYSTEM TUNE
TIME: 3 SECONDS

The desired maximum tune

time of the target station is
flashing.

10 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

RADIO SILENCE
OFF

The current setting is flashing.

11 i and ,I, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between OFF
and ON and displays the
following screen:

RADIO SILENCE
OFF

The current setting is flashing.

2-176
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-92. Procedure to Program ALE COnfiguration - COntinued

Step Control Action Observe
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LINK TIMEOUT
OFF

The current setting is flashing.

13 i and! Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between ON
and OFF, and displays the
following screen:

LINK TIMEOUT
OFF

The desired setting is flashing.

If OFF is selected, skip to step
16.
14 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LINK TIMEOUT
05 MINUTES

The current link timeout time

is flashing.
15 i and !, or numeric Enter desired timeout value if The Rtf displays the
keypad different from that displayed. following screen:

LINK TIMEOUT
05 MINUTES

The desired link timeout time

is flashing.
16 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LINK TO
"ANY CALLS"? YES

The current setting is flashing.

2·1n
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·92. Procedure to Program ALE Configuration - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
17 iandJ.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

LINK TO
"ANY CALLS"? YES

The desired setting is flashing.

18 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LINK TO
"ALL CALLS"? YES

The current setting is flashing.

19 iandJ.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

LINK TO
"ALL CALLS"? YES

The desired setting is flashing.

20 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

AUTO DISPLAY
MESSAGES? YES

The current setting is

displayed.
21 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

AUTO DISPLAY
MESSAGES? YES

The desired setting is flashing.

22 ENTER Press and release. The R{f displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

CFIG is flashing.

2-178
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.4.6 Programming Security

The SECUR configuration prevents accidental alteration of ALE operation and program infonnation. At the same
time, it allows an experienced radio operator to override the lockout feature and access all the program items. If
any of the items are locked-out, they will not appear on the display. From the ALE programming menu, the
operator is able to enter a password, program lockout, and program operational lockout.
2.6.4.6.1 Entering a Password
The password programmed into the radio must first be entered in order to access the security function and change
the programming structure. A password can only be programmed into the R/f in SSB mode (refer to Paragraph
2.6.3.7.1). That password is effective in allowing or disallowing operation and programming in all modes of
operation. If the password has been successfully entered in SSB mode by the operator (and the R/f has not been
turned off), it is not required a second time when entering security programming in ALE mode.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1. Table 2-93 provides the procedure to enter a password
in ALE mode.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-93. Procedure to Enter a Password
Step Control Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
SECUR (if necessary). following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CRG SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ENTER PASSWORD
0‫ס‬0ooooo

The row of zeros is flashing.

3 Numeric Keypad Enter password. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ENTER PASSWORD
27660094

The password is flashing. t

2-179
 IJH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-93. Procedure to Enter a Password - COntinued

Control Action Observe
Step
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/T displays the
following screen:

LOCKOUT OP..LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.

S CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

CHAN_ORP ADDRESS
LQA CFIO SECUR

SECUR is flashing.

t Pressing the PROM key returns the display to the standard SSB screen.
This allows an operator who
accidentally accesses this menu to return to nonnal operation.

2-180
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.4.6.2 Lockout Programming

Programming the lockout prevents programming of any (or all) of the main programming items (ADDRESS,
CHAN_GRP, DLQA, and CFIG). If programming is not to be allowed for a menu item, it must be programmed
for NO. If programming is to be allowed for a menu item, it must be programmed for YES.
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1. Table 2-94 provides the procedure to program
lockout.
Table 2·94. Procedure to Program Lockout
Step COntrol Action Observe
1 t- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R{f displays the
SECUR (if necessary). following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA eRG SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The R{f displays the
following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.
3 ENTER Press and release. The R{f displays the
following screen:

"CHAN_GRP" PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The current setting is flashing.

4 i and J. Press and release repeatedly. The R{f toggles between YES
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

"CHAN_GRP" PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The desired setting is flashing.

2·181
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2·94. Procedure to Program Lockout - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
5 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

"ADDRESS" PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The current setting is flashing.

6 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

"ADDRESS" PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The desired setting is flashing.

7 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

"LQA" PROG
ALLOWED? NO

The current setting is flashing.

S i and.1 Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

"LQA" PROG
ALLOWED? NO

The desired setting is flashing.

9 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

"CFIG" PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The current setting is flashing.

2-182
mJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-94. Procedure to Program Lockout - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
10 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

"CFIG" PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The desired setting is flashing.

11 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.
12 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

SECUR is flashing.

2-183
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.6.4.6.3 Programming Operational Lockout

g an operational function. Each
Programming operational lockout prevents an operator from selecting or changin
operator-controllable parameter is reviewed.
d, the item does appear on the
When YES is selected, an operator may change that parameter. When NO is selecte
default selection can be made for
from panel display, but is locked out; therefore, it is not available for change. A
the data preset and encryption key.
s the procedure to program
Access the ALE programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.4.1. Table 2-95 proVide
operational lockout.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-95. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout
Control Action Observe
Step
1 f- and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
SECUR. following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

SECUR is flashing.

2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.

3 f-and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
OP_LOCK. following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

OP_LOCK is flashing.

2-184
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-95. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ALLOW DAT PRESET

CHANGE? NO

The current setting is flashing.

5 i andJ.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

ALLOW DAT PRESET

CHANGE? NO

The desired setting is flashing.

If YES is selected, proceed to

step 8.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

DEFAULT DATA
PRESET: 9 [OFF]

The current default data preset

is flashing.
7 i and J.. or numeric Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
keypad programmed data preset
names, and displays the
following screen:

DEFAULT DATA
PRESET: 9 [OFF]

The desired default data preset

is flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ALLOW ENC PRESET

CHANGE? NO

The current setting is flashing.

2·185
 IJH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-95. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
i and.1 Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
9
and NO, and displays the
following screen:

ALLOW ENC PRESET

CHANGE? NO

The desired setting is flashing.

If YES is selected, proceed to

step 12.

ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

10
following screen:

DEFAULT ENCR
KEY: KEY1

The current default encryption

key is flashing.

i and.1 Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
11
programmed encryption keys
and displays the following
screen:

DEFAULT ENCR
KEY: KEY1

The desired default encryption

key is flashing.

12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

OP_LOCK is flashing.

CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the

13
following screen:

CHAN_GRP ADDRESS
LQA CFIG SECUR

SECUR is flashing.

2·186
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.6.5 Frequency Hopping Programming

The frequency hopping option provides frequency hopping in bands up to 2 MHz wide. The hopping bandwidth is
using a predetermined List of Frequencies (LIST), a center frequency (narrowband), or a frequency range
(wideband). In the ECCM mode, transmission of digital voice data up to 300 bps with error correction is
supported.
NOTE

Before programming frequency hopping parameters, verify that

the bandwidth of all antenna systems within a net are able to
support the programmed net bandwidth.
The following parameters may be programmed:

• Net
• Exclusion Bands

• Data Presets

• Transmit Power

• Security
Table 2-96 provides an index to the programming instructions for frequency hopping. Figure 2-21 shows how
frequency hopping programming relates to the LCD display. Figure 2-22 provides a summary of frequency
hopping programming.
Table 2-96. Frequency Hopping Programming Index
Menu Radio Parameter to Be Reference
Selection Programmed Paragraph
NET Net Parameters 2.6.5.2
EXCLUDE Exclusion Bands 2.6.5.3
DATA Data Presets 2.6.5.4
POWER Transmit Power 2.6.5.5
SECUR Security 2.6.5.6

2-187
 I) HA RR IS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.6.5.1 Accessing Frequency Hopping Menu

Menu.
Table 2-97 provides the procedure to access the Frequency Hopping Programming
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
g Menu
Table 2-97. Procedure to Access the Frequency Hopping Programmin
Control Action Observe
Step
I Function Switch Rotate clockwise or counterclockwise The Rtf displays the
to the HOP position. following screen:

R22-N O SYNC
FAX I KEY2

2 PRGM Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2-188
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

ALE

=fi= •
OI'P •

NET PARAMETERS EXCLUSION BANDS DATA PRESETS

- Enter Hop Net - Add Exclusion Band - Preset Number
- Narrowband Nets - Delete Exclusion Band -Interface
- Wideband Nets - Modem Baud Rate
- Frequency List - Preset Name
- Delete Hop Net

- Enter Password
- Programming Lockout
- Operational Lockout

MNPK-{)54

Figure 2·21. Frequency Hopping Programming Selections

2-189
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

SUMMARY - Frequency Hopping Programming

SOOOE -070

Figure 2·22. Frequency Hopping Programming Summary

2-190
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.5.2 Programming Net Parameters

Nets are numbered 0, 1,2 ... 9, with Net 0 referring to the M position on the CHANNEL switch. It is important
to remember that all radios in a net must have the same:

• Net Identification Number

• Frequency Hop Type

• Frequency Range

• Exclusion Bands
The following Net parameters may be programmed:
a. Narrowband - When an antenna coupler is in use, only narrowband frequency hopping nets may be used.
The selection of the center frequency must always be in multiples of 5 kHz, with the minimum allowable
frequency of 1.650 MHz and a maximum allowable frequency of 29.995 MHz.
b. Wideband - The hopping bandwidth must be at least 140 kHz wide. If exclusion bands affect any part of
the hopping bandwidth, it may be necessary to make the hopping bandwidth wider since the usable
frequency range must be adequate to allow for 15 frequencies at 10 kHz spacing.
c. List - Provides a specific list of frequencies to be used during frequency hopping. List frequencies must
be in multiples of 5 kHz. No frequency may be less than 1.650 MHz or greater than 29.995 MHz. The
difference between the lowest and highest frequencies cannot be more than 2.0 MHz.
Frequencies may be added to, or removed from, the list of frequencies. The order in which frequencies
are entered is not important since they are sorted when they are stored. Duplicate frequencies are
automatically removed from the list. The minimum number of frequencies that can be added is 15, while
the maximum number is 99.
d. Net Identification Numbers - NET 10 is an eight-digit numeric code that determines the pseudorandom
frequency hopping patterns for the net. All radios on a net must have the same NET 10 number.
2.6.5.2.1 Programming Narrowband Operation
Access the Frequency Hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table 2-98 provides the procedure to
program a Net for narrowband operation.

2-191
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

tion
Table 2-98. Procedure to Program a Net for Narrowband Opera
COntrol Action Obser ve
Step
1 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
NET (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The current selection is

flashing.

3 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf scrolls through the
programmed hop nets, and
displays the following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The desired hop net to

view/change is flashing.

4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

The current selection is

flashing.

and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
5 f-
NARROW (if necessary). following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

NARROW is flashing.

ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

6
following screen:

NARROW BND NET 2

NET ID? 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I

The current net ID is flashing.

2-192
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-98. Procedure to Program a Net for Narrowband Operation - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
7 Numeric Keypad Enter desired Net ID if different from The R/f displays the
that displayed. following screen:

NARROW BND NET 2

NETID?87654321

The desired net ID is flashing.

8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

NARROW BND NET 2

HOP FREQ= - -.- - -

- -.- - - is flashing.
9 i and J.., or numeric Enter desired center frequency if The R/f displays the
keypad different from that displayed. following screen:

NARROW BND NET 2

HOP FREQ=02.000

The desired hop frequency is

flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ENfER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The current selection is

flashing.
11 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

NARROW is flashing.
12 CLEAR Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
NET (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2-193
 IJH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.6.5.2.2 Programming Wldeband Operation

2-99 provides the procedure to
Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table
program a Net for wideband operation.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-99. Procedure to Program a Net for Wldeband Operation
COntrol Action Observe
Step
1 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
NET (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The current selection is

flashing.

3 i and J.., or numeric Enter desired hop net number if The R/f displays the
keypad different from that displayed. following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The desired hop net to

view/change is flashing.

4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

The current selection is

flashing.

5 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
WIDE (if necessary). following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

WIDE is flashing.

2-194
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-99. Procedure to Program a Net for Wldeband Operation - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

WIDE BAND NET 2

NET ID? 8 7 6 5 3 0 9 3

The current net ID is flashing.

7 Numeric Keypad Enter desired Net ID if different from The R/f displays the
that displayed. following screen:

WIDE BAND NET 2

NET ID? 8 7 6 5 3 0 9 3

The desired net ID is flashing.

8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

WIDE BAND NET 2

LO LIMIT=12.000

The current lower frequency

limit is flashing.
9 Numeric Keypad Enter desired low end frequency The R/f displays the
(must be a multiple of 5 kHz) if following screen:
different from that displayed.
WIDE BAND NET 2
LO LIMIT=12.000

The desired lower frequency

limit is flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

WIDE BAND NET 2

HI LIMIT= 13.000

The current upper frequency

limit is flashing.
11 Numeric Keypad Enter desired high end frequency The R/f displays the
(must be a multiple of 5 kHz) if following screen:
different from that displayed. The
maximum bandwidth is 2 MHz. WIDE BAND NET 2
HI LIMIT=13.000

The desired upper frequency

limit is flashing.

2-195
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

ued
Table 2-99. Procedure to Program a Net for Wldeband Operation - Contin
Control Action Observe
Step
12 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' displays the
following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEWJCHANGE? 2

The current hop net selection

is flashing.

CLEAR Press and release repeatedly to select The R/I' displays the
13
NET (if necessary). following screen:

NEf EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2-196
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.5.2.3 Programming Frequency Lists

Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table 2-100 provides the procedure to
add frequencies to a frequency list (the minimum number of frequencies that can be added is 15, and the
maximum is 99). Table 2-101 provides the procedure to delete frequencies from a frequency list.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-100. Procedure to Add Frequencies to a Frequency List
Step Control Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R{f displays the
NET (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The current hop net selection

is flashing.
3 i and .1, or numeric Enter desired hop net number if The Rtf displays the
keypad different from that displayed. following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The desired hop net selection

is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

The current selection is

flashing.

2-197
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-100. Procedure to Add Frequencies to a Frequency List - COntinued

Step COntrol Action Observe
5 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/I' displays the
LIST (if necessary). following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

LIST is flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/I' displays the
following screen:

LIST HOP NET 2

NET ID? 1 8 9 2 6 7 6 4

The current net ID is flashing.

7 Numeric Keypad Enter desired Net ID if different from The R/I' displays the
that displayed. following screen:

LIST HOP NET 2

NET ID? 1 8 9 2 6 7 6 4

The desired net ID is flashing.

8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD_FREQ NET 2
DELETE_FREQ

ADD_FREQ is flashing.
9 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
ADD_FREQ (if necessary). following screen:

ADD_FREQ NET 2
DELETE_FREQ

ADD_FREQ is flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LIST NET 2
ADD FREQ=24.600

The current selection is

flashing.

2-198
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-100. Procedure to Add Frequencies to a Frequency List - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
11 Numeric Keypad Enter desired frequency (must be a The Rtf displays the
multiple of 5 kHz) if different from following screen:
that displayed. The difference between
the lowest and highest frequencies LIST NET 2
must be less than 2 MHz. ADD FREQ=24.600

The desired frequency to add

is flashing.
12 Repeat steps 10 and 11 until all
frequencies have been added to the
desired list.
13 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD_FREQ NET 2
DELETE_FREQ

ADD_FREQ is flashing.
14 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LIST HOP NET 2

NET ID 1 8 9 2 6 7 6 4

The current net ID is flashing.

15 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

LIST is flashing.
16 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

2 is flashing.
17 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2-199
 ;J)H AR RlS
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-101. Procedure to Delete Frequencies From a Frequency List

Control Action Observe
Step
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
NET (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The current selection is

flashing.

3 i and ..1" or numeric Enter desired hop net number if The R/f displays the
keypad different from that displayed. following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEWICHANGE? 2

The current selection is

flashing.

4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

The current selection is

flashing.

5 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
LIST (if necessary). following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

The current selection is

flashing.

6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

ADD_FREQ NET 2
DELETE_FREQ

ADD_FREQ is flashing.

2-200
fIJ HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-101. Procedure to Delete Frequencies From a Frequency List - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
7 f-and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
DELETE_FREQ (if necessary). following screen:

ADD_FREQ NET 2
DELETE_FREQ

DELETE_FREQ is flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LIST NET 2
DEL_FREQ - -.- --

- -.- - - is flashing.
9 i and J, Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf scrolls through the
desired frequency to delete is list of programmed
displayed. frequencies and displays the
following screen:

LIST NET 2
DEL_FREQ 24.500

The desired frequency to be

deleted is flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LIST NET 2
DEL_FREQ - -.- --

- -.- - - is flashing.
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 until all desired
frequencies have been deleted from
the desired list.
12 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD_FREQ NET 2
DELETE_FREQ

DELETE_FREQ is flashing.

2-201
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS I) HARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-101. Procedure to Delete Frequencies From a Frequency List - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
13 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NET HOP NET 2

NETIDl8926764

The current net ID is flashing.

14 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

LIST is flashing.
15 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The current hop net selection

is flashing.
16 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2-202
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.5.2.4 Deleting a Hop Net

Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table 2-102 provides the procedure to
delete an entire Hop Net.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-102. Procedure to Delete a Hop Net
Step Control Action Observe
1 ~and4 Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
NET (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The current hop net selection

is flashing.
3 i and ,1, or numeric Enter desired hop net number if The Rtf displays the
keypad different from that displayed. following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The desired hop net selection

is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

The current selection is

flashing.
5 ~and4 Press and release repeatedly to select The R/f displays the
DELETE (if necessary). following screen:

NARROW WIDE LIST

DELETE

DELETE is flashing.

2-203
 mJH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-102. Procedure to Delete a Hop Net - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
ENTER Press and release. The RJT displays the
6
following screen:

DELETE HOP
NET2? NO

NO is flashing.

i and J, Press and release repeatedly to select The RJT displays the
7
YES (if necessary). following screen:

DELETE HOP
NET2? YES

YES is flashing.

8 ENTER Press and release. The RJT displays the

following screen:

ENTER HOP NET TO

VIEW/CHANGE? 2

The current selection is

flashing.

9 CLEAR Press and release. The RJT displays the

following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

NET is flashing.

2-204
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.6.5.3 Programming Exclusion Bands

An exclusion band specifies a range of frequencies that cannot be used during frequency hopping. Each exclusion
band affects all wideband nets, but does not affect narrowband or list nets. A maximum of ten exclusion bands (0,
1,2, ...,9) can be programmed.

2.6.5.3.1 Adding an Exclusion Band

Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table 2-103 provides the procedure to
add an exclusion band.

NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-103. Procedure to Add an Exclusion Band

Step Control Action Observe
1 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
EXCLUDE (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

EXCLUDE is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD/DELETE EXCL
BAND: 3

The current exclusion band is

flashing.
3 i and ,1" or numeric Enter desired exclusion band number The Rtf displays the
keypad if different from that displayed. following screen:

ADD/DELETE EXCL
BAND: 3

The desired exclusion band is

flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD_EXCL_BAND
DELETE_EXCL_BAND

ADD_EXCL_BAND is
flashing.

2-205
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-103. Procedure to Add an Exclusion Band - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
5 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
ADD_EXCL_BAND (if necessary). following screen:

ADD_EXCL_BAND
DELETE_EXCL_BAND

ADD_EXCL_BAND is
flashing.

ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

6
following screen:

EXCLUSION BAND 3
LO LIMIT= 00.000

The current lower frequency

limit is flashing.

Numeric Keypad Enter desired frequency (must be a The Rtf displays the
7
multiple of 5 kHz) if different from following screen:
that displayed.
EXCLUSION BAND 3
LO LIMIT= 15.785

The desired lower frequency

limit is flashing.

ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

8
following screen:

EXCLUSION BAND 3
HI LIMIT= 20.785

The current upper frequency

limit is flashing.

Numeric Keypad Enter desired frequency (must be a The Rtf displays the
9
multiple of 5 kHz) if different from following screen:
that displayed.
EXCLUSION BAND 3
HI LIMIT= 20.785

The desired upper frequency

limit is flashing.

2-206
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-103. Procedure to Add an Exclusion Band - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADDIDELETE EXCL
BAND: 3

The desired exclusion band is

flashing.
11 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

EXCLUDE is flashing.

2-207
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.6.5.3.2 Deleting an Exclusion Band

Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table 2-104 provides the procedure to
delete an exclusion band.

NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.

Table 2-104. Procedure to Delete an Exclusion Band

Step Control Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
EXCLUDE (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

EXCLUDE is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD/DELETE EXCL
BAND? 3

3 is flashing.
3 i and .1, or numeric Enter desired exclusion band number The Rtf displays the
keypad if different from that displayed. following screen:

ADD/DELETE EXCL
BAND? 3

3 is flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD_EXCL_BAND
DELETE_EXCL_BAND

ADD_EXCL_BAND is
flashing.
5 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
DELETE_EXCL_BAND. following screen:

ADD_EXCL_BAND
DELETE_EXCL_BAND

DELETE_EXCL_BAND is
flashing.

2-208
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-104. Procedure to Delete an Exclusion Band - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

DELETE EXCLUSION
BAND3? NO

NO is flashing.
7 i andi Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
YES. following screen:

DELETE EXCLUSION
BAND3? YES

YES is flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ADD/DELETE EXCL
BAND: 4

The current selection is

flashing.
9 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

EXCLUDE is flashing.

2-209
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.6.5.4 Programming Data Presets

a specific data rate. A data preset is
Programming data presets allows a specific data device to be programmed for
different from, and in addition to,
then assigned to the configuration. Three data presets are available which are
, the following parameters are
those programmable for SSB or ALE operation. For each of these three presets
programmable:
preset number is either 7,
a. Preset Numb er- Each data preset defmes the interface type and baud rate. The
8,or9.
may be:
b. Interface - Describes the characteristics of the interface port. The interface type
1. ASYNC RMT PORT
2. ASYNC DATA PORT
3. SYNC DATA PORT
c. Modem Baud Rate - The following are modem baud rate selections:
1. 75

2. 150
3. 300
name is not defined, the
d. Preset Name - The programmer can select names for a data preset. If a preset
preset will be called DATx, where x is 7,8, or 9.
2-105 provides the procedure to
Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table
program data presets.
NOTE

Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.

Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-105. Procedure to Program Hopping Data Presets
Control Action Observe
Step
1 f- and ~ Press and release repeatedly to select The R{f displays the
DATA (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

DATA is flashing.

2 ENTER Press and release. The R/T displays the

following screen:

DATA PRESET TO
CHANGE: 8[DAT8]

The current data preset is

flashing.

2-210
II HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-105. Procedure to Program Hopping Data Presets - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
3 i and J.., or numeric Enter desired data preset if different The Rtf displays the
keypad from that displayed. following screen:

DATA PRESET TO
CHANGE: 8[DATS]

The desired data preset is

flashing.
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

INTERFACE [DATS]
ASYNC RMT PORT

The current data interface is

flashing.
5 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly until the The Rtf scrolls through the
desired interface selection is three interface selections
displayed. (ASYNC RMT PORf,
ASYNC DATA PORT, and
SYNC DATA PORT) and
displays the following screen:

INTERFACE [DATS]
ASYNC RMT PORT

The desired data interface is

flashing.
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

MODEM BAUD RATE

300 [DATS]

The current baud rate is

flashing.
7 i and J.. Press and release repeatedly until the The Rtf scrolls through the
desired baud rate is displayed. three baud rate selections (75.
150, and 3(0) and displays the
following screen:

MODEM BAUD RATE

300 [DATS]

The desired baud rate is

flashing.

2-211
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 2-105. Procedure to Program Hopping Data Presets - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
8 ENTER Press and release. The RIf displays the
following screen:

NEW PRESET NAME

OAT 8 [DAT8]

The current preset name is

flashing.
9 Alphanumeric Keypad Press and release repeatedly until the The RIf displays the
desired preset name is displayed. following screen:
Refer to Paragraph 2.6.2 for detailed
instructions. NEW PRESET NAME
PCI [DAT8)

The desired preset name is

flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The R!f displays the
following screen:

ACTIVATE PRESET?
YES [PCI)

YES is flashing.
11 i and .1 Press and release repeatedly until YES The RIf displays the
is displayed (if necessary). following screen:

ACTIVATE PRESET?
YES [PCl)

YES is flashing.
12 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

DATA PRESET TO
CHANGE: 8[PCI)

The current preset selection is

flashing.
13 CLEAR Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECOR

DATA is flashing.

2-212
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.5.5 Programming Frequency Hopping Transmit Power

The transmit power level can be programmed for frequency hopping operation to either Low, Medium, or High.
Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table 2-106 provides the procedure to
program transmit power.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2·106. Procedure to Program Hopping Transmit Power
Step Control Action Observe
1 f- and-+ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
TX_POWER (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXa..UDE DATA

POWER SECUR

POWER is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

TXPOWER
HIGH

The current setting is flashing.

3 i and.1 Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf scrolls through the
desired transmit power is displayed. three power levels (LOW,
MED, and HIGH) and
displays the following screen:

TXPOWER
HIGH

The desired setting is flashing.

4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NET EXa..UDE DATA

POWER SECUR

POWER is flashing.

2·213
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
OPERATION

2.6.5.6 Programming security

SECUR programming prevents accidental alteration ofRT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter operation and program
infonnation. It also allows an experienced radio operator to override the lockout feature and access all frequency
hopping configuration parameters.
After making the lockout selections, the Rtf must be turned off, then turned back on, in order for the lockout
programming to take effect.
2.6.5.6.1 Programming Lockout
Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table 2-107 provides the procedure to
program lockout.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-107. Procedure to Program Lockout
Step Control Action Observe
1 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
SECUR (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ENTER PASSWORD
--------

3 Numeric Keypad Enter password. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

ENTER PASSWORD
27660094
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.
5 ~and~ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
LOCKOUT (if necessary). following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.

2-214
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

Table 2-107. Procedure to Program Lockout - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
6 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

"NET" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.
7 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
and NO and displays the
following screen:

"NET" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The desired selection is

flashing.
8 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

"EXCLUDE" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.
9 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
and NO and displays the
following screen:

"EXCLUDE" PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The desired selection is

flashing.
10 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the
following screen:

"DATA" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

2-215
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2-107. Procedure to Program Lockout - Continued

Control Action Observe
Step
i and J. Press and release repeatedly. The R/f toggles between YES
11
and NO and displays the
following screen:

"DATA" PROGRAM
ALLOWED? YES

The desired selection is

flashing.

12 ENTER Press and release. The R/f displays the

following screen:

''TX_POWER'' PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The current selection is

flashing.

13 i and J. Press and release repeatedly. The R/T toggles between YES
and NO and displays the
following screen:

''TX_POWER'' PROG
ALLOWED? YES

The desired selection is

flashing.

14 ENTER Press and release. The R/T displays the

following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.

15 CLEAR Press and release. The R/T displays the

following screen;

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECOR

SECOR is flashing.

2-216
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.6.5.6.2 Programming Operational Lockout

Programming operational lockout prevents an operator from selecting or changing an operational function. Each
operator-controllable parameter is reviewed.
When YES is selected an operator may change that parameter. When NO is selected, the item does appear on the
front panel display, but is locked out; therefore, it is not available for change. A default selection can be made for
the data preset and encryption key.
Access the frequency hopping programming menu per Paragraph 2.6.5.1. Table 2-108 provides the procedure to
program operational lockout.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-108. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout
Step Control Action Observe
1 ~ and---+ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rtf displays the
SECUR (if necessary). following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

SECUR is flashing.
2 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ENTER PASSWORD
--------

3 Numeric Keypad Enter password. The Rrr displays the

following screen:

ENTER PASSWORD
27660094
4 ENTER Press and release. The Rrr displays the
following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

LOCKOUT is flashing.
5 ~ and---+ Press and release repeatedly to select The Rrr displays the
OP_LOCK (if necessary). following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

OP_LOCK is flashing.

2·217
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

Table 2·108. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout - COntinued

COntrol Action Observe
Step
6 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

ALLOW DAT PRESET

CHANGE? NO

The current selection is

flashing.

7 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO and displays the
following screen:

ALLOW DAT PRESET

CHANGE? NO

The desired selection is

flashing.

If YES is selected, proceed to

step 10.

8 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

DEFAULT DATA
PRESET 8 [PCI]

The current default data preset

is flashing.

9 i and J" or numeric Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf displays the
keypad desired default data preset is following screen:
displayed.
DEFAULT DATA
PRESET 8 [PCI]

The desired default data preset

is flashing.

10 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the

following screen:

ALLOW ENC PRESET

CHANGE? NO

The current selection is

flashing.

2-218
I) HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2-108. Procedure to Program Operational Lockout - Continued

Step Control Action Observe
11 i and J, Press and release repeatedly. The Rtf toggles between YES
and NO and displays the
following screen:

ALLOW ENC PRESET

CHANGE? NO

The desired selection is

flashing.

If YES is selected, proceed to

step 14.
12 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

DEFAULT ENCR
KEY: KEYl

The current default encryption

key is flashing.
13 i and J, Press and release repeatedly until The Rtf displays the
desired default encryption key is following screen:
displayed.
DEFAULT ENCR
KEY: KEY1

The desired default encryption

key is flashing.
14 ENTER Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

LOCKOUT OP_LOCK

OPLOCK is flashing.
15 CLEAR Press and release. The Rtf displays the
following screen:

NET EXCLUDE DATA

POWER SECUR

SECUR is flashing.

2-219
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
ED HA RR IS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.7 DATA INTERFACE

nous or asynchronous operation on
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter may be programmed for either synchro
ronous remote port (ASYNC RMT
either the data port or the remote port. The three available choices are asynch
data port (SYNC DATA PORT). Be
PORT), asynchronous data port (ASYNC DATA PORT), and synchronous
compatible with the data device
sure the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter data port parameters agree and are
interface.
2.7.1 Asynchronous Data Interface
ways of initiating a digital
When using DATA PRESET with the ASYNC DATA PORT, there are two
radio to transmit all data following the
transmission. The first way is by an ASCII Control-B ("B). This causes the
radio. Additionally, if there is no data
Control-B ("B) up to but not including a Control-C ("C), which unkeys the
activity for a period of 30 seconds, the radio automatically unkeys.
operation is by raising Request To
The second way of keying the data port when it is configured for asynchronous
by dropping RTS. There is no data
Send (RTS) (J2-P). The only way of unkeying the radio with this method is
activity time out.
It is necessary that the asynchronous data port transmission parame
ters are compatible with those of the data
device or terminal in use. These parameters include:
a. Asynchronous Data Rate (75, 150,300,600, 1200,2400,4800,9600 bps)
fast as the anticipated
This rate must be the same for both the port and data device, and at least as
maximum modem baud rate (2400 bps is a usual setting).
b. Bits (5, 6, 7, 8)
of the radio transmission
This setting must be the same as the bit setting for the data device. Both ends
link must have the same settings.
c. Stop Bits (l or 2)
of the radio transmission link
This must be the same as the stop bit setting for the data device. Both ends
must have the same settings.
d. Parity (ODD, EVEN, NONE)
Both ends of the radio
The parity setting must be the same as the parity setting for the data device.
transmission link must have the same settings.
e. FLOW CONTROL XON/XOFF (ON/OFF)
ted data device.
This must be the same as the flow control XON/XOFF setting for the connec
f. ECHO (ON/OFF)
This should be set to OFF if characters appear duplicated on the terminal screen.
g. PORT POLARITY (RS-232, MIL-188)
This should be set to match the polarity in use by the data device.
Refer to Paragraph 2.6.3.5.2 for programming procedures.

2-220
IJHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.7.2 Synchronous Data Interface

When using DATA PRESET with the SYNC DATA PORT, the only way to initiate a digital transmission is by
raising RTS (J2-P), and the only way to unkey the radio is by lowering this line.
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter provides a clock signal at the synchronous interface during receive operation.
During transmit, either the Rf-1694 Receiver-Transmitter or the data device can provide this clock signal.
Normally, this parameter should be set to EXTERNAL (refer to Paragraph 2.6.3.5.2) to accept an external clock.
Should the data device require a clock during transmit. set this to INTERNAL.
2.7.3 Data Transmission with the Asynchronous Remote Port

Normally the asynchronous remote port is used for remote control of the Rtf. Data transmission is also possible
from this port. should this port be selected (refer to Paragraph 2.6.3.5.2). Received data will appear at this port.
Transmission is initiated by an ASCII Control-B (/\B) character which keys the transmitter and is terminated by
an ASCII Control-C (/\C) character which unkeys the transmitter.
2.8 REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE

Detailed remote control information and communications software are on a diskette which is included as part of
this manual. Remote control interface is through the RS-232C asynchronous port. available at the DATA
connector on the front panel of the R/f. A text-like ASCII protocol is used for remote control. allowing computer
terminals. laptop computers. or personal computers to control and monitor RF-5200 FALCON Series Manpack
System functions without custom software.
The remote control data device must appear to the Rf-1694 Receiver-Transmitter as a computer terminal.
Computers can use one of several communication terminal emulation programs, including the one provided with
this manual.
The asynchronous data interface for both the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and the remote control data terminal
should be programmed as follows:
Character Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: NONE
XON/XOFF: ON
Echo: ON
The remote control data device should be set to the following:
Duplex: FULL
Flow Control: XON/XOFF
Remote control menus are included in the following paragraphs to illustrate the menus that are displayed by the
internal remote control software of the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter. Remote control operation is enabled in the
following ways: when the Rf-1694 Receiver-Transmitter front panel FUNCTION control is placed in the
REMOTE position. or when the R/f DATA connector 12 pin E is pulled low with the FUNCTION control in the
OFF or REMOTE position.

2·221
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.1 Asynchronous Remote COntrol Port Programming

Before attempting remote control operation, both the asynchronous remote port program parameters and the
external remote control data device must be programmed to the appropriate settings. Refer to Paragraph 2.6.3.5.2
for port programming procedures.
2.8.2 Terminal/Remote COntrol Software
FALCOM System operating software provides infonnation and programs useful for data transmission and remote
control applications. The files supplied include:
a. README.DOC - A short ASCII document describing the function and operation of the other files
contained on the diskette. The user should read this file before attempting to work with the other files.
b. FALCOM.EXE - A simple, executable tenninal program which facilitates file transfer and management
for data communications applications.
c. FALCOM.HLP - Contains help messages accessed by the FALCOM.EXE data communications program.
d. PROTOCOL.DOC - An ASCII document file which describes the FALCON Series remote control
protocol in detail, including complete command listings and descriptions. Any user who wants to operate
the RF-5200 FALCON Series Manpack System by remote control should print this file.
e. DEMOSSB.PRG, DEMOAFC.PRG, DEMOALE.PRG, DEMOFH.PRG, and DEMODE.PRG - Contain
ASCII program files containing program parameters which can be used to program an RF-5200 FALCON
Series Manpack System. Instructions for this are in the README.DOC file. The purpose of these files is
to set up RF-5200 FALCON Series Manpack Systems for demonstration, to demonstrate the program
process, and to provide templates or sample program files from which the users may construct their own.
These files may be used individually or linked together to program the SSB, ALE, and digital encryption
functions.

2-222
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.8.3 SSB Remote Control Operation

Once the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter is properly programmed and the FUNCTION control is placed in the
REMOTE position, the SSB prompt and status listing appear on the remote control terminal Commands are
entered after the > prompt character.
NOTE

If the prompt is not shown before the display cursor, pressing the
carriage return or ENTER key on the data device restores the
prompt.
Remote control operation is similar to front-panel operation. The display prompt SSB> or ALE> is equivalent to
the FUNCTION control and indicates the selected mode of operation. The FUNCTION operating mode can be
changed by entering:
a. SSB (Single Channel mode)
b. ALE (Automatic Link Establishment mode)
c. HOP (Frequency Hopping mode)
The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter is placed in the designated mode if the R/f is configured to support automatic
link establishment operation.
Typing a command and parameter controls the R/f. For example:
a. Channel 02 - Switches radio to Channel 02.
b. FR 016‫סס‬oo - Programs the operating frequency to 1.600 MHz.
To program a channel by remote control, a simple text string is used. For example:
a. Channel 07
b. Freq 1642370
c. Mode USB
d. AGC Slow
Alternately, program information can be stored in ASCII format and transferred into the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter as a complete fIle. A sample SSB file is DEMOSSB.PRG on the included diskette. A
program file is loaded using the FALCOM terminal program by pressing the function key labeled FILL on the
terminal, selecting the appropriate fIle when it is displayed, and pressing ENTER on the terminal.
The remote control SHOW and HELP commands are provided to assist in remote control operation.

2-223
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION
lIJ HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.3.1 SSB Show Menus

Entering SHOW on the remote control data device provides a listing of the current status and settings for the Rtf
for the FUNCflON mode selected. The SHOW command displays the current settings and status of the Rtf. See
Figure 2-23.
The SSB MODEM SHOW command displays the current settings and status of the modem. See Figure 2-24.
SSB Show Menu Comments
SSB>show Command to show currently programmed parameters
CHAN 00 Channel selected is 00
KEY OFF Radio is unkeyed (receive)
RxFr 0160‫סס‬oo Receive frequency is 1.6 MHz
TxFr 0160‫סס‬oo Transmit frequency is 1.6 MHz
MODE USB Modulation is USB
AGCMED Medium AGC is selected
BAND 3.0 Bandwidth is 3.0 kHz
RXONLYNO Channel is set for receive and transmit
BFO+oooo BFO offset is 0
MODEMODATO DatO data preset is selected
DVOFF Digital voice is off
DOT_SQUELCH OFF Digital squelch is off
AVS OFF Analog Voice Security is off
CUR_KEY 01 Encryption key 01 is selected
ENCRYPT ON Encryption is on
SQ_LEVEL LOW Squelch threshold is set to low
SQUELCH OFF Audio squelch is off
ANTENNA_bnc 20 W PA coupler output switched to BNC
POWER hi RF power output is high (maximum)
RWAS ENABLED Active squelch is enabled
RETRANSENABLED Retransmit Key is enabled
CWOFFSET ‫סס‬oo No CW transmit offset is programmed
SSB> SSB prompt indicates single channel (SSB) mode

Figure 2-23. Typical Output Of A "Show" Command for SSB Operation

SSB > modem show

MODEM PRESET 0 DATO TYPE 39tone ASYNC REMOTE BAUD 2400 INTER long

SSB>

Figure 2-24. Typical Output of A "Modem Show" Command

2·224
IJHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.8.3.2 SSB Help Menus

Entering HELP on the remote control data device provides a listing of the general commands used to control basic
operation of the system for the FUNCfION mode selected. The MODEM HELP command displays a list of
modem commands for the modem. These commands must be prefixed with the word MODEM to be recognized
by the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter. See Figure 2-25 for the SSB Help menu. See Figure 2-26 for SSB Help
More menu. See Figure 2-27 for the SSB Help Modem menu. See Figure 2-28 for the SSB Help RWAS screen.
See Figure 2-29 for the SSB Help Port Remote menu. See Figure 2-30 for the SSB Help Port Data menu. See
Figure 2-31 for the SSB Help Security menu. The general commands are structured similarly to the front-panel
commands.
NOTE
Only the capital letters of the commands are entered. For
example, AG SL programs AGC to slow setting.
Using the ZERO command erases all memory.

SSB > help

AGc (OFf, SLow, MEd, FAst, DAta) MODE (USb,LSb,~e,CW)

ALE ALE Mode MODEM see HElp MODEM
BAndwidth Depends on Mode: POWer (LOw/MEd/HIgh
= USB/LSB (1.0/1.5f2.0f2.4f2.713.0/4.0/5.0) PORT_Re See HELP PORI'_Re
=AME (3.0/4.0/5.0/6.0/8.0) PORT_Da See HELP PORI'_Da
=CW (0.35/0.68/1.0/1.5/2.0) RXFreq Receive Frequency
BFo (±Xxxx) BFO Offset SHow Show Status
CHan (00... 99) SQuelch (ON/OFf)
DGT_sq (ON/OFf) digital squelch SQ_Level (LO, MEdium, HIgh)
DISplay (Chan from, Chan to) TEst Perform Self Test
DV (ON/OFf) digital voice TEst 3 Firmware Versions
ENCRypt (ON/OFf) encryption TEst 4 VSWR Test
ENC_Key (0..6) (12 digit key) TIme (hh: mm: ss)
FReq Select Frequency TXFreq Transmit freq
HOp Hopping Mode USE_KEy (1..6) encryption key
Keyline (ON/OFF) ZERO Clears Radio Memory

**HElp MORE gives additional commands**

SSB>

Figure 2·25. SSB Help Menu

2·225
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

SSB > help more

(BNc/AUto/fUned) antenna INTensity (0-8) backlight intensity

ANTENNA
port for RF-5030PA KWATt (YEs/NO) IKW installed?
PASSWord (8 digits)
- (Odbm/-IOdbm) PREamp (BYpass/ENable)
AUDio
(ON/OFf) PREPost shows parameters
AVS
(STatus) battery voltage PROGram see HElp SECurity
BATtery
(ON/OFf) SELect see HElp SECurity
COMpression -
(0-8) contrast level RETRansmit - (ENAble/DISable)
CONTrast
(0/1000 Hz RETUne retunes antenna coupler
CWOFfset
(mm/dd/yy) RFgain (0... 100)
DATe
(SUN..sAT) RXONly (ON/OFf) receive only
DAY

SSB>

Figure 2-26. SSB Help More Menu

2·226
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.8.3.3 SSB Help Modem Menu

The HELP MODEM command displays a list of modem commands for the modem option. These commands
must be prefixed with the word MODEM to be recognized by the radio. The following is a typical remote control
Help Modem menu.

SSB > help modem

Prefixed by MODEM:
OFf disable modem PREset show all modem presets
SHow show current modem info xxxx set modem to preset xxxx

Prefixed by MODEM PRESET n: where n =data preset number

ASync (REMote/DATa), async mode
DISable lockout the given preset NAMe (xxxx) new preset name
ENable enable the given preset SPace space frequency
INTerleav (LOng/SHort/ALTS/ALTLfZEro) SYnc sync mode
MArk mark frequency
BAUd (75/150/300/600/1200/2400NOice)
TYpe (39tone/FSKWs/FSKNs/FSK-A/FSK-V/SErial)

*** capitalleners denote acceptable abbreviation

SSB>

Figure 2-27. SSB Help Modem Menu

2.8.3.4 SSB RWAS Help Menu

The RWAS HELP command displays a list of commands for the Active Squelch (RWAS) option. Figure 2-28
shows a typical remote control Help RWAS menu.

SSB > help rwas

SSB RWAS Commands:

FORCE_Wakeup (ENAble/DISable) force wakeup burst on key

RWAS (ENAble/DISable) Robust Wakeup Active Squelch
RWAS_KEY (2 digit key) (default (0)
UNKEY_Mask (ENAble/DISable) ignore unkey postamble

SSB>

Figure 2-28. SSB Help RWAS Screen

2-227
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.3.4.1 sse Remote and Data Port Configuration Help Menus

All remote and data port parameters may be set or programmed through remote control commands. See Figure
2-29 for the SSB Help Port_Remote Menu. See Figure 2-30 for the SSB Help Port_Data Menu.

SSB > help port_re

Port commands preceded by PORT_Remote or PORT_Data:

----- .... ------_ ... -----------_._.------------_._._----._-----------------
BAud - 75/150/300/600/1200/2400/4800,9600
BIts - 7/8 (char bits)
ECho - ON/OFf
PArity - NOne/ODd/EVen
STop 1/2 (stop bits)
XOn/xoff - ENable/DIsable

SSB>

Figure 2-29. sse Help Port_Remote Menu

SSB > help port_da

Port commands preceded by PORT_Remote or PORT_Data:

------------------------------ .... --------_.-----_._.--------------------
BAud - 75/150/300/600/1200/2400/4800,9600
BIts - 5/6n/8 (char bits)
ECho - ON/Off
PArity - NOne/ODd/EVen
STop 1/2 (stop bits)
XOn/xoff - ENable/DIsable
CLock - Intema1!Extemal sync clock (Data Port only)

SSB>

Figure 2-30. sse Help Port_Data Help Menu

2-228
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.8.3.3 SSB Help Modem Menu

The HELP MODEM command displays a list of modem commands for the modem option. These commands
must be prefIxed with the word MODEM to be recognized by the radio. The following is a typical remote control
Help Modem menu.

SSB > help modem

Prefixed by MODEM:
OFf disable modem PREset show all modem presets
SHow show current modem info xxxx set modem to preset xxxx

Prefixed by MODEM PRESET n: where n = data preset number

ASync (REMote/DATa), async mode
DISable lockout the given preset NAMe (xxxx) new preset name
ENable enable the given preset SPace space frequency
INTerleav (LOng/SHort/ALTS/ALTLfZEro) SYnc sync mode
MArk mark frequency
BAUd (75/150/300/600/1200/2400NOice)
TYpe (39tone/FSKWs/FSKNs/FSK-A/FSK-V/SErial)

••• capital letters denote acceptable abbreviation

SSB>

Figure 2-27. SSB Help Modem Menu

2.8.3.4 SSB RWAS Help Menu

The RWAS HELP command displays a list of commands for the Active Squelch (RWAS) option. Figure 2-28
shows a typical remote control Help RWAS menu.

SSB > help rwas

SSB RWAS Commands:

FORCE_Wakeup - (ENAble/DISable) force wakeup burst on key

RWAS (ENAble/DISable) Robust Wakeup Active Squelch
RWAS_KEY (2 digit key) (default (0)
UNKEY_Mask (ENAble/DISable) ignore unkey postarnble

SSB>

Figure 2-28. SSB Help RWAS Screen

2-227
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.3.4.1 sse Remote and Data Port Configuration Help Menus

All remote and data port parameters may be set or programmed through remote control commands. See Figure
2-29 for the SSB Help Port_Remote Menu. See Figure 2-30 for the SSB Help Port_Data Menu.

SSB > help port_re

Port commands preceded by PORT_Remote or PORT_Data:

---_ ... _-----_._----------------------_._._------------------_ .... _-----_.
BAud - 75/150/300/600/1200/2400/4800, 9600
BIts - 7/8 (char bits)
ECho - ON/OFf
PArity - NOne/ODd/EVen
STop 1/2 (stop bits)
XOn/xof! - ENable/DIsable

SSB>

Figure 2·29. sse Help Port_Remote Menu

SSB > help port_da

Port commands preceded by PORT_Remote or PORT_Data:

---------_._._._------------_._._-------_._._-_._. __ .--------------------
BAud - 75/150/300/600/1200/2400/4800,9600
BIts - 5/6n18 (char bits)
ECho - ON/OFf
PArity - NOne/ODd/EVen
STop 1/2 (stop bits)
XOn/xof! - ENablelDIsable
CLock - IntemallExtemal sync clock (Data Port only)

SSB>

Figure 2·30. sse Help Port_Data Help Menu

2·228
(IJ HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.8.3.5 SSB Security Help Menus

Security commands prevent or allow changes to the parameter type. The SELect commands control selecting or
changing operational functions, and the PROGRAM commands control the availability of program menus. See
Figure 2-31 for SSB Security Help menu.

SSB HELP SECURITY MENU

SSB > help security

SSB Security Commands:

LOCk prevents changes to the parameter type and UNLock allows changes.

The 'SELect' commands control selecting or changing operational functions.

SELect ALL (LOCklUNLock) all parameters
SELect BFO (LOCk/UNLock) BFO operation
SELect DATa (LOCk/UNLock) data presets
SELect KEY (LOCk/UNLock) encryption keys
SELect MODe (LOCk/UNLock) modulation type
SELect TMP_CHan- (LOCk/UNLock) channel 00 parameters

The 'PROGram' commands control programming menu availability.

PROGram ALL (LOCk/UNLock) all parameters
PROGram CHan (LOCk/UNLock) channel parameters
PROGram CFlG (LOCk/UNLock) configuration items
PROGram DATa (LOCk/UNLock) data presets
PROGram ALL (LOCklUNLock) fill gun programming
PROGram KEYs (LOCk/UNLock) encryption keys
-._----------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: These are front-panel commands that take effect after cycling power!

Figure 2-31. SSB Help Security Menu

2-229
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.4 ALE Remote COntrol Operation

Full remote control operation and programming of ALE is supported by the Rf-1694 Receiver-Transmitter.
Commands are entered one at a time from a terminal. Operational parameters can also be downloaded over the
remote control interface. A text file on a personal computer can be generated containing the complete
programming information for each channel group, address (self, individual, or net), configuration parameter, etc.
of the system. The file can then be transferred to the radio through the remote control interface.
2.8.4.1 Entering ALE Mode

The FUNCTION control is used to enable ALE. At the SSB> prompt, enter ALE:
SSB> ALE
The operating mode switches to ALE and the current ALE status is displayed. Figure 2-32 is a typical display
when first entering ALE mode.

Menu Comments
SSB > ALE \ Command to enter ALE operating mode

Indicates ALE is installed

) ALE is in program mode

ALE>
~
I
ALE> SCANNING ) ALE is scanning the channel group(s)

ALE> KEY OFF

I

Figure 2·32. Typical ALE Status Display

2-230
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.8.4.2 ALE Show Menu

Entering ALE> SHOW provides an ALE status listing. The command can be used to monitor ALE operation and
to confirm configuration setting. The channel, frequency, and mode displayed is the current information of the
channel being scanned or used when the command is issued. Figure 2-33 displays a typical SHOW menu.

Show Menu Comments

ALE> show Show status command
SCANNING ALE is scanning the channel group(s)
LSTN OFF Listen Before Transmit is off
KEY_TO_CALL OFF Key-to-Call is off
RAD_SIL OFF Radio Silence is off
ALL_CALL ON Reception of ALL calls is enabled
ANY_CALL ON Reception of ANY calls is enabled
MAXCHOlO Maximum Number of Channels Scanned is 10
TUNETIME 002 Maximum System 1\me Time is 2 seconds
TIME_OUT 005 Link Timeout is 2 minutes
AMD_DISPLAY ON Display of received AMDs is enabled
CHAN 04 Current channel is channel 04
MODE USB Operating mode is USB for indicated channel
RxFr 14444000 Receive frequency is 14.4440 MHz
TxFr 14444000 Transmit frequency is 14.4440 MHz
KEY OFF Encryption is off
MODEM OFF Modem is off
DVOFF Digital Voice is off
DOT_SQUELCH OFF Digital Squelch is off
AVSOFF Analog Voice Security is off
ENCRYPT OFF Encryption is off
RWAS ENABLED Active squelch is on
ALE>

Figure 2-33. l\'plcal ALE Show Menu

2-231
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.8.4.3 ALE Help Menus

and structure of ALE remote control
Entering ALE> HELP on the remote control data device provides a listing
s help menus for operation and
commands. In addition to the HELP/HELP PROGRAM menu, ALE provide
security commands. See Figures 2-34 through 2-36 for ALE Help menus.

ALE > help

Embedded Adaptive commands consist of:

HElp or? This Menu
HElp PRog Embedded Adaptive PROGRAM Help Menu
HElp OPer Embedded Adaptive OPERATIONAL Help Menu
HElp SECurity - Embedded Adaptive SECURITY Help Menu

ALE> help prog

Embedded Adaptive PROGRAM commands consist of:

ADDCh, DELCh, or CHGroup - (Chan Group <0 - 9» (chan)
ADDMemb (Net Name) (Member Address)
ALL_Call, ANY_Call (ON/OFf)
AMD_Display (ON/OFf)
DELADdr (Address)
ERASE Clear ALE Addresses
HElp or? (none/PRog/OPer/MODEM/SECURity) Embedded Adaptive Help
INDADdr, NETADdr (Address) (Chan Group <0-9» (Associated Self)
KEY To call (ON, OFf)
LSTNbeforetx (ON, OFf)
MAXCH (0 - 1(0)
RXMsg (none/DELete) (Message Number <0 - 9»
(LASt)
RAD_silence (ON, OFf)
SLFADdr (Address) (Chan Group <0-9»
TIME_OUt (1 - 60) Minutes
TUNEtime (1 - 60) Seconds
TXMsg (Message Number <0 - 9» (Up to 90 characters)
(DELete) (Message Number <0 - 9»
ZERO Clear radio memory

ALE>

Figure 2·34. ALE Help/Help Program Menu

2-232
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

ALE> help oper

Embedded Adaptive OPERATIONAL commands consist of:

SCAn start scanning
STop stop scan
CALI (Address) (Chan)
INC up through the scan list
DEC down through the scan list
EOWDest (Individual Linked Address)
RANk (Individual Address)
SEnd (Message Number <0 - 9> ) (Address) (Chan)
EXCHange (STArt, STOp) (Address) (interval hh:mm) (start hh:mm)
SOUnd (STArt, STOp) (Self Address) (interval hh:mm) (start hh:mm)
SSB Exit ALE and return to SSB
HElp or? (none/PRog/OPer/SECurity) Embedded Adaptive Help

ALE>

Figure 2-35. ALE Help Operational Menu

ALE> help security

ALE Security Commands:

LOCk prevents changes to the parameter type and UNLock allows changes.

The "SELect" commands control selecting or changing operational functions.

SELect ALL (LOCk/UNLock) all parameters
SELect DATa (LOCk/UNLock) data presets
SELect KEY (LOCk/UNLock) encryption keys

The "PROGram" commands control programming menu availability.

PROGram ALL (LOCk/UNLock) all parameters
PROGram ADDRess (LOCk/UNLock) address programming
PROGram CFIG (LOCk/UNLock) configuration items
PROGram CHGroup (LOCk/UNLock) channel groups
PROGram LQA (LOCk/UNLock) LQA programming

NOTE: These are front-panel commands that take effect after cycling power!

Figure 2-36. ALE Help Security Menu

2-233
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS (II HARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.4.4 ALE Remote Control Programming

ALE stations require programming of the following parameters before operation (in coordination with the other
net sites):
• <Jhannelgroups

• Self addresses (name of the address and channel group)

• Individual addresses (name of the station address, a channel group, and a previously programmed self
address called the associated self)

• Net addresses (optional) (name of the address, a channel group, a previously programmed self address
called the associated self, and a list of up to 30 net members)

• Maximum channels scanned

• Maximum system tune time

For optimum perfonnance, the following parameters should also be programmed:
• Radio silence

• Listen before transmit

• Key to call

• Link timeout
2.8.4.4.1 Channel Group Programming
The channels programmed in the SSB mode must be assigned to channel groups for ALE operation. There are ten
channel groups available (0 to 9), and each channel group may contain up to 100 channels. The programming of
channel groups is accomplished by using the CHGroup and ADDCh commands.

• To assign channels to a group, enter the CHGroup command, followed by the channel group number (0-9)
and the channels assigned to the group:

ALE> CHG 1 01 02 03 04 05

• To add a channel to an already programmed group, enter the ADDCh command, followed by the channel
group number (0-9) and the channel to add to the group:

ALE> ADDC 1 06

2-234
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

2.8.4.4.2 Programming Addresses

The following paragraphs describe how to program ALE addresses via the remote control.
a. Self Addresses
ALE self addresses are programmed using the SLFAD command. The SLFAD command requires an
alphanumeric address and the associated channel group to be used by this unit.
NOTE
Self addresses are limited to 15 alphanumeric characters;
however, a default self address of one to three characters must be
programmed before ALE can operate.

• To program a self address, enter the SLFAD command, followed by the alphanumeric address
and the associated channel group (0-9):

ALE> SLFAD BEN 1

b. Programming Individual Addresses
The addresses of individual outstations are programmed using the INDAD command. The INDAD
command requires an alphanumeric address, the associated channel group, and a programmed associated
self address.

• To program an individual address, enter the INDAD command, followed by the alphanumeric
address, the associated channel group (0-9), and the associated self:

ALE> INDAD UNIT5 1 BEN

c. Programming Net Addresses
Net addresses are programmed using the NETAD and ADDMemb commands. First the net address must
be programmed using the NETAD command. The NETAD command requires the alphanumeric address,
the associated channel group, and the associated self.

• To program a net address, enter the NETAD command, followed by the alphanumeric address,
the associated channel group (0-9), and the associated self:

ALE>NETADlNET2BEN
Next, the members are programmed into the net by using the ADDMemb command. The ADDMemb
command requires the programmed net address (as described in the NETAD command) and the
programmed individual or self address.

• To program the net members into the net address, enter the ADDMemb command, followed by
the programmed net address and the programmed individual or self address:

ALE> ADDM lNET UNIT5

ALE> ADDM lNET BEN

The above commands programmed the net address lNET with members UNIT5 and BEN.

2-235
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
OPERATION

2.8.4.5 ALE Remote COntrol Operation

After the radio has been programmed, a tenninal or computer can command the system to scan, place or receive
ALE calls, perfonn LQAs, and send EOWs or AMDs. The following sections give examples of these types of
operation.
2.8.4.5.1 Scan Operation
To enter the SCAN mode, type SCAN:
ALE> SCAN
SCANNING
To stop scanning, type STOP.
2.8.4.5.2 Placing a Call
ALE allows a variety of calls to be made. Individual calls are made to a specific station; net calls are made to a
net address. These calls are made automatically or manually. In addition, ALL calls or ANY calls can be made by
entering the three appropriate letters (ALL or ANY) for a calling address.
A variety of other call types such as Selective All, Selective Any, Double Selective Any, Group, and Wildcard
calls can all be received with ALE installed.
a. Automatic Calls to an Individual or Net
To place an automatic call, enter the address.
ALE> CALL UT5
CALLING UT5 CHANNEL: 10
LINKEDUT5
If a link cannot be established, a NO RESPONSE message is displayed.

b. Manual Calls to an Individual or Net

To place a manual call, enter the address followed by the channel number.
ALE> CALL UT5 10
CALLING UT5 CHANNEL: 10
LINKED UT5
If a link cannot be established, a NO RESPONSE message is displayed.

c. ALL!ANY Calls
If a call is placed to ALL or ANY, the radio responds as it would if the call were placed from the front
panel.

• To place an ALL call, type CALL ALL. Any station receiving the transmission links. No response
is transmitted during an ALL call, but a link is established.

• To place a SELECTIVE ALL call, type CALL ALL G (where G is any alphanumeric character).
Any station with a self address ending in the specified character, i.e., G, links. No response is
transmitted during an ALL call, but a link is established.

2·236
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

• To place an ANY call, type CALL ANY. Any station recognizing the transmission responds in 1 of
16 randomly-selected time slots.

• To place a SELECTIVE ANY call, type CALL ANY G (where G is any alphanumeric character).
Any station with a self address ending in G responds in one of 16 randomly selected time slots.

• To place a DOUBLE SELECTIVE ANY call, type CALL ANY GH (where GH represents any two
alphanumeric characters). Any station with a self address ending in those two characters responds
with an acknowledgement.
With ANY calls of any variety (non-selective, single character selective, or double character selective),
the receiving stations respond and the initiating station's radio displays each responding station, followed
by a transmission naming each receiving station that the initiating station heard.
If some of the ANY receiving stations respond, but their radio signals collide and the initiating station
does not detect them, these receiving stations do not become part of the group. Since the initiating
station's second transmission does not name them, they are not linked to the initiating station.
d. Wildcards
Wildcards are only possible from a terminal or computer connected at the radio's remote port. The
question mark (1) represents any alphanumeric character of an address. For example, CALL B3?6 calls
B376, B3Q6, and many more possible stations.
NOTE

For both ANY calls and wildcard calls, due to the response
duration required, addresses should not exceed nine characters.
An ANY call or wildcard call with over nine characters
(including the question mark) is rejected with the front panel
display of INV CALL TARGET signifying an invalid address.
2.8.4.5.3 Receiving a Call
The following display occurs when an incoming call or LQA request is received:
ALE> SIGNAL RECEIVED
RECEIVING CALL
KEY OFF
LINKED UT5 CHANNEL: 10

2-237
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
OPERATION

2.8.4.5.4 Initiating an LQA

The following paragraphs describe how to initiate scheduled LQAs and immediate LQAs using remote control.
a. Scheduled LQA
To initiate a scheduled EXCHANGE (two-way transmission) LQA between this station and either an
individual or net, the EXCHange STArt command is used.

• To schedule an EXCHANGE LQA, enter the EXCHange STArt command, followed by the
destination (individual or net) address, the interval time between exchanges (hours, minutes in
24-hour format), and the start time (hours, minutes in 24-hour format):

ALE> EXCH STA UNIT5 01:00 11:15

The above example schedules an EXCHANGE LQA to station UNIT5 starting at II: 15 and occurring at
one-hour intervals from the start time (that is, 12:15, 13:15, etc.).
To initiate a scheduled SOUND (one-way transmission) LQA, the SOUnd STArt command is used.

• To schedule a SOUND LQA, enter the SOUnd STArt command, followed by a self address, the
interval time between transmissions (hours, minutes in 24-hour format), and the start time (hours,
minutes in 24- hour format):

ALE> SOU STA BEN 00:30 13:25

The above example schedules a SOUND LQA using the self address BEN starting at 13:25 and occurring
at 3D-minute intervals from the start time (that is, 13:55. 14:25, etc.).
To remove a scheduled LQA, use the EXCHange STOP or SOUnd STOP commands and the address
scheduled with the appropriate LQA.

• To remove a scheduled EXCHANGE LQA, enter the EXCHange STOP command, followed by the
scheduled address (individual or net):

ALE> EXCH STOP UNIT5

• To remove a scheduled SOUND LQA, enter the SOUnd STOP command, followed by the
scheduled self address:

ALE> SOU STOP UNIT5

To immediately stop a currently transmitting LQA, type the SCAN command:

ALE> SCAN
The radio stops the current LQA and returns to scan operation.

2·238
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

b. Immediate LQA

Immediate one time EXCHANGE (two-way channel evaluation) and SOUND (one-way channel
evaluation) LQAs are possible using the same commands as described in the previous Scheduled LQA
paragraph, without entering the interval and start times.

• To start an immediate EXCHANGE LQA measurement:

ALE> EXCH STA UNIT5

• To start an immediate SOUND LQA measurement:

ALE> SOU STA UNIT5

• To stop a SOUND or EXCHANGE LQA, enter SCAN:

ALE> SCAN

The radio stops the current LQA and returns to scan operation.

• To view the LQA scores:

ALE> RANK UT5

RANKUT5

CHAN: 10 SCORE: 100 MEASURED SNR 30 RECEIVED SNR 30

CHAN: 03 SCORE: 100 MEASURED SNR 30 RECEIVED SNR 30
CHAN: 02 SCORE: 057 MEASURED SNR 14 RECEIVED SNR 12
CHAN: 07 SCORE: 056 MEASURED SNR 13 RECEIVED SNR 12
CHAN: 04 SCORE: 055 MEASURED SNR 13 RECEIVED SNR 11
CHAN: 08 SCORE: 052 MEASURED SNR 13 RECEIVED SNR 09
CHAN: 06 SCORE: 048 MEASURED SNR 13 RECEIVED SNR 07
CHAN: 05 SCORE: 045 MEASURED SNR 13 RECEIVED SNR 06
CHAN: 09 SCORE: - -- MEASURED SNR -- RECEIVED SNR --
CHAN: 01 SCORE: - -- MEASURED SNR -- RECEIVED SNR --

The LQA score indicates the relative quality of the channel with "- - -" representing a channel where no
valid measurement could be made and 100 representing the highest score. The Signal-to-Noise Ratio
(SNR) range is from "-" to 30 dB, with "-" representing a channel where no measure could be made
and 30 dB representing the highest SNR.

2-239
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.4.5.5 EOW

An EOW is a message typed from the remote port, while linked to another station. Unlike a typical data transfer,
an EOW has an acknowledgement sent back. The EOW function uses the data capability built into the ALE
controller.

To send an EOW, the following conditions must be met:

• The two stations are linked.

• An EOW can only be sent to one individual address (refer to Chapter 3, Paragraph 3.3.5, EOW
Destination).

• If a modem option is installed, the modem must be turned off.

To start/stop an EOW:

• The EOW is started by typing a Control-B (I\B) data control character.

• The EOW is stopped by typing a Control-C (AC) data control character.

The radio sends the EOW message in blocks of 300 characters each, until the last block is sent. Radio terminal
echo stops when the buffer is full, which would nonnally only occur for a file transfer.

Because of the error detection and ARQ, the message sender can be assured of the message transfer to the distant
station. The message transferred to the distant station is displayed on the tenninal anached to the remote port.
Note that the received station does not store the message.
2.8.4.5.6 AMD

The AMD function enables stations to communicate short messages or prearranged codes to any selected station
or stations. Up to ten messages (in buffers 0 to 9), each containing up to 87 characters, may be programmed. The
following commands entered from a tenninal connected to the remote port are used for programming and sending
AMD messages.
a. Transmit AMD Messages

• To program a message that can be sent, enter the TXMsg command, followed by the message buffer
number (0-9), and the message characters (up to 87 characters):

ALE> TXM 2 THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG

• To display all programmed transmit message buffers, enter the TXMsg command:

ALE>TXM

This displays all programmed transmit message buffers.

• To display a specific transmit message buffer, enter TXMsg and the message buffer number (0-9):

ALE>TXM6

This displays transmit message buffer six (6).

2-240
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
OPERATION

• To send a specific transmit message, enter the SEnd command, followed by the desired message
number, the destination address, and optional channel number. If channel number is not entered, the
radio determines the best channel to send the message:

ALE> SE 2 UNITS

This sends transmit message buffer 2 to station UNITS - the radio determines the
best channel to send the message.

ALE> SE I TIM 6

This sends transmit message buffer I to station TIM on channel 6.

b. Receive AMD Messages
When the AMD message is received, the receiving units display the message. The receiving station stores
the ten most recently received AMD messages and marks the messages with the time and date.

• To display all received message buffers, enter RXMsg.

ALE>RXM

• To display the most recently received AMD message, enter the RXMsg LASt command.

ALE> RXM LAS

• To display a specific receive message buffer, enter RXMsg and the message buffer number (0-9).

ALE>RXM6

This displays receive message buffer six.

2-241
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.4.6 ALE Example

Figure 2-37 is an example of remote programming and operation of ALE. This example indicates the minimum
steps necessary to program ALE to enable the system to start scanning. In the example, the commands are in
lower case and the ALE status/response is in upper case.

how Menu Comments

SSB > ale Command to enter ALE operating mode

Indicates ALE is installed

ALE> IN_PROG ALE is in program mode

ALE> SHOW Command to display currently programmed ALE parameters
LSTN OFF Listen Before Transmit is off
KEY_TO_CALL OFF Key To Call is off
RAD_SIL OFF Radio Silence is off
ALL_CALL ON Reception of ALL calls is enabled
ANY_CALL ON Reception of ANY calls is enabled
MAXCH 100 Maximum Channels Scanned is 100
TUNETIME 060 Maximum System Tune Time is 60 seconds
TIME_OUT 000 Link timeout is disabled
AMD_DISPLAY ON Display of Received AMDs is enabled

ALE> PRG 1-3 CHAR SLF Warning: ALE requires 1-3 character self address before ALE
operation can begin

ALE> SLFAD ABC 0 Program a self address of ABC and channel group 0

IND NOT PROGRMD Warning: ALE requires an individual address before ALE operation
can begin

ALE> INDAD XYZ 0 ABC Program an individual address of XYZ, channel group 0,
and associated self address of ABC

NO CHANS TO SCAN Warning: ALE requires a channel group programmed

with the channels to scan

ALE> CHG 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Program channel group 0 with channels 1-10

ALE> SCANNING ALE is scanning the channel group(s)

Figure 2-37. sample ALE Remote Programming and Operation Screen

2-242
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

2.8.5 Frequency Hopping Remote Control Operation

Full remote control operation and programming of the frequency hopping option is supported by the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter. The remote control commands, menus, status, and HELP screens are similar to those used
in SSB operation.
Commands may be entered individually from a terminal or downloaded from an ASCII text fIle.
2.8.5.1 Hop Show Menu
Entering SHOW provides a status listing of the frequency hopping option. The command is used to monitor
frequency-hopping operation and to confirm system configuration. Figure 2-38 shows a typical Show menu.

Show Menu Comments

HOP> show Command to display currently programmed HOP parameters
NET 00 Channel 00
KEY OFF Transceiver is unkeyed (receiving)
NETID 00 55555555 Network ID for 00 is 55555555
HOPTYPE 00 NB Network 00 is in a narrowband net
CENTER 00 10‫סס‬oo Network 00 center frequency is 10 MHz
HOPNUM0041 Unit hops on 41 frequencies
MODEM7DAT7 The modem is on
ENCRYPT ON Encryption is on
CUR_KEY 01 Encryption key selected is 01
POWER HI RF power output is set to maximum
NO_SYNC The unit is not currently synchronized with net

HOP> HOP mode prompt

Figure 2-38. Typical Frequency Hopping (with Hopset) Show Menu

2-243
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
OPERATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

2.8.5.2 Hop Help Menus

Entering HOP> HELP on the remote control data device provides a listing and structure of the frequency hopping
remote control commands. In addition to the Help menu, HOP provides help menus for modem and security
commands.
Entering ALE> HELP on the remote control data device provides a listing and structure of ALE remote control
commands. Figure 2-39 shows a typical Hop Help menu. Figure 2-40 shows a typical Hop Help Modem menu.
Figure 2-41 shows a typical Hop Help Security menu.

HOP> help
HOP Commands:
------------------------------------------------------------------------_.
ALE ALE Mode MODEM - see Help MODEM
DISplay all nets, (0..9) one net NEt (0..9)
ENCRypt - (ON/OFt) encryption NETId (0..9) (8-digit code)
ENC_KEY - (1..6) (12 digit key) POWer (LOW/MED/HI)
EXClude - (0..9) (low freq) (hi freq) PROGram - see HElp SECurity
EXClude - (0..9) DEL, remove excl band SELect see HElp SECurity
EXClude - DEL, remove all excl bands SHow show status
HOPUst (0..9) (ADD) (freq) ... SSb single channel mode
HOPUst (0..9) (DELete) (freq) ... SYnc sync request or response
HOPSet (0..9) (low freq) (hi freq) TIme (hh:mm:ss)
HOPSet (0..9) (center freq) USE_KEy - (1..6) encryption key
HOPSet (0..9) DELete ZEROize - clear radio memory
HOPTypc - (0..9) (WB/NBILIst)
-._-----------_._------------------------------------------.--------------
HOP>

Figure 2-39. Typical Hop Help Menu

2·244
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

HOP> help modem

Modem Commands:

Prefixed by MODEM:
OFf disable modem PREset show all modem presets
SHow show current modem info xxxx set modem to preset xxxx

Prefixed by MODEM PRESET n: where n = data preset number

ASync (REMote/DATa), async mode
DISable lockout the given preset
ENable enable the given preset
NAMe (xxxx) new preset name
SYnc sync mode
BAUd (75/150/300)

***capitalletters denote acceptable abbreviation

HOP>

Figure 2-40. Typical Hop Help Modem Menu

HOP> help security

HOP Security Commands:

LOCk prevents changes to the parameter type and UNLock allows changes.

The "SELect" commands control selecting or changing operational functions.

SELect ALL (LOCk/UNLock) all parameters
SELect DATa (LOCk/UNLock) data presets
SELect KEY (LOCk/UNLock) encryption keys

The "PROGram" commands control programming menu availability.

PROGram ALL (LOCk/UNLock) all parameters
PROGram DATa (LOCk/UNLock) data presets
PROGram EXClude (LOCk/UNLock) exclusion bands
PROGram NET (LOCk/UNLock) hopnet parameters
PROGram TX_Power (LOCk/UNLock) transmit power output

NOTE: These are front-panel commands that take effect after cycling power.

Figure 2-41. Typical Hop Help Security Menu

2-245
 mH AR RlS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
OPERATION

2.8.5.3 Synchronization Sequence

should be initiated. To initiate the
After programing frequency hopping operation, the synchronization sequence
NG_SYNC_REQ is then
synchronization sequence, the operator types SYNC at the HOP> prompt. SENDI
NG SYNC is displayed.
displayed at the remote control terminal. After sending the message, AWAm
at the remote control terminals of all
When a synchronization request is received, SYNC REQ RCV is displayed
command, causing the radio to
receiving units. The net coordinator then has five (5) seconds to type the SYNC
is displayed at the net coordinator's
send a Sync Response message. While the message is sent, RESP TO SYNC
ed at the net coordinator's terminal.
terminal. After the message transmission is completed, IN SYNC is display
If the Sync Response is received correctly by the slave unit, IN SYNC is
displayed. Otherwise, SYNC FAILED is
displayed.
2.8.5.4 Keying

The follOWing paragraphs describe remote control keying operation.

2.8.5.4.1 Data Transmission
is keyed/unkeyed for data
When the synchronous or asynchronous data interface is selected, the system
IN SYNC to be keyed. Data interface
transmission by activating/deactivating the RTS signal. The system must be
is selected as part of DATA PRESET programming.
system accepts data from the remote
Data may also be transmitted using the asynchronous remote interface. The
Control-B (I\B) character initiates
control terminal for transmission only when the system is IN SYNc. An ASCII
l-B (I\B) are interpreted as data for
a transmission. All characters received from the terminal following a Contro
d, the transmission is completed
transmission until Control-C ("C) is typed. When the Control-C ("C) is receive
and then the system is unkeyed.
2.8.5.4.2 Voice Transmission
keyline, or the MIC (microphone
For voice transmission, the system can be keyed and unkeyed via the audio
push-to-talk button) keyline.
OFF command from the remote
The system can also be keyed or unkeyed by entering the KEY ON or KEY
accepts voice audio for transmission
terminal (these can be abbreviated K ON and K OF). In this case, the system
from the front panel audio input.
2.8.5.5 Remote Serial Tone Modem Operation
ving state, and SNR are
When the serial tone modem acquires a signal, the baud rate, receive interlea
Figure 2-42.
automatically displayed on the R!f front panel. Refer to Table 2-109 and see

2·246
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION

Table 2·109. Front Panel Display - serial Tone Modem Indicators

Key
(Figure Indicator Function
2-42)
I Baud Rate Indicates the receive baud rate.
2 Interleaving State Indicates the receive interleaving state (short or long)
3 SIN Ratio Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio.

R31 758 +07

-REMOTE-
L- MOOe---! L-.. DAT~ L.- ENCR..---J L sa-l

MNPK-ll47

Figure 2-42. RIT Display When Serial Tone Modem Acquires a Signal

2-247
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
OPERATION

2.8.5.5.1 Remote Modem SNR Command (Slgnal-To-Nolse Ratio)

Table 2-110 provides the procedure to remotely determine the serial tone modem's SNR.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-110. Procedure to Determine serial Tone Modem SIN Ratio
Step Control Action Observe
1 Remote terminal Enter the command: The remote terminal displays
the serial tone modem's SNR:
SSB> modem sm
Modem SNR +07

2.8.5.5.2 Remote Modem SER Command (serial Tone Information)

Table 2-111 provides the procedure to remotely determine information about the serial tone modem.
NOTE
Sample screen displays are shown for the following procedure.
Actual screen displays may vary based on radio programming.
Table 2-111. Procedure to Determine Serial Tone Modem Information
Step Control Action Observe
1 Remote terminal Enter the command: The remote terminal displays
the serial tone modem's
SSB> modem ser information:

TY =Modem type
ST =Active modem state
TX =Transmit baud rate and
interleave state
RX =Receive baud rate and
interleave state
SNR =Signal-to-noise ratio

NOTE
This command is only valid when a serial tone preset is active.

2-248
:J)HARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 3

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3.1 INTRODUCTION
3.1.1 General
This chapter covers the functional description of the RF·5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System. Paragraph 3.2
gives the major level functional description, which covers the Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) that make up the
radio system. Refer to Chapter 5 for Built-In Test (BIT) and system troubleshooting information.
3.2 MAJOR FUNCTION LEVEL DESCRIPTION
3.2.1 General
For detailed interconnections, refer to Chapter 5 for the following:

• Figure 5-3 - BIT Signal Path Diagram

• Figure 5-4 - RF/IF/Audio Signal Path Diagram

• Figure 5-5 - Control Path Diagram

• Figure 5-6 - Power Distribution Diagram

The major function level description is divided into the following three signal paths:

• Radio Frequency (RF)/Intermediate Frequency (IF)/Audio Signal Path

• Control Path

• Power Distribution
The description of each signal type is further divided as each LRU relates to the signal path. Each signal type is
not present on every LRU, which will be apparent in the following paragraphs. Refer to Chapter 5, Paragraph 5.6,
for the BIT description.
3.2.2 RF/IFIAudio Signal Path
Refer to Chapter 5, Figure 5-4. The following paragraphs describe the functions of each LRU as they relate to the
transmit and receive signal paths in the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack Systems.
3.2.2.1 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter
The following paragraphs describe the RF/IF/audio signal path through the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter.
NOTE
The following paragraphs describe a Receiver-Transmitter (R{f)
using analog clear voice. The signal paths may change when
operating in other modes.

3-1
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3.2.2.1.1 Transmitter Functional Level Description

signal is routed from the Front
Audio enters the radio at the handset when it is keyed and spoken into. The audio
Proces sor Modul e for digitizing. The
Panel Module to the Analog-to-Digital (AID) converter on the Signal
es the digital representation of an
digitized audio is passed to the IF Digital Signal Processor (DSP), which generat
the digitized IF is converted into
IF. This signal then passes through a Digital-to-Analog (D/A) converter, where
sion to an RF signal.
an analog IF signal. This signal is passed to the Receiver/Exciter Module for conver
from the local oscillators on the
Mixing circuitry on the Receiver/Exciter Module mixes the IF signal with signals
to 59.9999 MHz. This RF
Synthesizer Module. The resulting RF signal is in the frequency range of 1.6 MHz
Amplifier/Battery Charger
signal is amplified to approximately 100 mW before being output to the Power
Module.
Module amplifies the 100 mW RF
When the Rtf is in the manpack configuration, the Amplifier/Battery Charger
ic filters to reduce the level of
signal to 20 watts. The 20 watt signal then passes through one of eight harmon
on the Antenna Coupler Module
unwanted harmonics. The 20 watt RF signal then passes through a tuning circuit
itted through the whip antenna.
before leaving the Rtf through the ANT connector. The RF signal is then transm
Receive (RX)/Power Amplifier
When the Rtf is in a vehicular configuration, the 100 mW RF signal follows the
then follows the coupler bypass path through
Bypass path through the Power Amplifier/Battery Charger Module,
tor and being passed to the external
the Antenna Coupler Module, before leaving the Rtf through the ANT connec
power amplifier.
3.2.2.1.2 Receiver Functional Level Description
of 1.6 MHz to 59.9999 MHz are
When the Rtf is in the manpack configuration, RF signals in the frequency range
pass through the tuning circuit
passed to the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter from the whip antenna. These signals
Amplifier/Battery Charger Module.
of the Antenna Coupler Module and one of the harmonic filters on the Power
receiver protection circuit on the
The RF signal then follows the RX/Power Amplifier Bypass path through the
ter Module.
Power Amplifier/Banery Charger Module before being routed to the Receiver/Exci
of 1.6 MHz to 59.9999 MHz are
When the Rtf is in a vehicular configuration, RF signals in the frequency range
These signals follow the coupler
passed to the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter from the external power amplifier.
through one of the harmonic
bypass path through the Antenna Coupler Module. The receive signal then passes
the RX/Power Amplifier
filters on the Power Amplifier/Battery Charger Module. The RF signal then follows
ery Charger Module before being
Bypass path through the receiver protection circuit on the Power Amplifier/Ban
routed to the Receiver/Exciter Module.
oscillators on the Synthesizer
The RF signal follows the RX path before being mixed with signals from the local
representation of the IF signal by
Assembly. The result is an IF signal. The IF signal is then converted to a digital
this signal to the IF DSP, which
the AID converter on the Signal Processor Module. The AID converter passes
process ed by the DIA converter, which creates
removes the IF components of the signal. The digital signal is then
Assembly, where it is routed to the
an analog audio signal. The analog audio then passes through the Front Panel
handset.
32PA-125E 125 Watt Power
3.2.2.2 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler, RF-50
Amplifier, and RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier
0PA-20E 20 Watt Power
When transmitting, low-power RF signals from the RIf's exciter enter the RF-503
connector, or the RF-5033PA-150
Amplifier or the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier through its 112
150 Watt Power Amplifier through its 11 connector.
of accepting the low-power
RF amplification takes place on the Power Amplification module, which is capable
signal that is sent to the Harmonic
signal from the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and producing a high-power
Filter module.

3-2
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

The Hannonic Filter module filters hannonic signals from the transmitted signal. This module consists of seven
filters (125 watt power amplifier), eight filters (20 watt power amplifier), or nine filters (150 watt power
amplifier), one of which is switched into the signal path depending on the frequency selected. The high-power
transmitted signal then passes through a bandpass filter. The transmit RF exits the power amplifier through the
JIl connector (125 watt power amplifier and 150 watt power amplifier) or the ANT connector (20 watt power
amplifier) before being passed to the antenna coupler (High Frequency [HFJ frequencies), or exits the power
amplifier through the 18 connector to a broadband Very High Frequency (VHF) antenna (VHF frequencies - 150
watt power amplifier only).
When receiving HF frequencies, RF signals are passed to the power amplifier via the antenna coupler. These
signals enter the power amplifier through its III connector (125 watt power amplifier and 150 watt power
amplifier) or the ANT connector (20 watt power amplifier). The receiver protection circuitry on the Receiver
Protection Module senses and reacts to high RF signals during receive operation. It disconnects the signal path if
an abnonnally high level is sensed in the receive path. When receiving VHF frequencies (150 watt configuration
only), the RF signals from the VHF broadband antenna are passed to the power amplifier directly from the
antenna. These VHF signals enter the power amplifier through its 18 connector (150 watt power amplifier only).
The RF signals follow the RX bypass path around the Transmit (TX) amplifier, then pass through one of the
hannonic filters. These RF receive signals then leave the power amplifier through its JI2 connector
(RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier and RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier) or 11 connector
(RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier) and are passed to the Rtf.
3.2.2.3 RF-382 Antenna Coupler
When transmitting, high-power RF signals from the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier or the
RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier enter the RF-382 Antenna Coupler through its JI connector.
The RF signals to be transmitted are passed to the Discriminator Module, where the following infonnation is
generated and sent to the Control Module:

• Forward and reflected power

• Frequency

• Phase

• Conductance
The RF signal is then sent to the RF/Coil Pack Module, which incorporates all the inductors and capacitors
necessary to tune the antenna coupler. Tuning is accomplished by selectively shorting and unshorting coils and
capacitors in the signal path. The RF signals to be transmitted leave the antenna coupler through its El connector
and are passed to the antenna.
When receiving, RF signals from the antenna enter the antenna coupler through its E1 connector. These signals
leave the antenna coupler through its JI connector and are passed to the power amplifier.
3.2.3 Control Paths
Refer to Chapter 5, Figure 5-5. This figure illustrates the control paths that exist between the RfT, the power
amplifier, and the antenna coupler. The control paths are where the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter interacts with
an external power amplifier and antenna coupler.

3-3
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3.2.3.1 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter to Power Amplifier Control Lines

iers automatically respond to control
The RF-5030PA-20E, RF-5032PA-125E, and RF-5033PA-150 Power Amplif
of the power amplifier.
inputs from the Rtf. The Rtf also monitors the presence and operational status
3.2.3.2 Power Amplifier to RF-382 Antenna Coupler Control Lines
amplifier. Coupler status and
Control information is passed from the Rtf to the antenna coupler via the power
fault information is relayed back to the Rtf.
3.2.4 Power Distribution Paths

3.2.4.1 General
Vdc to the radio system LRUs.
Refer to Chapter 5, Figure 5-6. Power distribution consists of distributing +26.4
3.2.4.2 Direct Current (DC) Voltage Distribution
system enters the power amplifier
+26.4 Vdc from the external power supply or the vehicular alternator!battery
. The power amplifier and
through its 110 connector, where it is distributed to the Rtf and the antenna coupler
antenna coupler are automatically powered ON and OFF by the Rtf.

3-4
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 4

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
4.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Preventive maintenance is the systematic, daily care and inspection of equipment to prevent equipment failure and
reduce downtime.
Table 4-1 contains the checks and services that should be performed either on a daily basis when the equipment is
in use or on a weekly basis when the equipment is in a standby condition. Table 4-2 contains the checks and
services that should be performed on a weekly basis.
Table 4-1. Dally Preventive Maintenance Checks and services
Check No. Item to be Inspected Procedure
1 Completeness Check to see that the equipment is complete.
2 Exterior Surfaces Remove dust, dirt, and moisture from all surfaces and clean
front panel display window with a soft cloth.
3 Controls Check all controls for looseness or damage; check mechanical
action of each control for smooth operation.
4 Batteries Inspect batteries for leakiness or corrosion.
5 Operation Perform self-test.

Table 4-2. Weekly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

Check No. Item to be Inspected Procedure
I Battery Condition Remove battery case from Receiver-Transmitter (Rtf) and
check batteries for corrosion or leakage. Clean or replace as
required.
2 Connectors Check all connectors for debris, damage, or corrosion. Elevate
to a higher level of maintenance if required.
3 Antenna Check for breaks or strains; repair or replace as required.

4-1/4-2
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

CHAPTER 5

TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 INTRODUCTION

5.1.1 General

This chapter provides troubleshooting data necessary for fault isolation to the Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) level.

5.1.2 Scope of this Chapter

See Figure 5-1. The procedures presented in this chapter assume that a Level I fault has led the maintainer to
suspect a fault with the radio system. The maintainer begins the troubleshooting process by using the maintenance
tum-on procedure to find a Receiver-Transmitter (RIf) fault indication that identifies the faulty LRU. If there is a
non-Built-In Test (non-BIT) fault, the maintainer will use the non-BIT troubleshooting procedures. If there is a
BIT fault, the maintainer will use the BIT troubleshooting procedures. When the problem is found and corrected,
the radio system is returned to operational readiness.

MAINTENANCE TURN-QN
PROCEDURE
(PARAGRAPH 5.2.2)

NON·BIT
BIT TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
(PARAGRAPH 5.2.4)
(PARAGRAPH 5.2.3)

YES

TROUBLESHOOTING
INDEX
(PARAGRAPH 5.3.2)

SWAP UNITS AND

CABLES AS NECESSARY

RETURN SYSTEM TO
OPERATIONAL READINESS
5OOOE-<104

Figure 5-1. Troubleshooting Process Used In this Chapter

5-1
 mH AR RIS
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

5.2.1 General
maintenance tum-on procedure
Troubleshooting begins with perfonning the maintenance tum-on procedure. The
references the non-BIT and BIT troubleshooting procedures.
5.2.2 Maintenance Turn-On Procedure
maintenance tum-on procedure is
Table 5-1 provides the maintenance tum-on procedure for the radio system. The
power up the radio system from a
used to guide the maintainer through the proper RIT front panel settings to
d~-energized state to a fully operational state. In each step
the maintainer is to observe the radio system for
ation. BIT faults for all units are
nonnal operating conditions. Faults may be observed by BIT or a visual observ
-step procedure. The second
displayed on the RIT's front panel. The first column in Table 5-1 gives the step-by
referen ces the procedure to follow if the
column gives the expected nonnal observation, and the third column
shootin g and non-BIT
expected nonnal observation is not found. These references include BIT trouble
troubleshooting.
Table 5-1. Maintenance Turn-On Procedure
Step Observe Reference

a If installed in the 20 watt or

125 watt vehicular configura-
tion, toggle ON/OFF switch
on power converter (if
installed) and power supply
(if installed) to ON position.
If installed in the 150 wan
configuration, power on the
Power Amplifier (PA).
b. Tum the RIT FUNCfION The RIT displays an initialization Refer to the non-BIT trouble-
knob clockwise from OFF screen, followed by the same dis- shooting procedures in Paragraph
position to Single Sideband playas when it was last used in 5.2.3.
(SSB) position. SSB mode.
c. Tum the R/f FUNCfION The R/f displays an initialization Refer to Chapter 2, Operation.
knob clockwise from SSB screen, followed by the following
position to TEST position. screen:

TEST VERSION
VSWR BATTERY
d. Press and release the ENTER The R/f displays the following Refer to Chapter 2, Operation.
key. screen:

** SELF TEST **
* IN PROGRESS *

5-2
;:OHARRS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 5-1. Maintenance Turn-On Procedure - Continued

Step Observe Reference
If a BIT fault is generated on the Refer to the BIT troubleshooting
R/T front panel, write down the procedures in Paragraph 5.2.4.
fault code.
If no errors occur during BIT, the If a run-time fault is generated, re-
R/T displays the following screen: fer to the non-BIT troubleshooting
procedures in Paragraph 5.2.3.
SELF TEST DONE
** NO ERRORS ** If no run-time fault is generated,
return radio system to operational
Continue operating the radio sys- readiness.
tern in an attempt to generate a
run-time fault

5-3
 mH AR RIS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.2.3 Troubleshooting with Non-BIT Fault Isolation

ce to the recommended action

Table 5-2 is a list of the non-BIT fault symptoms. Next to the symptom is a referen
the top of the figure from left to
that should be taken. When the action is to see a specific figure and sheet, follow
follow from top to bottom for the
right to fmd the symptom observed. Once the symptom is found on the figure,
to the troubleshooting index in
checks and corrective action. If the actions do not correct the problem, proceed
Paragraph 5.3.2.

Table 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Symptoms

Symptom Observed Action

Faults that Generate a Message on RIT Front Panel

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
ALE NOT INSTALLED Remove and replace RfI'.
CHANNEL BUSY Change channels.
CHANNEL DATA STORAGE FAILURE Remove and replace RfI'.
COUPLER BYPASS This indicates that the BNC Radio Fre-
quency (RF) output connector (HI
AUX) has been selected as the RF
OUTPUT during the auto tune se-
quence. No action required.
COUPLER COMM FAULT See Figure 5-2, sheet 1.
COUPLER FAULT See Figure 5-2, sheet 1.
COUPLER OVEKfEMP See Figure 5-2, sheet 1.
COUPLER WARNING See Figure 5-2, sheet 2.
EOW DESTINATION ONLY WHEN LINKED Establish link with target station before
transmitting Engineering Order Wire
(EOW) message.
EOW NOT ALLOWED Establish link with target station before
entering EOW destination address.
**ERROR** Check syntax of command entered at
remote tenninal and re-enter command.
HIGH DC INPUT See Figure 5-2, sheet 2.
HIGHVSWR See Figure 5-2, sheet 2.
INCORRECT PASSWORD ENTERED Check password and re-enter.
IND NOT PROGRMD Program at least one individual address.
INTERNAL COMM FAULT Remove and replace Rtf.
INTRVAL TIME ERR Enter avalid Automatic Link Establish-
ment (ALE) time interval.
INV CALL TARGET Program at least one individual address.
INV CHAN GROUP Program a new channel group, or use a
pre-programmed channel group.
INV CHAN NUMBER Make sure channel number entered is
no higher than 99.

5-4
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Symptoms - Continued

Symptom Observed Action

INV IND ADDRESS Make sure individual address entered is
no more than 15 characters long, and
has only alphanumeric characters.
INVMAXSCAN Make sure number of scan channels is
no higher than 99.
INV MEMBER ADDR Make sure addresses being added to net
are programmed self or individual ad-
dresses.
INV NET ADDRESS Make sure net address entered is no
more than 15 characters long, and has
only alphanumeric characters.
INV RANK REQUEST Make sure address being ranked is a net
address, not an individual address.
INV SELF ADDRESS Make sure self address entered is no
more than 15 characters long, and has
only alphanumeric characters.
INV TIME OF DAY Make sure time of day being pro-
grammed is no higher than 23:59.
INVTIMEOUT Make sure link timeout being pro-
grammed is no higher than 60 minutes.
INV TUNE TIME Make sure tune time entered is no less
than 1 and no greater than 60.
LOWBATfERY See Figure 5-2, sheet 3.
LOW DC INPUT See Figure 5-2, sheet 3.
NET TABLE FULL Make sure no more than 20 net address-
es are programmed into the R/f.
NO CHANS IN GRP Program a channel group.
NO CHANS TO SCAN Program a channel group.
NO ENCRYPTION KEYS PROGRAMMED Program encryption keys, or use analog
clear voice.
NOPA See Figure 5-2, sheet 3.
NO SYNC *BAD HOPSET* Make sure frequency parameters pro-
grammed for the currently selected
channel are valid. For wideband nets.
make sure the difference between the
upper and lower boundary frequencies
is no more than 2 MHz.
NO SYNC *INVALID HOPSET* Make sure the frequency list for the list
net contains at least 15 frequencies.
Also make sure the difference between
the upper and lower boundary frequen-
cies is no more than 2 MHz.
NO SYNC LIST INVALID Reprogram the frequency hopping pa-
rameters, or select a non-list net.

5-5
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Symptoms - Continued

Symptom Observed Action

Reprogram the frequency hoppin g pa-
NO SYNC *NO HOPSE T*
rameters.
Reprogram the Net Identification (ID)
NO SYNC *NO NET 10*
parameters, or the frequency hoppin g
parameters.
Select a narrow band net, or reprogram
NO SYNC WIDE BAND INVAL
the frequency hoppin g parameters.
See Figure 5-2, sheet 3.
OUT OF LOCK
PA BAD FILTER See Figure 5-2, sheet 4.
See Figure 5-2, sheet 4.
PA COMM FAULT
PA OVER CURR ENT See Figure 5-2, sheet 4.
See Figure 5-2, sheet 4.
PAOV ERTEM P
PAWA RNING See Figure 5-2, sheet 4.
POWE R CUTB ACK Self-correcting warning. No action re-
quired.
PREPO ST OPEN RF SWITC H OVLD An input signal has exceed ed the over-
load threshold of the Pre/Postselector.
1\me the Pre/po stselec tor to anothe r
frequency. Check for cabling errors to
the Pre/Postselector. Check for large,
out-of-band signals.
PRG 1-3 CHAR SLF Program the default self address with
one to three characters.
PROG NOT ALLO WED Make sure Rtf is not in a linked state.
PROG RAM REVIE W ADR ALREADY QUED Address is already queued. No action
required.
PROG RAM REVIE W NO LQA IN SILENT Rtf cannot be progra mmed when in si-
lence mode. No action required.
RECEIVING AMD Rtf is currently receiving an automatic
message display. No action required.
RECEI VING CALL Rtf is currently receiving a call. No ac-
tion required.
REPLA CE BAlTE RY See Figure 5-2, sheet 5.
SELF INDIV IDUAL IND TABLE FULL Delete unused individual addresses.
SELF INDIV IDUAL INV ASSOC SELF Program a new self address.
SELF INDIV IDUAL RESERVED ADDRESS Make sure the selfor individual address
does not contain the words ALL or
ANY:
SELF INDIV IDUAL SELF TABLE FULL Make sure no more than 20 selfaddress-
es are programmed into the Rtf.
SIGNA L RECEI VED R/f has received an incoming call or
Link Quality Analysis (LQA) request.
No action required.

5-6
11 HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Symptoms - Continued

Symptom Observed Action

START TIME ERROR Verify correct time and reprogram.
TEMP FAULT See Figure 5-2, sheet 5.
TERMINATING LINK Station is tenninating ALE link. No ac-
tion required.
TUNE FAULT See Figure 5-2, sheet 5.
TUNE MARGINAL See Figure 5-2, sheet 5.
Miscellaneous Fault Symptoms
No power See Figure 5-2, sheet 6.
Poor receive sensitivity See Figure 5-2, sheet 7.
Transmitted signal not received See Figure 5-2, sheet 7.
Continuous tone in handset See Figure 5-2, sheet 8.

5-7
 !JH AR RlS
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.2.4 Troubleshooting with BIT

module. Even though faults AOl
Table 5-3 lists the BIT faulted module codes and the suspected faulty unit and
as a unit. After each unit
through AIO identify a specific module within the RIf, replace the entire R/T
ted. If the actions do not correct the
replacement, execute BIT to see whether the original fault has been elimina
problem, proceed to the troubleshooting index in Paragraph 5.3.2.
Table 5-3. Radio System Fault Codes

Module Number Suspected Unit/Module

AOl IIT-I694 Receiver-Transmitter!
Interface or Encryption Module
A03 IIT-I694 Receiver-Transmitter!
Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) Vocoder Module
A04 IIT-I694 Receiver-Transmitter!
Signal Processor Module
A05 IIT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter!
Receiver/Exciter Module
A06 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter!
Reference Generator!Synthesizer Module
A08 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter!
Power AmplifierlHannonic Filter Module
A09 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter!
Coupler Module
AIO RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter!
Front Panel Module
A30· Attached Power Amplifier*
amplifier input
* Before replacing the power amplifier due to an A30 F05 fault, ensure that power
the problem with the
voltage is 23 Vdc to 30 Vdc. If input voltage is not within this range, correct
. For infonnation
power supply, power converter, or altemator!battery system (vehicular station)
regarding test equipment. referto Chapter 1, Table 1-21.

5-8
 Em HARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MAN PACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

NON·BIT NO NO NO
FAULT DETECTED

TO
SHEET 2

RETUNE RUN BIT AND UNKEY AND ALLOW

RJT AND CHECKVSWR" COUPLER TO COOL
REKEY

CHECK OR CHECK OR REPLACE ENSURE COUPLER IS

REPLACE CABLING CABLING, ANTENNA, WELL VENTILATED AND NOT
AND COUPLER AND COUPLER EXPOSED TO DIRECT SUNLIGHT

YES

NO REMOVE AND REPLACE

COUPLER

YES

TO
SHEETS

~-~--~_---L---~----.-.8
MNPK-022
SHEET 1OF8
"NOTE: IF BIT FAULT IS GENERATED, PROCEED TO BIT
TROUBLESHOOTING (PARAGRAPH 5.2.4). Figure 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Logic
Diagram (Sheet 1 of 8)

5-9/5-10
 IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

NO NO NO

TO
SHEET3

RETUNE NO
RIT AND RETUNE RIT
REMOVE AND REPLACE
REKEY AND REKEY
POWER AMPLIFIER

NO CHECK OR REPLACE
NO CHECK OR CORRECT PROBLEM WITH ANTENNA,CABlES, AND
REPLACE CABLING POWER CONVERTER, COUPLER
AND COUPLER POWER SUPPLY, OR VEHICLE
ALTERNATOR/BATTERY
SYSTEM
YES

YES

TO
SHEET 8

t...------L-----L----~------..1...--~,0
Figure 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Logic
Diagram (Sheet 2 of 8)
MNPK-022
SHEET20F 8

5-11/5-12
 ;JHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

NO NO

NO REMOVE AND REPLACE

RUN BIT' RUN BI1*
RJT

CHECK OR
REMOVE AND REPLACE
REPLACE POWER AMPLIFIER
REMOVE AND REPLACE AND CABLES
RIT
BAITERIES
(MANPACK CONFIGURATION)
OR FIX POWER SOURCE
(VEHICULAR CONFIGURATION)
NO

CHECK OR REPLACE YES

NO POWER SUPPLY REMOVE AND REPLACE
AND POWER POWER AMPLIFIER
CONVERTER

YES

TO
SHEETS

'NOTE: IF BIT FAULT IS GENERATED, PROCEED TO BIT MNPK·022

TROUBLESHOOTING (PARAGRAPH 5.2.4). SHEET30F 8

Figure 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Logic

Diagram (Sheet 3 of 8)

5-13/5-14
 mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

NO

TO
SHEET 5

UNKEY AND ALLOW RETUNE RIT

POWER AMPUFIER TO COOL AND REKEY

CONFIRM THAT POWER NO

RUN AMPUFIER
BI1"* IS WELL VENTILATED AND
NOT IN DIRECT SUNUGHT

YES

RUN
BI1"*

CHECK OR NO
REPLACE POWER AMPUFIER
AND CABLES

YES

CHECK OR
REMOVE AND REPLACE
REPLACE CABUNG t
POWER AMPUFIER
PAt AND COUPLER

TO
SHEET 8

"NOTE: IF BIT FAULT IS GENERATED, PROCEED TO BIT

TROUBLESHOOTING (PARAGRAPH 5.2.4).
Figure 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Logic
MNPK·022 Diagram (Sheet 4 of 8)
SHEET 40F 8

5-15/5-16
 I) HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

NO

NO UNKEY AND ALLOW RETUNE RIT

REMOVE AND REPLACE
POWER AMPUFIER TO COOL AND REKEY
RJT

NO CONFIRM THAT R/T NO

REMOVE AND REPLACE
BATIERIES IS WELL VENTILATED AND
(MANPACK CONFIGURATION) NOT IN DIRECT SUNUGHT
OR FIX POWER SOURCE
(VEHICULAR CONFIGURATION)

YES
YES

NO CHECK OR NO
REPLACE POWER SUPPLY
AND POWER CONVERTER

YES YES

CHECK OR
REMOVE AND REPLACE REMOVE AND REPLACE REPLACE ANTENNA CABLES
POWER AMPLIFIER RIT AND COUPLER

TO
SHEET 8

MNPK-022
Figure 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Logic
SHEET 50F 8 Diagram (Sheet 5 of 8)

5-17/5-18
 mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

NO

TO
SHEET 7

NO NO NO REMOVE AND REPLACE

RJT

YES YES

NO REMOVE AND REPLACE REMOVE AND REPLACE

REMOVE AND REPLACE
24 VDC FILTER/ADAPTER POWER AMPUFIER
RIT ASSY

CHARGE OR
REPLACE CHECK OR
BATTERIES NO REPLACE POWER SUPPLY,
POWER CONVERTER, AND
VEHICULAR ALTERNATORI
BATTERY SYSTEM

YES

TO
SHEETS

Figure 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Logic

Diagram (Sheet 6 of 8)
MNPK-022
SHEET 6 OF 8

5-19/5-20
 mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

NO NO

TO
SHEET 8

CHECK OR
REPLACE CHECK OR REPLACE
ANTENNA HANDSET

NO
CHECK OR REPLACE
NO ANTENNA
REMOVE AND REPLACE
RIT

YES YES
NO
REMOVE AND REPLACE
RIT

NO
REMOVE AND REPLACE
POWER AMPLIFIER
YES
NO
YES

YES REMOVE AND REPLACE

PA

TO
SHEET 8

Figure 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Logic

MNPK-022
Diagram (Sheet 7 of 8)
SHEET70F8

5-21/5-22
 mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

NO

CHECK FUNCTION
KNOB
POSITION NO PROCEED TO
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX
(PARAGRAPH 5.3.2).
DETERMINE FUNCTIONAL AREA
OF FAULT

YES

RETURN
NO SYSTEM TO
REMOVE AND REPLACE OPERATIONAL READINESS
RIT

YES

FROM
SHEETS
1-7
Figure 5-2. Non-BIT Fault Logic
Diagram (Sheet 8 of 8)
MNPK-022
SHEET 8 OF 8

5-23/5-24
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING SUPPORT DATA

5.3.1 Protective Device Index
Refer to Table 5-4 for the unit-level the protective device index.
Table 5-4. Protective Device Index
Reference Panel Marking Circuit
Unit Designation orlD Protected
Rf-1694 Receiver-Transmitter None accessible - -
at this level
RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt None accessible - -
Power Amplifier at this level
RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt CBl CBl Entire Unit
Power Amplifier
RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt CBl CBl Entire Unit
Power Amplifier
24 Vdc Filter/Adapter CBl CBl Entire Unit
Assembly CB2 CB2 Entire Unit
RF-382 Antenna Coupler None accessible - -
at this level
RF·5055PS AC/DC Power CBl CBI Entire Unit
Supply CB2 CB2 Entire Unit
RF-5056PS De/DC Power None accessible - -
Convener at this level
RF-505IPS-125 Power None accessible - -
Supply at this level

5.3.2 Troubleshooting Index

Table 5-5 is the troubleshooting index for the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack Systems. Use the
troubleshooting index if the actions in the non-BIT troubleshooting (paragraph 5.2.3) or the BIT troubleshooting
(paragraph 5.2.4) procedures do not correct the problem. The functional areas are listed in the left column of
Table 5-5. The second column references the functional block diagrams for each functional area. A reference for
the text description for each functional area is provided in column three. Analyze the information for each
functional area, and determine which units and cables affect each functional area in an attempt to isolate the
problem to an LRU.
The information contained in this manual complies with the requirements specified for Level II maintenance.

5-25
 mH AR RIS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 5·5. Troubleshooting Index

Functional
Signal Path Description
Functional Area Diagram Paragraph

BIT Signal Path 5-3 5.6

RF Signal Path 5-4 3.2.2
Control Path 5-5 3.2.3
Power Distribution 5-6 3.2.4

5.4 TROUBLESHOOTING DIAGRAMS

5.4.1 General
Troubleshooting diagrams include the following:

• BIT Signal Path Diagram

• RF Signal Path Diagram

• Control Path Diagram

• Power Distribution Diagram

5.4.2 BIT Signal Path Diagram
tested, and the BIT faults that
Figure 5-3 is the BIT signal path diagram. This diagram shows units that are
identify those units.
5.4.3 RF Path Diagram
t with RF signals.
Figure 5-4 is the RF signal path diagram. This diagram shows units that interac
NOTE

In the manpack system configuration, a whip antenna is

connected directly to the R/I"s ANT connector. There is no
external power amplifier or external antenna coupler in the
manpack configuration.

5-26
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
TROUBLESHOOTING

5.4.4 Control Path Diagram

Figure 5-5 is the control path diagram. This diagram shows the flow of control and data signals between the Rtf,
the power amplifier, and the antenna coupler.
NOTE

In the manpack system configuration, a whip antenna is

connected directly to the Rtf's ANT connector. There is no
external power amplifier or external antenna coupler in the
manpack configuration.
NOTE

For control path infonnation for vehicular configurations

utilizing the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Assembly, refer to Chapter 8,
Figures 8-24 and 8-25.
5.4.5 Power Distribution Diagram

Figure 5-6 is the power distribution diagram. This diagram shows the paths of the power supply Direct Current
(DC) voltages to the radio system units.

NOTE

In the manpack system configuration, a whip antenna is

connected directly to the Rff's ANT connector. There is no
external power amplifier or external antenna coupler in the
manpack configuration.
NOTE

For power distribution infonnation for vehicular configurations

utilizing the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Assembly, refer to Chapter 8,
Figures 8-24 and 8-25.

5-27
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRlS
TROUBLESHOOTING RF COMMUNICATIONS

RT-1694
RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER

EXTERNAL EXTERNAL
POWER AMPLIFIER ANTENNA COUPLER

D
®Q
M ..

RF-5056PS
DClDC POWER CONVERTER

KEY

RFSIGNALS

..;';';"';':';""+'':'''4 CONTROL SIGNALS

DC POWER

RF-5055PS
ACiDC POWER SUPPLY

MNPK-Q23(Bj

Figure 5-3. BIT Signal Path Diagram

5-28
 I) HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

ANTENNA COUPLER PAiBATTERY CHARGER RECEIVER/EXCITER SIGNAL PROCESSOR

...
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE
RECEIVER AUDIO/
COUPLER RXIPA RX FILL
l1IIIlIlIl PROTECTION
BYPASS PATH BYPASS PATH PATH MIXING
CIRCUIT
CIRCUITRY
@
,
100mW D/A AID ANALOG FRONT PANEL
ANT
./ .AMP
/
® I-t
RFSIGNAL RFSIGNAL IF CONVERTER AUDIO
TUNING HARMONIC CONVERTER IF MODULE r
..[ J BIll II ~ ~
~
(TX)
CIRCUIT FILTERS
f------ DSP
------
(TX) L- ~

'"
AID D/A
CONVERTER CONVERTER
I (RX) (RX) HANDS ET
I

LOCAL
SYNTHESIZER OSCILLATORS
MODULE (3)
RT-1694
RECEIVER-TRANSMITTER

r h i
L- ~ iii
J1 (150 WATT PA) III
J12 (20 WATT PA

~o/
AND 125 WATT PA) RX
BYPASS
PATH
KEY
AMPLIFIER MODULE
t:w··.w··i·!·····!···:·gj RFIIF SIGNALS
ANALOG AUDIO
I I DIGITAL DATA lIIII
BAND
1 -------
BAND
2
!IlII
BAND
3
lIIII
BAND
4
I
BAND IBANDI BAND
567
..-...L- I
BAND
8
•
IBAgND

lIIII --.-- III

• 11III --.--- ill II
HARMONIC FILTER MODULE

HF
ANTENNA RXPATH TX PATH

RECEIVER BANDPASS
RF-382 ANTENNA COUPLER PROTECTION FILTER
CIRCUITRY
•
E1
., RF/COIL PACK MODULE
ANALOG r
J1 RECEIVER

~ ..J SIGNAL GENERATION

L 0- PROTECTION MODULE

~ T
CIRCUITRY MNPK-o 19

~~
EXTERNAL

V
POWER AMPLIFIER
Figure 5-4. RF/IF/Audlo
rh DISCRIMINATOR MODULE J11 L,.J L,.J J8
(150 WATT PA ONLY)
VHF
VHF
BROADBAND
Signal Path Diagram
HF ANTENNA

5-29/5-30
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

J8 (20 WAIT PA AND 125 WAIT PA)

J2(150WAIT PA)
J9 "
~ HOP CLOCK .....- I-- CPLR THERMAL FAULT
J2 "
r--

PA CONTROL DATA KEYHOLDIFAULT

PA POWER ON COUPLER FAULT

PA FEEDBACK KEYUNE
r-- '---
TUNE POWER REO
RT-1694 RF·5030PA·20E RF-382
RECEIVER- OR ANTENNA
TRANSMIITER RF·5032PA·125E RECHANNEL
OR COUPLER"
RF·5033PA·150 BYPASS
POWER AMPLIFIER
HOP CLOCK

PA CONTROL DATA

KEY DISABLE
..- '---

MNPK-a20

" THESE ITEMS DO NOT APPLY TO SYSTEMS

WITH THE RF·5030PA·20E
POWER AMPLIFIER/COUPLER.

Figure 5·5. Control Path Diagram

5-31
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
TROUBLESHOOTING RF COMMUNICATIONS

J9 *
(125 WATT PA AND
150WATTPA)
PA
r- RlT28V RTN -J8 r - GND
J2 *
r-
E E D A
RlT28V RTN +28 V SWITCHED
F F F H
+28 VDC +28 V SWITCHED
J J M I
+28VDC
K K
'--- - RF·5030PA·20E
'--- '---
RT·1694
RECEIVER· OR RF-382*
TRANSMITTER RF·5032PA·125E ANTENNA COUPLER
OR
RF·5033PA·1SO
POWER AMPLIFIER

8~ ~8
a: a:
C:>
i3N
+
>:
CIO
N
CIO N
N +

I ABC D EI J10
MNPK·021

TO EXTERNAL
POWER SUPPLY OR +28 VDC VEHICULAR
ALTERNATOR/BATTERY SYSTEM

* THESE ITEMS DO NOT APPLY TO SYSTEMS

WITH THE RF-5030PA·20E
POWER AMPLIFIER/COUPLER.

Figure 5-6. Power Distribution Diagram

5-32
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

5.5 INTERCONNECT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

5.5.1 General

Figure 5-7 is the interconnect schematic diagram for a typical 20 watt vehicular radio system configuration.
Figure 5-8 is the interconnect schematic diagram for a typical 125 watt vehicular radio system configuration.
Figure 5-9 is the interconnect schematic diagram for a typical 150 watt vehicular radio system configuration.
Because the manpack configuration is self-contained, there is no interconnect schematic diagram for the manpack
configuration.

TO RJT·PA
HANDSET RT-1694 COAX CABLE
RECEIVER.
TRANSMITTER

TO
GROUND

RJT - PA CONTROL CABLE

J12

IF"

RF·5030PA-20E RF-5030PA·20E
REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW
TOGND

TO De
POWER SOURCE

MNPK-Q41

Figure 5·7. 20 Watt Vehicular System Interconnect SChematic Diagram

5-33
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;JjHARRlS
TROUBLESHOOTING RF COMMUNICATIONS

*NOTE: ANTENNA IS
CONNECTED TO
OPPOSITE SIDE OF
RF-382 ANTENNA
TO RJT·PA COUPLER.
HANDSET RT·1694 COAX CABLE
RECEIVER·
TRANSMITTER

TO
GROUND

RJT·PA
CONTROL CABLE

RF-382
ANTENNA COUPLER* RF·5032PA·125E
POWER AMPLIFIER

D
PA-cOUPLER
CONTROL CABLE
DC
POWER CABLE

TO
GROUND
PA-cOUPLER
COAX CABLE

TO
GROUND
RF·50SSPS
AC/DC
POWER SUPPLY RF·5056PS
DClDC
POWER CONVERTER

DC TO
POWER CABLE VEHICLE
AC TOAC ALTERNATOR/BATTERY
POWER CABLE POWER SOURCE SYSTEM

MNPK-001A

Figure 5-8. 125 Watt Vehicular System Interconnect Schematic Diagram

5-34
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

RfT·PA
COAX CABLE

TO FRONT
GROUND VIEW

HANDSET
EXTERNAL
POWER AMPLIFIER

EXTERNAL
POWER AMPLIFIER PA-eOUPLER
CONTROL CABLE

--,..-...-+-----------------.
-..-
@

ac_ ........
o
."
TO
GROUND
D
REAR
VIEW

TO EXTERNAL
VHF PA-eOUPLER ANTENNA COUPLER
TO ANTENNA COAX CABLE (HF)
28 VDC SOUR (50 OHM)
1694-033

Figure 5-9. 150 Watt Vehicular Radio System Interconnect SChematic Diagram

5-35
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
TROUBLESHOOTING RF COMMUNICATIONS

5.6 BIT DESCRIPTION

5.6.1 General
Running BIT on the Rf-l694 Receiver-Transmitter also tests the attached power amplifier and antenna coupler.
The general types of tests, and the units affected by those tests, are described in the following paragraphs.
5.6.2 BIT Routine
See Figure 5-3. These tests can be automatically perfonned by rotating the function switch on the R/f to the
TEST position, followed by pressing the ENTER key. During execution of self-test, the front panel message
SELF TEST IN PROGRESS is displayed. Module faults AOl through AlO indicate a problem with the R/f.
Module fault A30 indicates a problem with the attached power amplifier. Table 5-3 identifies the units and
modules associated with each fault code.
If initiating the self-test function generates no faults, the front panel message SELF TEST DONE NO ERRORS is
displayed.
5.6.3 Continuous Self-Test Monitoring (Run-Time FaUlts)
Certain critical circuits that may adversely affect radio system operation, or even cause damage if they
malfunction, are continuously monitored by self diagnostics. The radio system inhibits nonnal operation until the
condition is rectified, and displays a fault on the front panel of the R/f. These circuits are described in the
following paragraphs.
5.6.3.1 COUPLER COMM FAULT
The power amplifier has lost communication with the antenna coupler. This is usually caused by a control cable
problem, a power amplifier problem, or an antenna coupler problem.
5.6.3.2 COUPLER FAULT
The antenna coupler has reported a fault condition to the power amplifier and is inhibiting transmission. This is
usually caused by an overvoltage, overcurrent, or overtemperature condition in the antenna coupler.
5.6.3.3 COUPLER OVERTEMP
The antenna coupler temperature has exceeded the warning limit. Continued transmission may result in a
COUPLER FAULT shutdown.
5.6.3.4 COUPLER WARNING Fault
This fault indicates a general problem with the antenna coupler.
5.6.3.5 HIGH DC INPUT Fault
This fault indicates high primary DC supply voltage. This indicates a problem with the power supply or the
vehicle battery/alternator system.
5.6.3.6 High Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) Fault
The VSWR is high. This could indicate a problem with the antenna system, the radio system cables, or the
antenna coupler.
5.6.3.7 INTERNAL COMM FAULT
This indicates a general communication failure between the R/f's front panel module and the other R/f modules.
5.6.3.8 NO PA Fault
The R/f has lost communications with the power amplifier. This could indicate a cabling problem, or a problem
with the power amplifier.

5-36
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING

5.6.3.9 OUT OF LOCK Fault

The R/f's synthesizer module is out of lock. The R/f is not operational.
5.6.3.10 PA BAD FILTER Fault

The power amplifier senses a loss of harmonic filter operation or transmitter level control. This indicates a
problem with the power amplifier.
5.6.3.11 PA COMM FAULT

The R/f has lost communications with the power amplifier. This could indicate a cabling problem, or a problem
with power amplifier.
5.6.3.12 PA LOW DC INPUT Fault

This fault indicates low primary DC supply voltage. This could indicate a cabling problem, or a problem with the
power supply.
5.6.3.13 PA OVER CURRENT Fault

The power amplifier senses that it is drawing too much current. This indicates a problem with the power
amplifier.
5.6.3.14 PA OVER TEMP Fault

Power amplifier high-temperature warning. The power amplifier may shut down if transmission is continued at
this power level.
5.6.3.15 PA WARNING Fault

A general warning that the power amplifier senses a condition that is preventing normal operations.
5.6.3.16 TUNE FAULT

The power amplifier has lost communication with the antenna coupler. This could indicate a control cable
problem, a problem with the coupler, or a problem with the antenna.

5-37/5-38
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 6

CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
6.1 INTRODUCTION

Paragraph 6.2 provides the alignment and adjustment procedures for each Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) in the
RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System. Paragraph 6.3 provides the procedures for removing and replacing
the LRUs. Tables 7-1 through 7-4list the LRUs for each RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System
configuration.
6.1.1 Master Tools and Materials List
The only tool required to perform the procedures in this chapter is an adjustable wrench (part number IB7536,
cage code 11083). This wrench is required to disconnect the antenna from E1 of the antenna coupler, and to
remove the RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply, the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier, and the RF-382
Antenna Coupler from the vehicle.
6.2 ADJUSTMENTS AND ALIGNMENTS

All adjustments and alignments are set at the factory. Adjustments and alignment procedures are not required
when replacing each LRU in the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System.
6.3 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
This section contains the repair procedures which consist of removing and replacing all LRUs authorized for
Level II maintenance. LRUs consist of units and cables.
6.3.1 Safety
Remove power from the radio system before starting any repairs.

~WARNINGI
Hazardous VOltages are present if power is not removed from the
radio system. Failure to remove power from radio system can
cause injury or death to personnel.
6.3.2 Levell! Repair
Repairs are made by removing and replacing the units listed in Tables 7-1 through 7-4. Repairs are also made by
removing and replacing damaged cables (listed in Tables 6-1 through 6-3).

6-1
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II) HARRIS
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE RF COMMUNICATIONS

6.3.3 Wires, cables, and Connectors

Use the unit replacement illustrations to locate the cable connections, if necessary. Table 6-1 describes the cables
by part number, description, and unit connection points for the 20 watt vehicular configuration. Table 6-2
describes the cables by part number, description, and unit connection points for the 125 watt vehicular
configuration. Table 6-3 describes the cables for the 150 watt vehicular configuration. There are no cables in the
manpack configuration.

When removing or replacing cables or connectors, avoid sharp

bends in any cable. Do not allow the cable to be pinched when
reinstalling a unit Do not remove a connection by grabbing the
cable; grab the connector instead. Do not force the cable when
reinstalling it; this could damage the connector pins.

Table 6-1. Radio System cable Information - 20 Watt Vehicular Configuration

Part
Number Description Connections
10181-9821 Receiver-Transmitter (Rff) - Power Amplifier ANT (Rff)
(PA) Coaxial Cable Assembly 112 (PA)
10181-9822 Rff - PA Control Cable Assembly PA (Rff)
J8 (PA)
10181-9827 20 Watt PNCoupler Direct Current (DC) 110 (PA)
Cable Assembly DC Power Source

6-2
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Table 6-2. Radio System Cable Information - 125 Watt Vehicular Configuration
Part
Number Description Connections
10181-9821 Rtf - PA Coaxial Cable Assembly ANT (R/f)
112 (PA)
10181-9822 Rtf - PA Control Cable Assembly PA(R!f)
J8 (PA)
10181-9823 PA - Coupler Control Cable Assembly J9 (PA)
J2 (CPLR)
10181-9824 PA - Coupler Coaxial Cable Assembly 111 (PA)
11 (CPLR)
10181-9833 RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply - DC OUT (PS)
RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter Cable AUX DC INPUT (PC)
Assembly
10181-9826 DC Power Cable Assembly PRIMARY DC INPUT (PC)
Altemator/Battery System
10181-9831 AC Power Cable Assembly AC IN (PS)
10181-9833 PA - RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter 110 (PA)
Cable Assembly 26 VDC OUT (PC)
10251-0042 High-Voltage Cable Assembly E1 (CPLR)
Antenna

Table 6-3. Radio System Cable Information -150 Watt Vehicular Configuration
Part
Number Description Connections
10251-0042 High-Voltage Cable Assembly E1 (CPLR)
Antenna
10497-0505-01 DC Power Cable Assembly 110 (PA)
Altemator/Battery System
10497-5015-01 R/f - PA Coaxial Cable Assembly ANT (R/f)
11 (PA)
10497-0520-01 PA - Coupler Control Cable Assembly J9 (PA)
J2 (CPLR)
10497-5025-01 R/f - PA Control Cable Assembly PA (R/f)
J2 (PA)
10497-5035-01 Rtf - PA Audio Cable Assembly AUDIO ALL (R{f)
J6 (PA)

6-3
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE RF COMMUNICATIONS

6.4 UNIT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

6.4.1 General
This section contains infonnation needed to remove and replace the LRUs from the radio system. The following
procedures apply to all LRUs in the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System.
6.4.2 Removing and Installing AC Input Power
If connected, AC input power must be removed before replacing any LRU.

6.4.2.1 Removing AC Input Power

Perfonn the following procedure to remove AC input power:

~WARNING I
Hazardous voltages are present if power is not removed from the
radio system. Failure to remove power from the radio system can
cause injury or death to personnel.
a. Tum the power switches on the individual units making up the RF-5200 Falcon™ Series Manpack System
to the OFF position.
b. Unplug the AC power cable assembly from the power source.
6.4.2.2 Installing AC Input Power
This procedure assumes the AC power was removed per Paragraph 6.4.2.1. Perfonn the following procedure to
apply AC input power:

~WARNING I
Hazardous voltages are present when power is applied to the
radio system. This power can cause injury or death to personnel.
a. Plug the AC power cable assembly into the power source.
b. Tum the power switches on the individual units making up the radio system to the ON position.

6-4
mlHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

6.5 LRU REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

The following procedures contain information needed to remove and replace LRUs in the radio system.
6.5.1 LRU Removal

Perform the following procedure to remove any LRU from a vehicular RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack
System. Refer to Tables 6-2 and 6-3 and see Figures 6-1 and 6-2.
NOTE

Most vehicular station LRUs are removed and replaced by using

wing nuts as shown in Figure 6-1. The RF-5055PS AC/DC
Power Supply, the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power
Amplifier/Coupler, and the RF-382 Antenna Coupler are bolted
directly to the vehicle. These LRUs require an adjustable wrench
(part number 1B7536, cage code 11083) to remove and replace.
For specific mounting information and options, refer to
Chapter 8, Installation.
a. Remove power from the radio system per Paragraph 6.4.2.1.
b. Disconnect all cables (Radio Frequency [RF], control, power, grounding) from the LRU being replaced.
c. Loosen wing nuts that secure LRU to its mounting location.
d. Remove LRU from radio system.
6.5.2 LRU Replacement
Perform the following procedure to replace any LRU into a vehicular RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack
System. Refer to Tables 6-2 and 6-3, and see Figures 6-1 and 6-2.
a. Slide LRU into its mounting position in the radio system.
b. Tighten wing nuts that secure LRU to its mounting location.
c. Connect all cables (RF, control, power, grounding) to the LRU being replaced.
d. Install power to radio system per Paragraph 6.4.2.2.

6-5
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE RF COMMUNICATIONS

• o
CONTROl o.Ci.PCJIIIVER

..•••
.. .II

J12 ~
RIT WING NUTS RFIN ......

(2 PLACES) CLAMP
ASSEMBLY~~LZ.L...;::=:=====;::=:~~~

WING NUTS
(2 PLACES)

POWER CONVERTER
WING NUT

MNPK~4

Figure 6-1. LRU Removal and Replacement -125 Watt Vehicular Configuration

6-6
mHARRIS RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

RIT
WING NUTS
(2 PLACES)
r , r ,_~

Ree-29 .6131313 C===

USB OFF CLR OFF

ON ~DIO
000000
SPKR@. 00000000
OFFJ61 I 0000000000
0000000000
AUXPWR 000000000000
000000000000
000000000000
RESET A1\ 000000000000
0000000000

~J2 "",,-~y 0000000000

00000000
RFIN
@J1
000000
CB1 PA CONTROL

PA
WING NUTS MNPK~5
(2 PLACES)

Figure 6-2. LRU Removal and Replacement - 150 Watt Vehicular Configuration

6-7/6-8
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
PARTS LIST

CHAPTER 7

PARTS LIST
7.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter contains radio system parts list infonnation. This infonnation can be used to identify units within
each radio system configuration, and to place orders for those units. This chapter is organized as follows:

• Paragraph 7.2 - Line Replaceable Units (LRUs)

• Paragraph 7.3 - LRU Diagrams

7.2 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRUS)

Tables 7-1 through 7-4 list the LRUs that the comprise manpack, 20 watt vehicular, 125 watt vehicular, and 150
watt vehicular radio systems. Quantity, part number, figure number references are also provided.
Table 7-1. LRUs for Manpack System
Part Figure
Quantity Name of Unit Number Number
1 RT-1694(P) Receiver-Transmitter or 10372-1000-01 1-3 and 7-1
RT-1694B(P)1U Receiver-Transmitter 10530-1000-01
1 Battery Case (aluminum) or 10372-0300 1-3
Battery Case (plastic) 10530-1300-02
1 Manpack Radio Bag 10372-0460-01, or 1-3
10530-0460-01
2 Nickel-Cadmium (Ni-Cd) Battery or BB-5901U 1-3
Lithium Battery BA-55901U
1 Handset H-2501U 1-3
1 OE-505 Manpack Whip Antenna Kit or 10372-0240-01 1-3
OE-505A/pRC Whip Antenna Kit 10530-0240-01

Table 7-2. LRUs for 20 Watt Vehicular System

Part Figure
Quantity Name of Unit Number Number
1 RT-1694(P) Receiver-Transmitter or 10372-1000-01 7-1
RT-1694B(P)1U Receiver-Transmitter 10530-1000-01
1 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power 10225-6000-01 7-2
Amplifier/Coupler
1 24 Vdc Filter Adapter Assembly 10372-0850 7-8
(optional)

7-1
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 7-3. LRUs for 125 Watt Vehicular System

Part Figure
Quantity Name of Unit Number Number
1 RT-1694(P) Receiver-Transmitter or 10372-1000-01 7-1
RT-1694B(P)/U Receiver-Transmitter 10530-1000-01
1 RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power 10225-1550-01 7-3
Amplifier
1 RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply 10520-0100-01 7-5
1 RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter 10521-0100-01 7-6
1 RF-382-02 Antenna Coupler or 10208-5120 7-9
RF-382-03 Antenna Coupler or 10208-5120-06
RF-382-04 Antenna Coupler 10208-5125
1 24 Vdc Filter Adapter Assembly 10372-0850 7-8
(optional)

Table 7-4. LRUs for 150 Watt Vehicular System

Part Figure
Quantity Name of Unit Number Number
1 RT-1694(P) Receiver-Transmitter or 10372-1000-01 7-1
RT-1694B(P)/U Receiver-Transmitter 10530-1000-01
1 RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power 10497-11 00-01 7-4
Amplifier
1 RF-382-02 Antenna Coupler or 10208-5120 7-9
RF-382-03 Antenna Coupler or 10208-5120-06
RF-382-04 Antenna Coupler 10208-5125

7-2
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
PARTS LIST

7.3 LRU DIAGRAMS

Figures 7-1 through 7-25 show the LRUs and the connector locations for those LRUs.

AUDIOIFILL ANTENNA GROUND

CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNEC~R

rCH, r FREe MHZl S~DB

.50mj c:::
R0~j-Z9
USB OFF elR OFF
LMODE-i LDATA-l L ENCA-! Lsa-J

HOP~ALE 4~1S
.m....
•

~
••

OFF-
I IIIT

•
3
.T!lrf :
2
8
.:

VOLUME ~ 11\ +

REMOTE CONTROL
DATA CONNECTOR
EXTERNAL POWER
AMPLIFIER CONNECTOR

Figure 7-1. RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Connector Location Diagram

7-3
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

SUPPUES RIT
CONTROL

RFINPUT
+28VDC
POWER PACNTRL
INPUT

DCPWR RFIN

REAR VIEW

J11
AUX
I
HIGH
VOLTAGE ...,.....----__\;~

I
GND ANT

PROVIDES
GROUNDING RF OUT CONNECTOR
CONNECTION FROM COUPLER
POINT FRONT VIEW
503OE-006

Figure 7-2. RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler Connector Location Diagram

7-4
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
PARTS LIST

SUPPUES ANTENNA
COUPLER CONTROL
AND BITE FEEDBACK
+28 VDC POWER INPUT

PROVIDES
PRIMARY DC
POWER AND PA
FEEDBACK DATA
TORIT

100 mW RF INPUT

J9

GND

125WATTRF
POWER OUTPUT

5OOOE-Ol00

PROVIDES
GROUNDING
CONNECTION
POINT

Figure 7-3. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Connector Location Diagram

7-5
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT

FRONT VIEW (FROM RJT) (FROM HANDSET)

RESET I1l\
~J2~""""~
CBl PA

POWER OUTPUT RFINPUT

PA CONTROL SIGNALS (TO ACCESSORY UNIT) (FROM RJT)
(FROM RJT)
COUPLER CONTROL SIGNALS TO HF RFOUTPUT
(TO RF-382) GROUND (TO RF-382)
REAR VIEW

0/11
o
VtlFANr

@
VHF RF OUTPUT
DC POWER (TO BROADBAND
(FROM VEHICULAR FAN POWER
CONNECTOR ANTENNA)
ALTERNATORIBATIERY SYSTEM)
MNPK-<l27

Figure 7-4. RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier Connector Location Diagram

7-6
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS PARTS LIST

J2 +26VDC OUT
J1 120/240VACIN O~ O~

~ CB1 e C B 2
~ POWER
OFF ~ ON

ACINPUT DC OUTPUT
(FROM AC POWER SOURCE) (TO RF-5056PS DC/DC
POWER CONVERTER)

MNPK.Q28

Figure 7-5. RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Connector Location Diagram

7-7
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

DC INPUT DC INPUT
(FROM VEHICULAR (FROM RF·5055PS AC/DC
ALTERNATOR/BATTERY SYSTEM) POWER SUPPLY)

ON~
~
OFF
AUTO

@
------- J1
12/28 VDC IN

REMOVE BO'ITOM COVER TO REPLACE FUSES

TO GROUND DC OUTPUT
(TO POWER AMPUFIER)

MNPK-029

Figure 7·6. RF·5056PS DC/DC Power COnverter COnnector Location Diagram

7-8
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
PARTS LIST

ijl} ~ 0 OCOUT
(TO PA)
( \
( \
( \
( \
OCIN
( \ J400WATT
co FIGURATION)
TOACPOWER ( \
115/230 YAC,
47-400Hz, ( \
565 WATTS
( \
e& El9

5OOOE-012A

Figure 7-7. RF-5051PS-125 Power Supply Connector Location Diagram

7-9
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS (II HARRIS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

CB2 J1 J3
P\lR/PA F'ILTERED
CNTRL [JUT AUX P\lR

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

FRONT VIEW

P1 CB1
P\lR/PA
CNTRL IN

LEFT SIDE VIEW

MNPK-051

Figure 7-8. 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Assembly (Optional) Connector Location Diagram

7-10
(II HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS PARTS LIST

r----------]- _u__ .----- -----unnl-n-un-nl

n n

r
~_n

: ~.-.-
:
1
. 63
....-..-
h @
l ' :
:

_J_!
() )~ J
,
ANTENNA COUPLER
~:~;p='-=ii'u=-=~. CONTROL SIGNALS
(FROM POWER AMPLIFIER)

RF INPUT (FROM
POWER AMPLIFIER)

5OOOE-013

Figure 7-9. RF-382 Antenna Coupler Connector Location Diagram

TABLE 1

PART NO. LENGTH

10181-9821-002 2 FEET
10181-9821-006 6 FEET
10181-9821-020 20 FEET
10181-9821-050 50 FEET
5000E-014

Figure 7-10. Receiver-Transmitter (Rm to PA Coaxial Cable Assembly (10181-9821)

7-11
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

LENGTH
( SEE TABLE 1 )

TABLE 1

PART NO. LENGTH

10181-9822-002 2 FEET
10181·9822-006 6 FEET
10181·9822-020 20 FEET
10181-9822-050 SO FEET

5000E-015

Figure 7-11. RfT to PA Control Cable Assembly (10181-9822)

7-12
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS PARTS LIST

I. LENGTH
( SEE TABLE 1 )

TABLE 1

PART NO. LENGTH

10181-9823-006 6 FEET
10181-9823-010 10 FEET
10181-9823-020 20 FEET
10181·9823-050 50 FEET
10181·9823·100 100 FEET
10181-9823·150 150 FEET

5OOOE-Q16

Figure 7-12. PA to Coupler Control Cable Assembly (10181-9823)

7-13
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

[10 WJ_1~~_81-882_PLR"";'~:"";'~---I- --;~ ~r- ~_1~~_81p_~"";'(:X"";'F)X.....lcm 01]

I..
LENGTH
( SEE TABLE 1 )
J

TABLE 1

PART NO. LENGTH

10181-9824-010 10 FEET

10181-9824-020 20 FEET
10181·9824-050 50 FEET

10181-9824-100 100 FEET

10181·9824-150 150 FEET

5OOOE·017

Figure 7-13. PA to Coupler Coaxial cable Assembly (10181-9824)

7-14
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS PARTS LIST

• NOTE:
LENGTH TO BE SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER•

.....- - - - - - LENGTH· - - - - -.... - - - - -

5KS-055A

Figure 7-14. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier Primary Power cable (10181-9826)

• NOTE:
LENGTH TO BE SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER.

LENGTH· ~"I· 41N--1

L--r-=---!_ _~ i I
~
5K8-054A

Figure 7-15. 20 Watt Power Amplifier to Antenna Coupler Primary Power cable Assembly
(10181-9827)

7-15
 RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
PARTS LIST
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

1......1--------- SEETABLE1 - - - - - - -...... ~I J17

/9 ~~/,----l ----l-~m TABLE 1

DASH NUMBER LENGTH PARTS LIST NUMBER

5OOOE·Q20
NONE 104 IN 10181-9831

-OOS 96 IN 10181·9831-008

-015 180 IN 10181·9831-015

Figure 7-16. AC Power cable Assembly (10181-9831)

-NOTE:
LENGTH TO BE SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER.

P2

P1

1.....1-- LENGTH- - - - - - - - ~.I 5OOOE·021

Figure 7-17. 125 Watt Power Amplifier DC Power Cable Assembly (10181-9833)

7-16
;;oHARRS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS PARTS LIST

SEE
DETAIL A

P1

1.00 IN
11.00 IN - ....- - - - - - - 240.00 IN -------l.~1

DETAIL A
MNPK-<l48

Figure 7-18. 24 V Power cable Assembly {10372-0812}

7-17
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

SEE
DETAIL A

P1 P2

1-. ---18.00IN ---~.I

DETAIL A
MNPKo049

Figure 7-19. 24 V Power/Control Cable Assembly (10372-0813)

7-18
(II HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS PARTS LIST

P1 P2

~-------- SEE TABLE 1 --------+.....

SEE
DETAIL A

DETAIL A

MNPK-050

TABLE 1
PART NO. LENGTH
10372-0816-050 50 FEET
10372-0816-020 20 FEET
10372-0816-006 6 FEET
10372-0816-002 2 FEET

Figure 7-20. External PA Power/Control Cable Assembly (10372-0816)

7-19
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

l r~2'N SEE
DETAIL A

14J04/10497~-XX 0

1~M L 28.00 IN :1

r..
......- - - 1.251N - - - . . . - I

O'NIIAX

JAM NUT

O-RING SEAL MOULDED STRAIN

RELIEF

DETAIL A
MNPK-033

Figure 7-21. 150 Watt DC Power cable Assembly (10497-0505)

7-20
IjHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS PARTS LIST

P1 P2

\ - --lO"H015-01I----l{
"l0I[]:=jRF. RT TO PA---~~ ~
ll-------~
[§W - /

1....... . . . - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10lN --------------1.~1 MNPK-030

Figure 7-22. 150 Watt RJT - Power Amplifier Coaxial cable Assembly (10497-5015)

• NOTE:
LENGTH TO BE SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER.

1.....-
.. - - - - - LENGTH" ./

~-1--J-L--.J-~~~--t1- 1~-=t=1'~5~rc:mm
__

MNPK·038

Figure 7-23. 150 Watt Power Amplifier - Coupler Control cable Assembly (10497-5020)

7·21
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mJHARRlS
PARTS LIST RF COMMUNICATIONS

MNPK~l
DETAIL 1

Figure 7·24. 150 Watt RIT - Power Amplifier Control Cable Assembly (10497-5025)

~----------- 12.001N -----------~

~I
P2

1IIIHRHD1uurHfl(~
MNPK-032

Figure 7-25. 150 Watt RIT - Power Amplifier Audio cable Assembly (10497-5035)

7·22
(II HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS PARTS LIST

7.3.1 RS-232 Auxiliary Cables/Auxiliary COnnector J5 (Optional)

Figure 7-26 identifies the RS-232 Data Cable (10372-9867) and Figure 7-27 identifies the RS-232
Synchronous/Asynchronous Remote Cable (10372-9868). These cables connect at the DATA connector on the
RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Front Panel. The DATA connector provides audio and control interface, remote
control, and synchronous and asynchronous data interface. Table 8-21lists the pin assignments for the DATA
connector.

* NOTE:
LENGTH TO BE SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER.

1-------- LENGTH* - - - - - -......

......

P1 P2

"iJIIj---r %\...~I-t 1----------l~____t

1

1_;n;;;-1O

MNPK.()34

Figure 7-26. RS-232 Data cable (10372-9867)

* NOTE:
LENGTH TO BE SPECIFIED ON SALES ORDER.

1-------- LENGTH* - - - - - - - - - .
......
P1

~ tf
1

I~~.I --lCIO£IOllE~lo.m~--~-..:~I---

MNPK-<l35

Figure 7-27. RS-232 Sync/Async Remote Cable (10372-9868)

7-2317-24
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 8

INSTALLATION
8.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the following:
• Site infonnation - Paragraph 8.2
• Tools and materials required - Paragraph 8.3
• Unpacking and repacking - Paragraph 8.4
• Site installation - Paragraph 8.5
• Installation checkout - Paragraph 8.6
8.2 SITE INFORMATION
8.2.1 General
The infonnation contained here provides general guidelines for setting up the various configurations of the
RF-5200 FALCON'M Series Manpack Systems. In general, select a ventilated, well-lighted location. Avoid
placing the system in a busy or congested area, or where there is excessive noise. The following are general site
considerations:
• Availability of power source, earth ground, antenna, etc.
• Ease of operation, maintenance, or removal and replacement

• Ventilation
• Oearance of connection cables to the back of the radio, antenna coupler, etc.
8.2.2 General Guidelines
The infonnation contained in the following paragraphs provides general site guidelines. Before choosing a site,
become familiar with the dimensions of the equipment, and make sure there is plenty of room for maintenance
when the radio system is installed.
8.2.3 Grounding
The following paragraphs suggest grounding guidelines that should be followed when perfonning manpack,
vehicular, or base station installations.

lWARNINGI
Inadequate or defective grounding presents a personnel hazard
that could result in injury or death.

Inadequate or defective grounding could damage the equipment.

8-1
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
IIMUN
HA RR IS
ICAT IONS
RF COM
INSTALLATION

8.2.3.1 Manpack Configuration Grounding

The following are guidelines for manpack configuration grounding:
cm]).
• All ground cables should be as short as possible (ideally less than 12 inches [30
ing points. Use the chassis
• Paint, grease, rust, etc. must be removed so only bare metal is visible at ground
frame or a welded steel body panel for the grounding point.
length. A ground terminal
• Ground cables should be fabricated from tinned, braided copper of the correct
e.
is provided on the Receiver-Transmitter (RIf), and should be used for this purpos
(such as a cold water pipe),
See Figure 8-1. The Rtf ground tenninal should be connected to a grounded pipe
least one meter into the soil. In
preferably where the pipe enters the ground, or a steel or copper rod driven at
inous terrain), it may be
situations where the water table is far below the surface (such as desert or mounta
necessary to create an artificial ground (counterpoise) by using radials.
many radial wires as possible (1/4
A counterpoise system improves perfonnance and can be created by using as
a vehicle body provides another
wavelength long) spread out like the spokes of a wheel. A direct connection to
tion to any mass of metal, such as
effective counterpoise system. Even a single wire laid on the ground or a connec
a wire fence, improves radio system perfonnance.

WHIP
WHIP

RIT

111m INTO GROUND

JJ_~_
t
GROUNDING THE RADIO GROUND RADIALS IN
WHEEL-SPOKE CONFIGURATION
5OOOP.Q07A

Figure 8-1. Ground Systems for Manpack Configuration

8-2
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION

8.2.3.2 Vehicular Configuration Grounding

The following are guidelines for vehicular grounding:

• All ground cables should be as short as possible (ideally less than 12 inches [30 cm]).

• Paint, grease, rust, etc. must be removed so only bare metal is visible at grounding points. Use the chassis
frame or a welded steel body panel for the grounding point.

• Never ground to trim or hinged panels (door, hood, etc.) or to surfaces which are removed from the
chassis (dashboard, seats, etc.).

• Ground cables should be fabricated from tinned, braided copper of the correct length. Ground terminals
are provided on the vehicular system units, and should be used for this purpose.

• Position the ground strap to the Rtf so the shock mount action is not inhibited. If the RF-382 Antenna
Coupler is used, refer to its manual for antenna grounding procedures.
8.2.3.3 Base Station Configuration Grounding
There are currently no base-station RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System configurations.
8.2.4 Environmental
The radio system will function normally in the environments listed in Chapter 1, Paragraph 1.3.6.
8.3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED
A typical vehicular installation requires wrenches, hammer, punch, pliers, and power drill.
8.4 UNPACKING AND REPACKING
Equipment is packed in corrugated boxes. A two-piece foam enclosure protects the equipment against corrosion
and rough handling. The boxes and packing materials should be retained in case the equipment is reshipped.
The following paragraphs describe how to unpack and repack the radio system units.
8.4.1 Unpacking
Perform the following procedure to unpack the equipment:
a. Inspect the exterior of the box for signs of damage during shipment. Note any problems and report them
to the proper authority. An external sticker on the shipping box provides additional instructions
concerning inspection of the package.
b. Use normal care to move the boxed equipment into the general location where it is to be installed. Certain
boxes, depending on system configuration, may be heavy. Exercise care when moving boxed assemblies
to and from locations.
c. After removing the equipment from the box, check the contents against the packing slip to see that the
shipment is complete. Report discrepancies to HarrislRF Communications' customer service department
(tel: 716-244-5830).

8-3
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.4.2 Repacking
Perform the following procedure to repack the equipment:
a. Use the original box if it was retained. If not, use a box that allows three inches of clearance on all sides
of the unit.
b. Use the original packing material if it was retained. If not, use foam packing material to fill the space
between the unit and the box. Surround the entire unit with three inches of foam packing material.
c. Use a good quality packing tape (or straps) to seal the box after closing.
8.5 SITE INSTALLATION
The following paragraphs describe the power requirements and ancillary items kit required for properly installing
the radio system. Cabling, jumper and Dual In-Line Position (DIP) switch settings, unit removal and installation
procedures, clearance and ventilation requirements, and mounting information is also included.
8.5.1 Power Requirements
The following paragraphs describe the power requirements for the 20 watt, 125 watt, and 150 watt vehicular radio
systems.
8.5.1.1 20 Watt Radio System
The required voltage at the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier is 26.4 Vdc at 3 amperes.
The 20 wan RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System is designed to operate from a standard 26 V vehicular
battery-alternator system, typical of a military vehicles. Power hookup must use a negative ground.
8.5.1.2 125 Watt Radio System
The required voltage at the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier is 26.4 Vdc at 15 amperes.
The 125 wan RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System is designed to operate from a standard 26 V vehicular
battery-alternator system, typical of a military vehicles. Power hookup must use a negative ground.
8.5.1.3 150 Watt Radio System
The required voltage at the RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier is 26.4 Vdc at 20 amperes.
The 150 wan RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System is designed to operate from a standard 26 V vehicular
battery-alternator system, typical of military vehicles. Power hookup must use a negative ground.
8.5.2 Ancillary Items Kit
Each unit that makes up the radio system is supplied with an ancillary items kit that contains items required for
proper installation. For more information regarding the contents of these kits, refer to Chapter I, Paragraph 1.5.
8.5.3 Jumper/DIP Switch Settings
The following paragraphs describe the jumper/DIP switch settings for the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power
Amplifier/Coupler and the RF-382 Antenna Coupler.
8.5.3.1 RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler Jumper/DIP Switch Settings
For access to the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter's entire 1.6 to 60 MHz frequency range, jumper A5JMPI on the
RF-5030PA-20E's A5 Interconnect Printed Wiring Board (PWB) Assembly must be positioned across pins 2 and
3. See Figure 8-2.

8-4
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

NI·······:····I.
....,
eli

rJ
'"

( ) ( )

....,
'"
.
C') • • • • • • • • • •

o
8
o
....,
"Of

~
~ -
'"

A5JMP1
A51NTERCONNECT PWB ASSEMBLY
503OE·Q33

Figure 8·2. A5JMP1 Location - RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler

8-5
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.3.2 RF-382 Antenna Coupler Jumper/DIP Switch Settings

When using an RF-382 Antenna Coupler in a RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System, the S2 DIP switch on
the antenna coupler's A3 Assembly must be set as shown in Figure 8-3. This is done at the factory. Setting this
switch to the specified positions ensures proper operation of the RF-382 Antenna Coupler when used with 125
watt or 150 watt power amplifiers.
NOTE: 5ET 52-2 OPEN
5ET 52-1, 52-3,
AND 52-4 CLOSED

1 2 3 4

.2 ~ ~~
- - - - OPEN - - - -

382-051 VP

Figure 8-3. RF-382 A3 Control PWB, S2 Switch Settings

8.5.4 Interconnect Diagrams

See Figures 8-4 through 8-6 for interconnect diagrams of the various RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack
System configurations.
8.5.5 Unit Removal and Installation Procedures
Refer to Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.4, for instructions on removing units from the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series
Manpack Systems.
8.5.6 Access Clearance and Ventilation ReqUirements
Consider the following access clearance and ventilation requirements when possible:

• Clearance in front of the radio system for maintenance personnel is at least 41 inches.

• There is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 centimeters) clearance above the power amplifiers.
When adequate space is provided as described above, special ventilation requirements are not necessary.

8-6
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

RIT - PA COAX CABLE

TO
(10181-9821 )
HANDSET RT-1694
RECEIVER-
TRANSMITTER
iGH"1 rI"lW:GIiM, .a ••
TO
GROUND

RIT - PA CONTROL CABLE

(10181-9822)

J12

!FIN

RF-5030PA-20E RF-5030PA·20E
REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW
TOGND

DC POWER CABLE
(10181-9827)

MNPK-042A

Figure 8-4. 20 Watt Vehicular Configuration Interconnect Diagram

8-7
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

RJT·PA
COAX CABLE
TO
(10181-9821)
HANDSET RT·1694
RECEIVER·
TRANSMITTER
r~ r"IEQIiI-IZ, .3' ....
TO
R90-Z9. 6000 c:: GROUND
USB OFF CLR OFF
L YOOEJ LDITA.J LIfa'.J L.eDJ

RJT-PA
CONTROL CABLE
(10181-9822)
EXTERNAL
ANTENNA COUPLER EXTERNAL
POWER AMPLIFIER

D
PA-eOUPLER
CONTROL CABLE
(10181-9823) DC
POWER CABLE
(10181.9833)

TO
GROUND
PA-eOUPLER
COAX CABLE
(10181-9824)
TO
GROUND
RF-5055PS
ACiDC
POWER SUPPLY RF·5056PS
DClDC
POWER CONVERTER

DC DC POWER
POWER CABLE CABLE ASSEMBLY
(10181·9833) (10181-9826)
ACPOWER
CABLE ASSEMBLY
(10181·9831 )
MNPK-039A

Figure 8-5. 125 Watt Vehicular Configuration Interconnect Diagram

8-8
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

RIT-PA
RT-1694 COAXIAL CABLE
RECEIVER- (10497-5015-01)
TRANSMITTER

TO FRONT
GROUND VIEW

RIT-PA HANDSET
RF-5033PA-15O (H-250/U)
CONTROL CABLE
POWER AMPLIFIER (10075-1344-01)
(10497-5025-01)

RF-5033PA-15O
POWER AMPLIFIER PAoCOUPLER
CONTROL CABLE
(10497-0520-01)

D
"MJ

TO
GROUND
REAR
VIEW

FAN
POWER
CABLE
TO
BROADBAND RF-382
DC POWER PAoCOUPLER ANTENNA COUPLER
VHF COAXIAL CABLE
CABLE ANTENNA (10497-0525-01 )
(10497-0505-01)

Figure 8-6. 150 Watt Vehicular Configuration Interconnect Diagram

8-9
 !JH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
INSTALLATION

8.5.7 Antenna Considerations

Fast Tune Antenna Coupler
Harris Corporation, RF Communications Division, recommends using the RF-382
Coupler is fully compliant with the
with the 125 watt and 150 watt vehicular configurations. The RF-382 Amenna
timing and interface requirements of these radio system configurations .
are absorbed and reflected by
A number of factors should be considered before erecting an antenna. Radio signals
if possible, especially when they
nearby obstructions such as hills, trees, buildings, and power lines. Avoid these
is usually greatest from the top of a
are in a direct line with the Radio Frequency (RF) signal path. Signal strength
unpredictable transmission or
hill, over level terrain, or over water. Mountainous or hilly terrain may present
be correctly oriented for maximum
reception problems. Some antennas are more directional than others, and must
es antenna performance and
signal gain. A good earth ground connection and radial grounding system improv
protects the equipmem and personnel from lightning and electrical shock.

METltOO A METMOO8

To avoid damaging or kinking coaxial feedline cable when

removing cable from cable reels, support the reel by the center
axis and unreel the cable as indicated in Method A.
8.5.7.1 Antenna Configurations
systems for optimum performance.
This section describes the possible approaches to configuring the two antenna
which communication is to
The decision of which antenna to employ is primarily based on the distance over
be weighted before a decision can
occur. Other factors such as available supports, area, and erection time need to
be made.
short sky wave, and long sky
For discussion purposes, the scenarios are divided into three classes: ground wave,
500 miles and generally
wave. Ground wave is primarily line of sight. Short sky wave paths are those under
multiple hops.
involve a single hop. Long sky wave paths are greater than 500 miles and involve
8.5.7.1.1 Ground Wave
or near the surface of the earth.
Ground wave propagation involves the transmission of a radio wave signal along
Primarily, only line-of-sight
This requires the antenna to aim the radio wave at the horizon (low take-off angle).
g, mountain, etc. sometimes
communication is possible; however, reflections of the radio wave off a tall buildin
allows additional range.

8-10
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION

When using the whip antenna, keeping the antenna vertical and using a good RF ground improves the efficiency
of the antenna. Use of the RF-1940 Antenna is possible, but the simple dipole configuration should be avoided.
The preferred setup is to use a single support and to deploy an inverted vee, sloping dipole, or vertical dipole. All
of these antennas have radiation characteristics necessary for this type of path. Figure 8-7 provides examples of
these types of antennas.
Regardless of which antenna or configuration is used, the height of the antenna is important to successful
communication. Increased height equates to increased range.
8.5.7.1.2 Short Sky Wave
Short sky wave paths require that the radio wave be directed straight up. This all but eliminates the vertical whip
as an option. The RF-1940 Antenna, configured as a dipole, is the best choice for this path. The antenna should be
rolled out to the lowest frequency to be used and erected at a height equal to one half of its overall length (1/4
wavelength) for the short paths.
When erected at this height, the bearing is not critical, as the antenna is essentially omnidirectional in this
configuration. For this type of path, excessive height is not recommended as it tends to lower the take-off angle
below that which is required. Figure 8-8 shows the dipole configuration.
8.5.7.1.3 Long Sky Wave
Long sky wave paths require that the take-off angle of the radio wave be directed at a low angle like ground wave.
Use of the whip antenna is not recommended; however, if the whip must be used, it is preferable that it be
removed from the radio and remotely located with a ground radial system previously described.
The RF-1940 Antenna can be used in the dipole configuration if a height of one-half wavelength can be achieved.
Orient the antenna such that the desired station is perpendicular to the antenna. Alternately, a vertical dipole can
be erected if only one support exists.
If the communication is to a specific direction, two types of directional antennas can be made from the RF-1940
Antenna; these are the sloping vee and long wire. The sloping vee is made similarly to a dipole, except a single
support is used and the two ends are swung around to fonn a vee, the apex of which points in the favored
direction. A long wire is formed by joining the two wire elements and laying out the 45 meters of wire in a
straight line. This antenna is directional, and the wire should be pointed about 20° away from the desired
direction. Figure 8-8 shows both of these options.
8.5.7.2 Very High Frequency (VHF) Antennas
Primarily, VHF frequencies (30 to 60 MHz) are used for ground wave paths previously described. The whip is the
preferred antenna for these frequencies. Perfonnance is greatly enhanced by getting the antenna as high as
possible. The whip may be removed and located in a higher position with a suitable ground. Note that at High
Frequency (HF), the ground radials are placed on the ground, whereas at VHF, they must be suspended in the air.
The radials need to be only 2.5 meter to I meter long, and four are required.
8.5.7.3 Antenna Options
Paragraphs 8.5.7.3.1 through 8.5.7.3.4 discuss some of the antennas available for the manpack system
configurations.
8.5.7.3.1 OE-505 Manpack Whip Antenna Kit
The OE-505 Manpack Whip Antenna Kit is supplied with the ANtpRC-138 Manpack, and consists of a
10012-0241 whip antenna, a 10372-0277 antenna base, and a 10372-1215-01 adapter assembly. See Figure 8-9.
The 10012-0241 HF whip antenna (AT-271A/PRC-25) is a 3.1 meter, collapsible antenna composed of six
sections. A braided plastic cord, under spring tension, is threaded through the sections to keep them together in

8-11
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
II HA RR IS
RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
INSTALLATION

s are folded, the cable keeps them

the operating condition. The top section must be folded first. When the section
is provided by a spiral spring in
together as a group and prevents the loss of individual sections. Spring tension
the base of the antenna.
antenna. The 10372-1215-01
The 10372-0277 antenna base is used as the main support for the 10012-0241
adapter assembly is also supplied with this kit.
8.5.7.3.2 OE-505A1PRC Manpack Whip Antenna Kit
V)2 Manpack, and consists of
The OE-505A/pRC Manpack Whip Antenna Kit is supplied with the AN/pRC-138(
1 adapter assembly. See
a 10012-0241 whip antenna, a 10530-1250-02 antenna base, and a 10530-1215-0
Figure 8-9.
antenna composed of six
The 10012-0241 HF whip antenna (AT-271A/PRC-25) is a 3.1 meter, collapsible
sections to keep them together in
sections. A braided plastic cord, under spring tension, is threaded through the
s are folded, the cable keeps them
the operating condition. The top section must be folded first. When the section
tension is provided by a spiral spring in
together as a group and prevents the loss of individual sections. Spring
the base of the antenna.
antenna. The 10530-1215-01
The 10530-1250-02 antenna base is used as the main support for the 10012-0241
adapter assembly is also supplied with this kit.
8.5.7.3.3 RF-1940 Dipole Antenna
one person, and no additional
The RF-1940 Portable Dipole is an antenna which is fully field deployable by
whether the antenna is mounted as a
mounting hardware is needed. The antenna characteristics vary depending on
half-wave dipole, sloping-vee, or inverted-vee.
r, and a feedline. General
The antenna consists of two spools that contain both rope and wire, a center insulato
procedural steps for erecting a dipole antenna follow:
that is being used. The
a Unroll an equal amount of wire from the spools to the lowest desired frequency
ined. The length of each element can
wire has markers attached so the correct length can be easily determ
also be determined by using Table 8-1.
end of the wire to the
b. Attach the strain relief hook to the insulator, and attach the spade lug at the
insulator via the wing nut.
strain relief to the loop provided
c. Connect the coax feedline BNC connector to the insulator, and attach the
on the insulator.
the supports. Note that a
d. Unwind as much rope as required, and secure both ends of the antenna to
throwing weight is attached to the free end of the rope for conven ience.

8-12
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

Table 8-1. RF-1940 Antenna Length Reference Chart

Frequency Quarter-Wavelength Half-Wavelength

(MHz) Feet Meters Feet Meters

1.8 130.0 39.7 260.0 79.25
2.0 117.0 35.7 234.0 71.32
2.5 93.6 28.5 187.2 57.06
3.0 78.0 23.8 156.0 47.55
4.0 58.5 17.8 117.0 35.66
5.0 46.0 14.0 93.6 28.53
6.0 39.0 11.9 78.0 23.77
7.0 33.4 10.2 66.8 20.36
8.0 29.2 8.9 58.5 17.83
9.0 26.0 7.93 52.0 15.85
10.0 23.4 7.13 46.8 14.27
12.0 19.5 5.94 39.0 11.89
14.0 16.7 5.09 33.4 10.18
16.0 14.6 4.46 29.3 8.93
18.0 13.0 3.96 26.0 7.93
20.0 11.7 3.57 23.4 7.13
25.0 9.4 2.87 18.7 5.70
30.0 7.8 2.38 15.6 4.76
40.0 5.9 1.80 11.7 3.57
50.0 4.7 1.43 9.4 2.87
60.0 3.9 1.19 7.8 2.38

8-13
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

INVERTED VEE ANTENNA

5OOOP-012

SOOOP-oss
SLOPING DIPOLE

COAX TO TRANSMITTER

VERTICAL DIPOLE 5OOOP-oSl

Figure 8-7. RF-1940 Antenna Ground Wave Configurations

8-14
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

INSULATOR INSULATOR
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _A.
,- IJ2
- ,
--.,
/

BALUN

')J2 LONG SKY WAVE

HEIGHT = ')J4 SHORT SKY WAVE
COAX TO TRANSMITTER

5OOOP-010A
DIPOLE
ANTENNA WIRE INSULATED FROM
~SUPPORTS~

NON·METALLIC HEIGHT
~SUPPORTS~ 15 TO 20 FEET

RADIO

5OOOP-053
LONG WIRE ANTENNA

MAXIMUM RADIATION
INSULATOR
INSULATOR

FEEDER

BALUN

TRANSMITTER

SLOPING VEE
5OOOP-052
Figure 8-8. Sky Wave Antenna Configuration

8-15
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

WHIP
ANTENNA

ANTENNA
BASE RT·1694
RECEIVER·TRANSMITTER

WHIP BATTERY CASE

ADAPTER

MANPACK
RADIO
BAG

Figure 8-9. AN/PRc-138 Manpack Configuration Parts

8-16
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

8.5.7.3.4 SB·V16N35 Series HF Whip Antennas

The SB-V16 Whip Antenna is a series of self-supported, vertical, 16-foot (4.9-m), fiberglass, whip antennas. The
suffixes -B, -C, or -F defme the base style for the antenna.
The SB-V16B Antenna incorporates a feed-through base style and is used in conjunction with the RF-292
Antenna Mount. It may be used at power levels up to 1000 watts in the 1.5 to 30 MHz band.
The SB-V16C Antenna employs a stand-off base style which allows it to be mounted directly to an appropriate
surface. It is also rated for operation at power levels up to 400 watts in the 1.5 to 30 MHz band.
The SB-V16F Antenna has a spring base and is used in conjunction with the RF-292 Antenna Mount It may be
used at power levels up to 1000 watts in the 1.5 to 30 MHz band.
The SB-V16FHD HF Whip Antenna is a self-supported, vertical, 16-foot (4.9-m), fiberglass, whip antenna. The
suffix Flexible, Heavy Duty (FRD) defines the base style of the antenna. This antenna has a heavy-duty spring
base that features a high-voltage protection device should the antenna come in contact with power lines. A
flexible rubber boot covers the spring base and the lower portion of the mating antenna section, providing RF
bum protection. A vinyl coated plastic ball for the tip of the antenna provides eye protection. An antenna tie-down
kit is also included. The SB-V16FHD may be used in conjunction with the RF-292 Antenna Mount. It is rated for
operation at power levels up to 1000 watts in the 1.5 to 30 MHz band.
The SB-V35 series of antennas is essentially the same as the SB-V16 series, but it includes four additional
four-foot sections. These can be added individually to achieve antenna lengths from 20 feet (6.1 m) to 32 feet (9.8
m). The SB-V35B and the SB-35C make use of the same base mounts as their 16-foot counterparts. The SB-V35F
Antenna, however, incorporates a rigidized spring base. This base allows for greater operational versatility, since
it can be set for flexible operation to accommodate operation as a 16-foot antenna, or for rigid operation for
antenna lengths greater than 16 feet. Identical base mounts, designated by the same suffixes -B and -co The
operating frequency range is 1.5 to 30 MHz. The rated power level is 400 watts for the -B version and 1000 watts
for the --C and -F versions.

When using eight sections (32 feet), it is recommended that the

antenna be guyed if prevailing winds exceed 50 miles/hour
(80.7 km/hour), or if the antenna is to be installed for an
extended period of time.
8.5.7.3.4.1 SB-V16 series Parts Lists
Tables 8-2 through 8-5 are the parts lists for the four-section SB-V16B, SB-VI6C, SB-V16F, and SB-V16FHD
Antennas.
Tables 8-6 through 8-8 are the parts lists for the eight-section SB-V35B, SB-V35C, and SB-V35F Antennas.

8-17
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8-2. SB-V16B Antenna Parts List (100-5003)

Military
Part No. Nomenclature NSN Description Weight
E-G155 AT-1039/U 5985-00-733-6042 Antenna element, tip section 4ozs.
E-0154 AT-1040/U 5985-00-733-6043 Antenna element, second section 7ozs.
E-0153 AT-1041/U 5985-00-733-6044 Antenna element, third section 1Oozs.
E-0152 AT-1042/U 5985-00-733-6045 Antenna element, fourth section 1lbs. 2ozs.
E-G150 5820-00-931-9106 Feed-through base, 400 watts 2lbs. 9 ozs.
100-00101 Instruction Manual

Table 8-3. SB-V16C Antenna Parts List (100-5004)

Military
Part No. Nomenclature NSN Description Weight
E-0155 AT-1039/U 5985-00-733-6042 Antenna element, tip section 4ozs.
E-G154 AT-1040/U 5985-00-733-6043 Antenna element, second section 7ozs.
E-G153 AT-1041/U 5985-00-733-6044 Antenna element, third section 10 ozs.
E-G152 AT-1042/U 5985-00-733-6045 Antenna element, fourth section 1Ib.2ozs.
E-0156 MT-2525/U 5985-00-733-6047 Stand-off base 111bs.
MP-0080 Clamp

Table 8-4. SB-V16F Antenna Parts List (100-5009)

Military
Part No. Nomenclature NSN Description Weight
E-G155 AT-1039/U 5985-00-733-6042 Antenna element, tip section 4ozs.
E-G154 AT-1040/U 5985-00-733-6043 Antenna element, second section 7ozs.
E-G153 AT-1041/U 5985-00-733-6044 Antenna element, third section 1Oozs.
E-G152 AT-1042/U 5985-00-733-6045 Antenna element, fourth section lIb. 2 ozs.
100-5055 Spring Mount 6lbs. 1 oz.

8-18
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION

Table 8-5. SB-V16FHD Antenna Parts List (100-5109)

Military
Part No. Nomenclature NSN Description Weight
E-0155 AT-1039/U 5985-00-733-6042 Antenna element, tip section 4ozs.
E-0154 AT-1040/U 5985-00-733-6043 Antenna element, second section 7ozs.
E-0153 AT-1041/U 5985-00-733-6044 Antenna element, third section 10 ozs.
E-0152 AT-I042/U 5985-00-733-6045 Antenna element, fourth section lIb. 2ozs.
E76-0006- 16 foot spring base with high 81bs. 6ozs.
001 voltage protection
E76-0004- Insulating boot 2 lbs. 15
001 ozs.
E76-0005- 5820-00-908-6416 Antenna tie down kit 30zs.
001
E76-0003- AT-I011/U Whip end protector .6ozs.
001
10515- Instruction manual
0011-4300

Table 8-6. SB-V35B Antenna Parts List (100-5006)

Military
Part No. Nomenclature NSN Description Weight
E-0155 AT-1039/U 5985-00-733-6042 Antenna element, tip section 4ozs.
E-0154 AT-1040/U 5985-00-733-6043 Antenna element, second section 7ozs.
E-0153 AT-1041/U 5985-00-733-6044 Antenna element, third section 10 ozs.
E-0152 AT-1042/U 5985-00-733-6045 Antenna element, fourth section lIb. 2ozs.
E-0157 AT-1043/U 5985-00-733-6046 Antenna element, extension section lIb. 8ozs.
(4 ea.)
E-0150 5820-00-931-9106 Feed-through base, 400 watts 2lbs. 90zs.
100-0010 Instruction Manual

8-19
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;JJHARRlS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8-7. SB-V35C Antenna Parts List (100-5007)

Military
Part No. Nomenclature NSN Description Weight
E-0155 AT-1039/U 5985-00-733-6042 Antelllla element, tip section 40zs.
E-0154 AT-l040/U 5985-00-733-6043 Antelllla element, second section 7ozs.
E-0153 AT-l04l/U 5985-00-733-6044 Antelllla element, third section lOozs.
E-0152 AT-l042/U 5985-00-733-6045 Antelllla element, fourth section lIb. 2ozs.
E-0157 AT-l043/U 5985-00-733-6046 Antelllla element, extension section lIb. 8ozs.
(4 ea.)
E-0156 MT-2525/U 5985-00-733-6047 Stand-off base lilbs.
MP-0080 Damp

Table 8-8. SB-V35F Antenna Parts List (100-5013)

Military
Part No. Nomenclature NSN Description Weight
E-0155 AT-1039/U 5985-00-733-6042 Antelllla element, tip section 4ozs.
E-0154 AT-l040/U 5985-00-733-6043 Antenna element, second section 7ozs.
E-0153 AT-l04l/U 5985-00-733-6044 Antelllla element, third section 100zs.
E-0152 AT-l042/U 5985-00-733-6045 Antelllla element, fourth section lIb. 2ozs.
E-0157 AT-I043/U 5985-00-733-6046 Antelllla element, extension section lIb. 8ozs.
(4 ea.)
100-5054 Rigidized spring base 131bs.
12ozs.

8.5.7.3.4.2 Antenna Sections

Each antelllla section consists of an electrical conductor imbedded in a fiberglass sheath. When assembled, there
are no exposed metal parts. The sections are threaded and can be screwed together by hand, without the use of
tools. See Figure 8-10.
8.5.7.3.4.3 Feed-Through Antenna Base
The SB-Vl6B/SB-V35B Antellllas are supplied with a feed-through base. The base is made of stainless steel, 15
inches high, and adds approximately 12 inches to the length of the antenna. It is supplied with one 2 1{2 inch nut
and one lockwasher. To insure a stable installation, tighten the nut using 80 lb-ft of torque. The feed-through base
has a shunt capacitance of 8 pF at 1 MHz. It requires a 2 inch (5.08 cm) mounting hole. The conductor feed point
is a male, 1/4 inch x 20, UNC-threaded brass rod. The RF-292 Antelllla mount may be used to install the
SB-VI6/SB-V35B Antennas. Refer to Paragraph 8.5.7.3.4.9.

8-20
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

I--~

I I I
L -.J L ~ L -l

ANTENNA ELEMENT, ANTENNA ELEMENT, ANTENNA ELEMENT, ANTENNA ELEMENT,

FOURTH SECTION THIRD SECTION SECOND SECTION TIP SECTION
(PIN E-D152) (PIN E-D153) (PIN E-D154) (PIN E-0155)

5109-003

Figure 8-10. Green Vertical Antenna (100-5029)

8-21
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
INSTALLATION

8.5.7.3.4.4 Stand-Off Antenna Base

The SB-V16C/SB-V35C Antennas are supplied with a stand-off base. The base is a painted steel casting 20.5
inches high with an 8.5 inch diameter. It comes with a tennination band and tenninallug. It has six, 13/32 inch
diameter holes, equally spaced on a 7.75 inch diameter circle in its base.

8.5.7.3.4.5 Spring Base

The SB-V16F Antenna is supplied with a spring base. The design of the base pennits the spring to be locked in a
rigid position or in a flexible mode. See Figure 8-11.

The flexible mode should be used for the SB-V16F Antenna or to tie the antenna in the down position. The spring
should be locked in its rigid position for stationary operation if extension sections are added to increase the length
of the antenna beyond 16 feet.

The RF-292 Antenna mount may be used to install the SB-V16F Antennas. Refer to Paragraph 8.5.7.3.4.9.

8.5.7.3.4.6 Spring Base with High Voltage Protection Device

The antenna is supplied with a spring base. The high voltage protection device (imbedded in the spring base)
provides protection up to 20 kV rms in case of high-voltage wire contact. A rubber boot is assembled over the
base and lower portion of the fourth antenna element (E-0152). See Figure 8-12.

FOR FLEXIBLE SPRING - PULL

OUT SPRING LOADED KNOB AND
ROTATE 90° TO LOCK PIN IN THE
OUT POSITION. GRASP FIRMLY AND
UFT SUDING TENON TO THE FULL
upposmON.

FOR RIGID SPRING - REVERSE

THE OPERATION AND DEPRESS
THE SUDING TENON.

.;.
.;.; :.
.:. .
::
,',; ".
"::

Figure 8-11. Operation of Rlgidlzed Spring Base

8-22
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

WHIP END PROTECTOR ~

(PIN E76.QOO3-(01) VQ
ANTENNA TIE DOWN KIT
(PIN E76.QOO5-001)

GREEN VERTICAL ANTENNA

(PIN 100-5029)

BOOT
(PIN E76-D004-(01)

SPRING ANTENNA BASE

WITH HIGH VOLTAGE
PROTECTION
(PIN E76-D006.(01)

5109-002

Figure 8-12. SB-V16FHD HF Whip Antenna (100-5109)

8-23
RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.7.3.4.7 Whip End Protector

The whip end protector included with the SB-VI6FHD Antenna attaches to the tip antenna element (E-0155). The
whip antenna protector slides over the antenna tip and self locks in place. See Figure 8-13.
NOTE
If the tip antenna element's original plastic cap is still in place,
remove original plastic cap with a pocket knife before installing
the whip end protector.

WHIP END
PROTECTOR
(PIN E76-DOO3-001)

ANTENNA ELEMENT,
TIP SECTION
(PIN E-D155)
WITH ORIGINAL
PLASTIC CAP REMOVED

5109-004

Figure 8-13. Whip End Protector

8-24
{lJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

8.5.7.3.4.8 Antenna Tie Down Kit

The antenna tie down kit included with the SB-V16FHD Antenna consists of a clamp and rope. Use the clamp
and rope for tying down the antenna. Tie the clamp into the middle of the rope, then slide the clamp to the middle
of the upper whip section. Pull down the antenna and tie one end of the rope securely to an appropriate point on
the vehicle. Then tie the other end of the rope in a triangular arrangement, as shown in Figure 8-14. This
arrangement keeps the antenna from swaying beyond the limits of the vehicle.

Figure 8-14. Antenna Tie Down Kit

8-25
 IJH AR RlS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
INSTALLATION

8.5.7.3.4.9 Installation
standard HF feed-thru antenna base.
Figure 8-15 shows a typical installation of the RF-292 Antenna Mount with a
tion.
An adapter plate (RF part number 919-6227, supplied) is required for this installa
and Coupler installed. The
Figure 8-16 shows the RF-292 Antenna Mount with a RF-288 VHF Antenna Base
connec tor toward the mounting
RF-288 base should be located, as shown in Figure 8-16, with the control
bulkhead.
Mount.
Figure 8-17 shows the SB-VI6FHD Antenna installed on an RF-292 Antenna
ng holes through the
Generally, installation of the RF-292 Antenna Mount consists of drilling five mounti
the opposite side of the mounting
supporting wall or bulkhead, installing two reinforcement plates (supplied) on
of the mount is provided for
surface, and securing the mount with standard hardware. A hole in the bottom
d to prevent cable damage if the
routing the antenna lead outside of the mount. Snap bushings have been supplie
, it is recommended that the
antenna leads are routed through the bulkhead. To prevent possible cable damage
See Figure 8-15.
leads be routed through the mounting surface that is located inside the mount.
Perform the following procedure to install the RF-292 Antenna:
a. Remove the protective cover from the RF-292 Antenna.
ng holes using the
b. Temporarily locate RF-292 Antenna on the mounting surface. Mark the five mounti
mount as a template.
ence. Also check for the
c. Remove the mount and check each proposed mounting hole for possible interfer
clearance needed for the two reinforcement plates.
NOTE

As shown in Figure 8-18, the symmetrical hole placement on the

reinforcement plates allows for a number of variations in
positioning.
d. Center punch and drill each hole with a 1/4-inch drill.
snap-in bushing.
e. If necessary, drill the hole through the bulkhead for routing the cables. Insert the
Hole Size Bushin~ Size
1-1/2" 7/8"
1-1/2" 1-5/16"

f. Secure the RF-292 Antenna to the mounting surface. See Figure 8-15.
g. Route the antenna leads through the bulkhead into the mount.
8-15 and 8-16. Secure the
h. Install the whip antenna base with the supplied hardware as shown in Figures
antenna lead and, if necessary, control cable.
i. Replace the protective cover.

8-26
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION

o o

o o

HF WHIP ANTENNA ADAPTER

lASE PLATE
piN [-0150 PIN 919-6227
FDA SI-Y"I I
S8-Y3~1
REINFORCEMENT PLATE
PIN 919-6228 SHOWN
MOUNTED VERTICAllY ~-24'.1 HEX HO.
(2-AEQ.) IOlT WI
LOCKWASHER AND
FLAT WASHER
(+REQ.)

'... ·20.1 Ih PAN HO.

SCREW, FLAT WASHER.
lOCKWASHER. AND
HEX NUT I,A- 20
(S·REQ.)

1-32 r ~ PAN HD. SCREW

WI LOCK WASHER AND
FLAT WASHER (4-REQ.)

INSTALL SNAP
IU~'NG ON
METAL BULKHEAD
~
'/I 10 .,.. "0'"
ANTENNA MOUNT
COVER PIN 919-6226

ANTENNA
LEAD

Figure 8-15. HF Antenna Base Mounting

8-27
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS ;)JHARRlS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

,.--..,
" !

RF-288 VHF
WHIP ANTENNA BASE AND
COUPLER

3/S-Z4JIY4 HEX HD. BOLT

REINFORCEMENT PLATE
SHOWN MOUNTED
HORIZONTAL.L. Y (2- REO.)
t/ WI LOCKWASHER AND
FLATWASHER C4-REO.)

PIN 919-6228

.;> 8- 32 • 1/2
PAN HD. SCREW
wi LOCKWASHER AND
FLATWASHER (4-REQ.)
INSTALL. SNAP BUSHING
ON METAL BUL.KHEAD
1!V16 10 PIN X-Q270

~-- ANTENNA MOUNT

COVER PIN 919-6226

BRAIDED GROUND STRAP

CONNECTED TO VEHICLE

1/4-20-' 1/2 PAN

/ GROUND

HD. SCREW FL.ATWfOHER. INSTALL SOLID

L.OCKWASHER. AND PLUG WHEN NOT
1/4 -20 HEX NUT USED FOR CABLE
(5-REQ.J ROUTING

FIgure 8-16. VHF Antenna Base MountIng

8-28
mHARRIS RF-S200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

BOOT
PIN E76-G04-o01

SPRING BASE WITH

F--~=-==j HIGH VOLTAGE PROTECTION
VEHICLE MOUNTING PIN E76-GOe-001
LOCATION r---------\
I I
I I HIGH VOLTAGE
I I PROTECTION DEVICE
I I
I
318 - 24 X 1 3/4 HEX HD. BOLT
I

_ii_
REINFORCEMENT PLATE WI LOCKWASHER AND
SHOWN MOUNTED FLATWASHER (4 - REQ.)
HORIZONTALLY (2 - REQ.)
PIN 919-6228

8 - 32 X 1/2 PAN HD. SCREW

WI LOCKWASHER AND
FLATWASHER (4 - REQ.)

INSTALL SNAP BUSHING

ON METAL BULKHEAD ANTENNA LEAD·
1 5/1610 PIN X-0270

ANTENNA MOUNT
COVER PIN 919-6226

·NOTE: USE 1.5 FEET (0.46 METERS)

OR LESS OF RG-213 (WITH
OUTER INSULATION AND
SHIELD REMOVED), WIDE
COPPER STRAP, OR HIGH-
1/4 - 20 X 11/2 PAN HD. VOLTAGE WIRE.
SCREW, FLATWASHER,
LOCKWASHER, AND
1/4 - 20 HEX NUT
(5-REQ.) INSTALL SOUD PLUG
WHEN NOT USED
FOR CABLE ROUTING. 5109'()()1

Figure 8-17. SB-V16FHD Antenna Installed on RF-292 Antenna Mount

8·29
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

ANTENNA MOUNT COVER

(SHOWN WITHOUT SOLID
PLUG INSTALLED)

.
~.
REAR VIEW OF
ANTENNA MOUNTING BASE
SHOWING MOUNTING HOLE
LOCATIONS
, >
REINFORCEMENT PLATE
(SHOWN MOUNTED VERTICALLY)

5109-006

Figure 8-18. RF-292 Antenna Mount Hole Placement

8-30
It HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION

8.5.7.4 RF-382 Fast Tune Automatic Antenna Coupler

The RF-382 Fast Thne Automatic Antenna Coupler uses fast-tune microprocessor-based circuitry. Timing of the
coupler operations are designed to be compatible with Automatic Link Establishment (ALE) operation. The
RF-382 Antenna Coupler is recommended for installations that require the use of an antenna coupler.
When using an RF-382 Antenna Coupler in an RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack System, the S2 DIP switch
on the antenna coupler's A3 Assembly must be set as shown in Figure 8-3. This is done at the factory. Setting this
switch to the specified positions ensures proper operation of the RF-382 Antenna Coupler when used with 125
watt or 150 watt power amplifiers.
8.5.8 Mounting

Shock mounts are available for vehicular installations. These mounts are described in Paragraphs 8.5.8.1 through
8.5.8.6.
8.5.8.1 RF-5071 VSM Single-Unit Vehicular Shock Mount

The RF-5071 VSM is a single-unit vehicular shock mount used with the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power
Amplifier in the 125 watt vehicular configuration. Figure 8-19 shows the RF-5071 VSM as a single-unit shock
mount with the RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier.
8.5.8.2 Power Converter to Power Amplifier Clamp Assembly

In the 125 watt vehicular configuration, the Power Converterto Power Amplifier Clamp Assembly (10521-0120)
secures the RF-5032PA-I25E 125 Watt Power Amplifier to a RF-5056PS DC/DC Power Converter that is
mounted in the RF-5071VSM Shock Mount The power amplifier is removed from the power converter by
loosening the two clamp assembly wing nuts. See Figure 8-20.
8.5.8.3 RF-5073 System Shock Mount for RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier and
RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter

The RF-5073 System Shock Mount includes a rugged shock mount for the 150 watt vehicular configuration.
Figure 8-21 shows the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and the RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier
mounted on the RF-5073 System Shock Mount.

8-31
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.8.4 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit and Vehicular Shock Mount

The 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit, 10372-0850-01, is a vehicular accessory for the ANtpRC-138 Manpack System
that allows an RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter to receive power from a vehicle's 24 volt Direct Current (DC)
power system.
The 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit provides Electromagnetic Interference (EM!) filtering, spike and surge protection,
ovelVoltage and overcurrent protection. A connector on the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit allows an external power
amplifier to be connected. The external power amplifiers that can be used in this system configuration are as
follows:

• RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier

• RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier

• RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier

When the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter is used with an external power amplifier, cable assembly 10372-0813 is required.
A vehicular shock mount, 10372-0800-01, provides isolation from high-impact shock and vibration in vehicular
installations.
The vehicular shock mount can accommodate either an RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and a 24 Vdc Filter
Adapter or an RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and battery case. When the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter is removed from
the shock mount, an RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and battery case are mounted on the vehicular shock mount. If
Nickel-Cadmium (Ni-Cd) batteries are used, they are charged through the internal battery charger of the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter when the radio power is turned off.
The 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit mounted on the shock mount is shown in Figure 8-22.

8-32
mHARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

TOP VIEW

I
I

1.381N SIDE VIEW 1.38 IN FRONT VIEW

(3.50 CM) (3.50 CM)
L. 100lN ~--7.50IN
f-J
(26.5 CM) I
(19.05 CM)

...
I-
p--- -- -. - .--_. - "V .. .---- .. _.- --~

5.5 IN
(14.0 CM)

. . . .1 IIIIl

~: ]
tf lI!l

I I r I 1 ~ 160 IN
(4.06CM)
T
,
'11----10.80IN _ _ 'I i ~ 5.50IN --J
127.43 CM) I I (14.0 CM) I
I
L

.-- , 2.20 IN . 1o----7.78IN

(30.99 CM) (19.76 eM)

f 4X 0.437 (011.1mm)
REAR VIEW

RF·5071VSM 5.50 IN
MOUNTING HOLE TEMPLATE (139.7 mm)

+I-- 10.80 IN
(274.3 mm)

• EXCLUDING INSTALLATION CABLES 5000E .()3()

Figure 8-19. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier In RF-5071VSM Single-Unit Shock
Mount

8-33
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS

CONTROL CPLR CONTROL D.C. POWER

o
J8 J9 Jl0

J12 ~
RFIN ~
GND
CLAMP
ASSEMBLY o WING NUTS
(2 PLACES)

@~~ J1
12-28 VDC IN
J3
A\JX. DC IN
+26 VDC OUT

RF-5071VSM
SHOCK MOUNT MNPK...()40A

Figure 8-20. RF-5032PA-125E 125 Watt Power Amplifier and RF-5056PS DC/DC
Power Converter In RF-5071 VSM Shock Mount

8-34
(lJHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

RIT
WING NUTS
(2 PLACES)
r , r ,-
R00-29 .6000
USB OFF CLR OFF
c===
L JL J L J L J

000000
00000000
0000000000
0000000000
000000000000
000000000000
000000000000
RESET A1\ 000000000000
0000000000

~J2 ~-'?' 0000000000

00000000
00000
C81 PA CONTROL

PA
WING NUTS MNPK-025
(2 PLACES)

Figure 8-21. RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and RF-5033PA-150 150 Watt Power Amplifier
Mounted on RF-5073 System Shock Mount

8-35
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

10372-0850-01
24 VDC FILTER/ADAPTER

10372-0800-01 SOOOP-301 01
VEHICULAR SHOCK MOUNT

Figure 8-22. 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter In Vehicular Shock Mount

8.5.8.4.1 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit

This section describes mounting instructions, system configuration, interface definitions, and theory of operation
for the Filter/Adapter Unit and RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter.
8.5.8.4.1.1 Mounting the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit
The adapter mounts on the shock mount by seating the unit firmly against the rear of the shock mount and
tightening the four captive screws on the side of the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit.
8.5.8.4.1.2 Mounting the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter to the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit
Fasten the Rf-1694 Receiver-Transmitter in place on the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit as shown in Figure 8-23.
When it is properly aligned, the Rf-1694 Receiver-Transmitter fits snugly into the connector on the 24 Vdc
Filter/Adapter Unit. Finally, position the retaining clips on the front of the shock mount to hold the radio at its
front panel. Tighten the shock mount thumbscrews to hold the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit and RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter securely in place.
Figure 8-24 shows the system configuration when it is used with an external power amplifier. In this
configuration, power and control signals are supplied to the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit on the PI connector by
cable assembly 10372-0816. This cable interfaces with all RF-5200 FALCONTM series power amplifiers. DC
power and control signals leave the Filter/Adapter on the 11 connector by cable assembly 10372-0813-01. This
connects to J6 on the front panel of the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter. The 12 and 13 connectors provide
accessory power, if required. J2 can supply 5 A (maximum) of unfiltered power and 13 can supply 2.5A
(maximum) of filtered power. The DC power input is limited to 15 Amps by circuit breaker CB 1.

8-36
{lJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

Figure 8-25 shows the system configuration without an external power amplifier. In this configuration, power is
supplied to the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter on the PI connector by cable assembly 10372-0812-01. This cable
interfaces to a +21.5 Vdc through +32.0 Vdc power supply such as an automotive lead acid battery or an
RF-5052PS 12{24 Vdc converter. DC power leaves the Filter/Adapter on the J4 and J5 connectors which plug into
the rear of the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter. The J2 and 13 connectors provide accessory power, if required. J2
can supply 5 Amps (maximum) of unfiltered current and J3 can supply 2.5 Amps (maximum) of filtered current.
Tables 8-9 through 8-13 contain interface definitions for the external connectors on the 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter
Assembly.

10372-0850-01
24 VDC FILTER/ADAPTER
FOR RT·1694 RECEIVER·
TRANSMITTER

10372-0800-01
VEHICULAR SHOCK MOUNT

SOOOP-305 01

Figure 8-23. Mounting the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter to the Filter/Adapter Unit

8-37
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

10372-0816
CABLE UNFILTERED POWER
AND CONTROL

J3
FILTERED
EXTERNAL POWER FILDC AUXPOWER
POWER SUPPLY FIL DC
AMPUFIER FIL DC CONDITIONER

r-....&.-5...... ..&.-.......... 10372.0813-01

.............
+24VDC RT·1694
POWER
SYSTEM

CABLE
UNFILTERED POWER
AND CONTROL
5OOOP-302A

Figure 8-24. System COnfiguration with an External Power Amplifier

10372-0812.01 24 VDC FILTER/ADAPTER

CABLE
UNFILTERED POWER CONTROL

J3
FILTERED
+24VDC POWER FILDC AUXPOWER
POWER SUPPLY FIL DC
SYSTEM AL DC CONDITIONER

J5

RT·1694

J6

5OOOP-303A

Figure 8-25. System COnfiguration Without an External Power Amplifier

8-38
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

Table 8·9. J4 and J5 Battery Connectors

Pin Definition Signal Characteristics
1 DC Return DC ground return
2 No connection No connection
3 DC return DC ground return
4 No connection No connection
5 Fil + DC Filtered + 21.5 to 32.0 Vdc 4 Amps maximum
6 No connection No connection

Table 8·10. P1 DC/Control In Connector

Pin Definition Signal Characteristics
A HOP Oock Out * 0 v, + 5 V Complimentary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
(CMOS) levels
B PA Control Data - * 0 V, + 5 V differential asynchronous control data, 150 k baud
C PA Control Data + * 0 V, + 5 V differential asynchronous control data, 150 k baud
D PAON/OFF * 0 V, 35 V maximum, open collector
E DC Return DC ground return
F DC Return DC ground return
G PA Feedback - * PA feedback ground return
H PA Feedback + * PA analog feedback sense
Minimum + 0.5 V
Typical + 4.3 V
Maximum + 7.0 V
J + DC Input + 21.5 V to 32.0 V, 12.5 A maximum
K + DC Input + 21.5 V to 32.0 V, 12.5 A maximum
• =PA/RT Control Signal
Mating Connector Vendor Part Number 85l-08EC12-lOS50
Mating Connector Part Number J05-ooo7-ool

8-39
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8-11. J1 DC/Control Out Connector

Pin Definition Signal Characteristics
A HOP Dock Output * 0 v, + 5 V CMOS levels
B External PA Data - * 0 V, + 5 V differential asynchronous control data, 150 k baud
C External PA Data + * 0 V, + 5 V differential asynchronous control data, 150 k baud
D PA Power ON/OFF Output * 0 V, + 5 V CMOS levels, active low
E DC Return DC ground return
F DC Return DC ground return
G External PA Feedback- * PA Feedback ground return
H External PA Feedback + Input * PA Analog Feedback sense,
Minimum + 0.5 V
Typical + 4.3 V
Maximum + 7.0 V
J Fil+ DC Filtered + 21.5 V to 32.0 V, 12.5 A maximum
K Fil+ DC Filtered + 21.5 V to 32.0 V, 12.5 A maximum
* = PA/RT Control Signal
Mating Connector Vendor Part Number 85l-08EC12-lOP50
Mating Connector Part Number 105-0005-002

Table 8-12. J3 Filtered Auxiliary Power Connector

Pin Definition Signal Characteristics
A Shield DC ground return
B DC Return DC ground return
C No Connection No connection
D No Connection No connection
E No Connection No connection
F Fil + DC Filtered + 21.5 V to 32.0 V, 2.5 A maximum
Mating Connector Vendor Part Number 85l-08EClO-6P50
Mating Connector Part Number J05-ooo5-009

8-40
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

Table 8-13. J2 Unfiltered Auxiliary Power Connector

Pin Definition Signal Characteristics
A Shield DC ground
B +DC Unfiltered + 21.5 V to 32.0 V, 5 A maximum
C DC Return DC ground return
D DC Return DC ground return
E +DC Unfiltered + 21.5 V to 32.0 V, 5 A maximum
Mating Connector Vendor Part Number 851-08ECI4-5P50
Mating Connector Part Number J05-ooo5-oo8

8.5.8.5 Universal Vehicular Shock Mount

An exploded view of the universal vehicular shock mount is shown in Figure 8-26. The universal vehicular shock
mount provides isolation from high-impact shock and vibration in vehicular installations.
This shock mount can be used to mount an RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter with the Filter/Adapter Unit, or it can
also be used to mount an RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter connected to its battery case. To adapt for these two
variations, the bracket (item M on Figure 8-26) located on the top tray can be moved to a backward or forward
position to hold either combination of radio and Filter/Adapter Unit or radio and battery.
Figure 8-27 shows that the bottom tray of the shock mount is not symmetrical with relation to the tray edge to
mounting hole dimension, front to back. If necessary, this bottom tray can be turned around relative to the top tray
in order to fit in a tight space.
The dimensions for the shock mount are as follows:

• Shock Mount Size -14.6 L x 10.8 W x 3.2 H inches

• System Size with RT-1694 - 15.6 L x 10.8 W x 5.0 H inches

Table 8-14 lists the hardware for the universal shock mount.

8-41
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJjHARRlS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

i
<»

ALTERNATE FRONT TO BACK

I CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT POSITIONS

"'"

5OOOP-304 01

Figure 8-26. Vehicular Shock Mount (1 0372-0800-01)

8-42
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

.265 IN. DIA.

(4 PLACES)

.....-------\-\
\
----n~
1.9 IN.

~o

8.75 IN.

(0(2\:
~l) 0 C\
l~,
° °
i

1.15 IN.

-r
I. ~I
'41 3.94 IN.

10.55 IN.

5OOOP-306 01

Figure 8·27. Hole Position of Bottom Mounting Tray

8-43
RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mJHARRlS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8-14. Universal Shock Mount Parts List

Letter Part Cage
Name Dimensions
Code Number Code
A BOLT HEX HEAD - MS35308-302B 96906
B LOCKWASHER, SPLIT SS 1/4 MS35338-139B 96906
C CLAMP ASSEMBLY - 812426-801 37695
D FLAT HEAD SCREW 10-32X5/8 MS24693-C273B 96906
E MOUNTING TRAY - 10372-0896-01 14304
F NUT 10-32 MS21044C3 96906
G RESILIENT MOUNT - 435653-4 37695
H GROUND STRAP - 938770-1 37695
I TRAY - 10372-0897-01 96906
J FLATWASHER .188X.375 MS15795-807B 96906
K LOCKWASHER, SPLIT SS#1O MS35338-138B 96906
L SCREW 10-32 10372-1051-01 14304
M BRACKET - 10372-0891-01 14304

8.5.8.6 RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Short Shock Mount

The RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter Short Shock Mount (10372-0880) is a vehicular accessory for the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter. This shock mount secures the R{f, without a battery pack, to the vehicle. The short shock
mount provides isolation from high-impact shock and vibration in vehicular installations. When installed in the
short shock mount, the R{f receives 24 Vdc power from an external power amplifier via the front panel power
amplifier connector.
The dimensions for the short shock mount, including the thumbscrews, are 9.78 L x 10.75 W x 5.35 H inches
(24.84 L x 27.31 W x 13.59 H cm).
The short shock mount is shown in Figure 8-28. Table 8-15 lists the hardware for the short shock mount.

8-44
;))HARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

L K
(3 PLACES)

M
(3 PLACES)
A
(4 PLACES)

G
(4 PLACES)

D
(16 PLACES)

MNPK-ll36A
H
(2 PLACES)
F
(16 PLACES)

Figure 8-28. Short Shock Mount (10372-0880)

8-45
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8-15. Short Shock Mount Parts List

Letter Dimensions Part Cage
Name
Code Number Code
A BOLT HEX HEAD - MS35308-303 96906
B LOCKWASHER, SPLIT SS 1/4 MS35338-139 96906
C CLAMP ASSEMBLY - 812426-801 37695
D FLAT HEAD SCREW 1O-24X1/2 MS24693-C72 96906
E MOUNTING TRAY - 10372-0887-01 14304
F NUT 10-32 H34-0034-005 14304
G RESILIENT MOUNT - 435653-4 37695
H GROUND STRAP - 938770-1 37695
I TRAY - 10372-0886-01 14304
J FLAT HEAD SCREW 4-40X1/4 MS24693-C2 96906
K HOUSING, Rtf INTERFACE - 660146-801 37695
L LOCKWASHER, SPLIT SS#6 MS35338-136 96906
M PAN HEAD SCREW SS 6-32X5/16 MS51957-27 96906
N LATCH, TERMINATION - 10372-0893-01 14304
0 LATCH, BLOCK - 10372-0895-01 14304

8.5.8.7 Mounting the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler

The RF-5033PA-20E 20 Wan Power Amplifier can be mounted directly to a ship's bulkhead, a vehicle frame, or
to any other mechanically and electrically convenient surface. Figure 8-29 shows the spacing for the
RF-5030PA-20E mounting holes.
8.5.8.8 Mounting the RF-382 Antenna Coupler
The coupler can be mounted directly to a ship's bulkhead, an antenna mast, a vehicle frame, or to any other
mechanically and electrically convenient surface. The RF-382 Antenna Coupler may also be installed on the
RF-285-04 Rack Mount (optional) for increased mounting stability and ease of removal, as shown in Figure 8-30.
8.5.8.9 Mounting the RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply
The RF-5055PS ACfDC Power Supply can be mounted directly to a ship's bulkhead, a vehicle frame, or to any
other mechanically and electrically convenient surface. Figure 8-31 shows the spacing for the power supply
mounting holes. Use 1/4-20 bolts, lockwashers, and flatwashers to secure the power supply to the mounting
surface.

8-46
mJHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

1. PLACE TEMPLATE AT DESIRED LOCATION.

2. CENTER PUNCH THE TEMPLATE AT THE
LOCATIONS SHOWN. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE BASE MATERIAL
HAS BEEN MARKED.
3. DRILL 4 HOLES USING A 17/64" OR 6.70 mm TWIST DRILL

CENTER POINT OF SLOT

""---!

4.062 IN.

1---------- 7.75 IN. - - - - - - - - 1

MNPK-043

Figure 8-29. Mounting Hole Spacing for the RF-5030PA-20E 20 Watt Power Amplifier/Coupler

8-47
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
INSTALLATION

DRILL 3/8 IN (0.95 CM) MOUNTING HOLES (4)

USE 5/16 x 18 STAINLESS STEEL
HARDWARE (4 PLACES)

19.25 IN
(48.9 CM) 15±.12 IN
OUTSIDE (38.1 ±.32 CM)
CLEARANCE DISTANCE BETWEEN
DIMENSIONS
• • MOUNTING HOLE
CENTERS

o 0

~
7.25 IN (18.4 CM)
DISTANCE
BETWEEN
MOUNTING
HOLE CENTERS

WEIGHT
30LBS
(13.6 KG)
~~fT
fF==
O~
(17.5 CM)

OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS
111N (27.9 CM)

SIDE VIEW TOP VIEW

'l
RF·285-04
MOUNTING TRAY
4 POUNDS (1.81 KG) @~T
.875 IN DIA .404 IN DIA
(2.22CM)
(1 CM) 7251N 12.85 IN
4 HOLES 4 HOLES (18.42 CM) (32.64CM)

~
(ACCESS (MOUNTING
/HOLE)
HOLE)~~
~@

.rr=
.. 2.80 ±.O1 IN
• (7.1 ±'02 CM) Ir

I
L.881N
(2.24CM)
~
I+- ;~?~: g:.) 16.25 IN 1.842 ±'01 IN
5OOOE-028
... (41.28 CM) (4.68 ±.O2 CM)

Figure 8-30. RF-382 Antenna Coupler Dimensions and Weight

IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

I ~
nil"r_ _ ('4.6'OCIII
5.750_IN --=-=--1 r

10.856 IN
(27.570 eM)

JlL..--- ----' L MNPK-037

Figure 8-31. RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply Mounting Hole Spacing

8-49
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.9 Manpack COnfiguration Instructions

Figure 8-9 shows the parts of the manpack transceiver, and Figures 8-32 and 8-33 show the recommended
sequence for assembly.
Figure 8-32 recommends performing a self-test to test battery voltage as soon as the battery case is attached.
Refer to Chapter 2, Paragraph 2.3.1. A charged battery gives a reading above +25.0 volts. A voltage reading
below +24.0 volts generally indicates that the battery requires charging (Ni-Cd batteries) or replacing (lithium
batteries).
Figure 8-33 shows and describes how to connect the handset and the antenna to the radio.

~WARNINGI
When the manpack configuration is not grounded, it is possible
that the operator will experience minor shocks while
transmitting.
8.5.9.1 Battery Information
The manpack transceiver is supplied with a Battery Case, 10372-1300 or 10530-1300-02, which holds two Ni-Cd
(rechargeable) or two lithium-sulfur dioxide (disposable) batteries. The batteries provide +24 Vdc (nominal) to
the manpack transceiver.
8.5.9.1.1 Battery Voltage
The manpack transceiver continuously monitors battery voltage for acceptable levels. It displays the voltage during
battery self-test.
The BB-5901U Ni-Cd Battery (10075-1345-01) is rated for use at temperatures between -200 C and +700 C.
These batteries are more effective at moderate to cooler temperatures; excessive heat or cold temperatures reduce
battery life and degrade banery performance.
The BA-55901U Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide (Li-S02) Battery is a high-energy battery with a longer operational life
than the Ni-Cd battery. The Li-S02 battery performs effectively at temperatures between -200 C and +700 C, but
voltage drops rapidly in high-power situations and during temperature extremes.

During self-test, battery voltage and charge levels display on the front panel display. If the battery voltage is
below +24.0 V, or if LOW BATIERY or REPLACE BATIERY appears on the front panel display, replace the
batteries in the battery case.

8-50
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

RT·1694
RECEIVER·TRANSMITTER

BATTERY CASE
(WITH BATTERIES)

ATTACH BATTERY CASE

THE BATTERY CASE FITS ON THE BACK OF THE 3 FASTEN BOTH SIDE-CLASPS TO ATTACH THE CASE.
RECEIVER·TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY. SET THE BATTERY
CASE ON A FLAT SURFACE, FACE UP, AND FOLLOW 4 TURN THE FUNCTION CONTROL TO AN OPERATING
THESE STEPS: MODE. IF LOW BATTERY OR REPLACE BATTERY
APPEARS ON THE LED DISPLAY, REPLACE THE
1 UNE UP THE CONNECTORS ON THE REAR OF THE BATTERIES IN THE BATTERY CASE. RUN BATTERY
RECEIVER·TRANSMmER WITH THE MATING TEST AS INSTRUCTED IN PARAGRAPH 2.3.1.
CONNECTORS OF THE BATTERY CASE.

2 PRESS THE BATTERY CASE FIRMLY AGAINST THE

RECEIVER·TRANSMITTER. THE BATTERY CASE FITS
EASILY WHEN CORRECTLY UNED UP.

5OOOP-llQ2A·VP

Figure 8-32. Attach Battery case

8-51
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

DOT (RECESSED)

CONNECT HANDSET
THE HANDSET CABLE CONNECTS TO THE AUDIOIFILL CONNECTOR.
REMOVE THE AUDIOIFILL CONNECTOR COVER.

TO ATTACH THE HANDSET, UNE UP THE FLAT SURFACE OR INDICATOR

OF THE CABLE CONNECTOR WITH THE RECESSED DOT ON THE AUDIO/
FILL CONNECTOR.

PUSH THE CONNECTOR OF THE HANDSET CABLE FIRMLY ONTO THE

AUDIOIFILL CONNECTOR AND TWIST CLOCKWISE.

AFTER REMOVING THE HANDSET, REPLACE THE AUDIO/FILL CONNEe-

TOR COVER.

CONNECT ANTENNA
REMOVE THE CAP FROM THE ANTENNA CONNECTOR. ENGAGE THE
ANTENNA BASE SECURELY INTO THIS CONNECTOR.
5OOOP-Q03A·VP

Figure 8-33. COnnect Handset and Antenna

8-52
(II HARRIS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

8.5.9.1.2 Installlng the Batteries In the Battery case

Optimal perfonnance requires using two Ni-Cd or two Li-S02 batteries in the battery case, but the manpack will
operate from either a single BB-590/U Ni-Cd or BA-5590/U Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide battery.
NOTE

Operating the RT-1694(P) Receiver-Transmitter from a single

BA-5590/U Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide battery results in reduced
power output. Operating the RT-1694B(P)/U
Receiver-Transmitter from a single BA-5590/U Lithium-Sulfur
Dioxide battery does not result in reduced power output.
The batteries slide into the top section of the case and rest on the rubber pad on the bottom of the case. The
connectors are in the outside comers.

I WARNING I
Never ship the battery case with batteries in it Never store
batteries in the battery case for over 30 days.
8.5.9.1.3 Charging NI-Cd Batteries

The Solar Battery Charger (10372-0750-01) is a lightweight photovoltaic power supply designed to recharge the
BB-590/U Ni-Cd batteries.
The solar panel consists of five interconnected panels that fold together for easy carrying in a canvas carry case.
Three metal pins are provided with the battery charger. When these pins are placed through loops at the back of
each segment, the panels are aligned in a straight line.
When the connector, provided as part of the panel, is attached to the connector on the BB-590/U Ni-Cd Battery,
the battery is recharged in approximately six to 12 hours (depending on weather conditions and the condition of
the battery). Refer to the Accessory section of this manual for complete details and an illustration of the solar
battery charger.

I WARNING I
Do not use the Solar Battery Charger (or any other device) to
charge lithium-sodium dioxide batteries.
The RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply (10372-5700-01) uses a standard, three-conductor line cord with a
three-prong grounding plug to provide Alternating Current (AC) input. An input switch on the converter plate
selects 115 or 230 Vac.
When the standard, military-style connector (part number MS3116J12-lOS) is attached to the power amplifier
connector on the radio's front panel, one or two BB-590/U Ni-Cd battery(ies) can be recharged in approximately
14 hours while they remain in the battery case, depending on the condition of the battery(ies). Refer to the
Accessory section for complete details and an illustration of the RF-5055PS AC/DC Power Supply.

8-53
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.9.1.4 Storing Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide (LI-S02) Batteries

Store the lithium-sulfur dioxide battery in its original shipping container. Recommended storage is in a cool,
sprinkler protected, ventilated area where the temperature is maintained below 1600 F (700 C).

~WARNINGI
DO NOT store lithium-sulfur dioxide batteries with other
hazardous materials.
8.5.9.1.5 Handling LI-S02 Batteries
Many safety features are built into the lithium-sulfur dioxide battery to ensure stability under combat conditions;
however, anyone who handles Li-S02 should observe the following warning.

~WARNINGI
Do not charge, short circuit, incinerate, disassemble, or mutilate
the BA-55901U Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide Battery. Do not expose
to fire or temperatures above 1600 F (700 C); otherwise battery
may rupture, releasing toxic material.

~WARNINGI
Do not use any BA-55901U Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide Battery built
before 1980.
If a LiS02 battery accidentally ruptures, ventilate the area and wash away any spilled residue with water.

~WARNINGI
Do not use a halon-type fire extinguisher on a lithium-sulfur
dioxide battery fire. In the event of a fire near a Li-S02 battery,
rapid cooling is important Use a Carbon Dioxide (C02)
extinguisher. Control of the equipment fire and cooling may
prevent the battery from venting and potentially exposing
lithium metal. In the event that lithium metal becomes involved
in the fire, the use of a graphite-based, Class-D fire extinguisher
is recommended.
NOTE

Be sure to follow all of the battery manufacturer's safety

precautions.

8-54
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

8.5.9.1.6 Disposing of Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide Batteries

~WARNINGI
A partially discharged lithium-sulfur dioxide battery is
considered to be hazardous waste.

DO NOT dispose of lithium-sulfur dioxide batteries with

ordinary trash/refuse.
Completely discharged batteries are not considered hazardous or reactive. The BA-5590/U Lithium-Sulfur
Dioxide Battery includes an internal discharge switch. To discharge the battery, activate this switch per the battery
manufacturer's instructions.

I WARNING I
Keep lithium-sulfur dioxide batteries away from open flame or
heat.

8-55
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.9.2 Carrying the Manpack

The following pack/frame instructions provide information on securing the manpack radio and using the pack/
frame assembly (including using H-style suspenders). Recommendations are also provided for carrying methods.

I WARNING I
When the manpack configuration is not grounded, it is possible
that the operator will experience minor shocks while
transmitting.
8.5.9.2.1 Instructions for Canvas carry Bag
The canvas carry bag (10372-0460-01) is used to carry and protect the manpack transceiver. To secure the
manpack in the canvas carry bag shown in Figure 8-34, perform the following procedure:
a. Secure the radio in the canvas carry bag.
b. Fasten the snap tabs around the radio handles.

REMOVABLE TO STRAP ON
SHOULDER STRAP PACKIFRAME

TO FASTEN DIRECTLY
TOPACKIFRAME
WRAPAROUND
RADIO HANDLES
A.L1.C.E.
POCKET FOR CLIPS
OPERATOR GUIDE (10372-0455-07)

ANTENNA
ADDITIONAL STORAGE BAG
A.LI.C.E. CUPS (10372-0451-01 )
ATTACHING LOOPS

FASTENS STRAP TO
PACKIFRAME OR WAIST BELT
5OOOP{)6()(A) 01

Figure 8-34. Canvas Carry Bag (10372-0460-01)

8-56
;)JHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

8.5.9.2.2 Instructions for Pack/Frame Assembly

The Pack!Frame Assembly (10372-0450-01) provides a convenient method for carrying the radio operator's gear,
including the manpack. The pack/frame, shown in Figure 8-35, is secured to the radio operator by perfonning the
following procedure:
a. Place the shoulder straps over the operator's shoulders. Adjust the straps to fit.
b. Fasten the waist strap, and adjust it to fit
c. Fasten the canvas carry bag to the pack/frame straps (four places).

1 I - r -_ _ STRAP TENSION
RELEASE
QUICK-RELEASE_--:7:il~'2}
~ . ~~~~, FASTENER
SHOULDER
STRAP

CONNECT TO CANVAS
CARRY BAG
PULL TO RELEASE
WAIST STRAP

PULL TO ADJUST CONNECT BAG

WAIST STRAP TO FRAME

WAIST STRAP

!I..--- CONNECT TO CANVAS

CARRY BAG

BACK SHOWN 5OOOP-ll61A DI

Figure 8-35. Pack/Frame Assembly (10372-0450-01)

8·57
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.9.2.3 Instructions for H-Style Suspenders

H-Style Suspenders (10372-0455-04) also provide a means of carrying lightweight gear. To wear the H-Style
Suspenders, shown in Figure 8-36, perform the following procedure:
a. Place the shoulder strap over the operator's shoulders.
b. Adjust the strap to fit.
c. Fasten the equipment belt, and adjust it to fit.

VIEW OF
OPPOSITE SIDE
ADJUST STRAP (2) ......~~_ OF STRAP

SHOULDER STRAP
(2) (FRONT)

\ r--";~ LOWER STRAP (2)

(BACK)

EQUIPMENT BELT

BUTT PACK
(SHOWN REMOVED FROM BELT)
(10372-0455-05)
5OOOP-ll63 DI

Figure 8-36. H-Style Suspenders (10372-0455-04)

8-58
IJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

8.5.9.2.4 Alternative Carrying Methods

The manpack transceiver can be transported in many ways. The suggestions listed below are recommendations of
carrying methods, and they are shown in Figure 8-37:

• Place the radio in the canvas carry bag. Wear the canvas carry bag on the chest attached to the pack/frame
strap.

• Remove the pack from the pack/frame. Mount the canvas carry bag (with radio) on the cargo shelf on the
frame.

• Place the canvas carry bag (with radio) in the pack on the frame (on operator's back).

• Carry the canvas carry bag on the shoulder (with or without antenna bag and/or butt pack).

RADIO MAY
BE CARRIED
ON BACK RADIO SHOWN
IN FRONT
/

SOOOP.Q64 01

Figure 8-37. Examples of Carrying Methods

8.5.9.2.5 Using the Manpack Radio Bag (10530-0460-01)

The Manpack Radio Bag (10530-0460-01) provides the ability to store and carry all items that make up the
manpack radio system, plus two extra batteries. Figure 8-38 shows the suggested locations for storing all manpack
items. Figure 8-39 shows an Rtf in the Manpack Radio Bag with the handset and antenna attached. ready for
operation.
NOTE

The Rtf is secured in the Manpack Radio Bag with two Rtf
Handle Straps. See Figure 8-38.

8-59
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS IJHARRlS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY

ANTENNA
ANTENNA
BASE

RT·1694

RIT
HANDLE STRAPS
(2 PLACES)

CWKEY
WITH
KNEE CUP

SPARE
BATTERIES (2)

MNPK-oS7

Figure 8-38. Storing Manpack Radio System Items In the Manpack Radio Bag
mJHARRlS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

MNPK-058

Figure 8-39. Manpack Radio System Ready for Operation

8-61
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

8.5.10 Interfacing the RT-1694 to Non-Harris Equipment

In general, refer to the documentation provided with the non-Harris equipment for interface information. See
Figure 8-40 for RT-1694 to DMDG (OA-8990/P) interface information. See Figure 8-41 for RT-1694 to KIA3-C
interface information. See Figure 8-42 for Rf-1694 to KY-99 interface information. Tables 8-16,8-17, and 8-18
provide the pin assignments for the AUDIO/FILL, DATA, and PA connectors on the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter front panel.

~
.0
The cable assemblies shown in Figures 8-40, 8-41, and 8-42 can
be damaged by static discharge. Failure to take the proper
precautions may damage these assemblies. For more
information, refer to the Safety Summary at the beginning of this
manual.
NOTE

The cable assemblies shown in Figures 8-40, 8-41, and 8-42 are
required when using the modem internal to the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter.

DMDG RT-1694
(J3 SAT CONNECTOR) (J2 DATA CONNECTOR)
PIN PIN

DATAIN F - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C DATA OUT

DATA OUT C - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - D DATAIN

E +24 VOLTS

GROUND D PWBASSY P RTS

RXGND G

SAT E
1
- J GROUND

(J4 HF CONNECTOR) C
PTT
MNPK·055

Figure 8-40. RT-1694 to DMDG (OA-8990/P) Interface cable Diagram

(10530-9870-01 )

8-62
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

KL43-e RT·1694
(6 PIN AUDIO) (J2 DATA CONNECTOR)
PIN PIN

DATAOUT F ------------------- D DATAIN

DATAIN E - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C DATAOUT

GROUND A - - - - - - - - - - T_ _ J GROUND

PTT C - - - - - - - - E +24VOLTS
PWB ASS. 11- _
P RTS

MNPK-056

Figure 8-41. RT-1694 to KL43-C Interface Cable Diagram

(1 0530-9860-01 )

KY·99 RT·1694
(J3 CONNECTOR) (J2 DATA CONNECTOR)
PIN PIN

TX DATA
rg
, rD
,
DATA IN

RXDATA I7 I I I C DATA OUT

INTTXCLK 110 I I I M SYNC CLK IN

EXT TX/RX CLK 1 8 I I I R SYNCCLKOUT

BPTT 1 3 I : P I
RTS

I I
PWBASSY
I
E
+24V

GND

CTS
1 I
6

11
I I J
L
GND

CTS
L.J L.J

MNPK-059

Figure 8-42. RT-1694 to KY-99 Interface cable Diagram

(10530-9880-01 )

8-63
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mlHARRlS
INSTALLATION RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 8-16. Front Panel AUDIO/FILL Connector Pin Assignments

Connector
and Pin Signal Signal Characteristics
H-A Ground analog Ground
H-B Receiver audio output ~3.87 volts nns audio into I K ohm load, variable
vol.
H-C Push-To-Talk (PTf) keyline input or PIT active low pull down to ground/or 0 V, +5 V
fill Request-To-Send (IUS) input CMOS levels
H-D Transmit microphone audio input 1.5 mV nns ±10%, Zin =150 ohms ± 10%
H-E Retransmit keyline output or fill clock oV, +5 V CMOS levels
output
H-F Fill data Input/Output (I/O) oV, +5 V CMOS levels

Table 8-17. Front Panel DATA Connector Pin Assignments

Connector
and Pin Signal Signal Characteristics
J2-A Fixed level Receive (RX) audio out 2.2 Vp-p, 10 Hz - 10 kHz, Rout =600 ohms
12-B Fixed level Transmit (TX) audio in 2.2 Vp-p, 10 Hz - 10 kHz, Rin =100 K
J2-C Data out RS-232C ±12 V levels or MIL-STD-188-114A ±6
V level
J2-D Data in RS-232C ±12 V levels or MIL-STD-188-114A ±6
V level
*J2-E + Battery output lor remote power on +19.5 V to +32 V, O.lA max/or active low pull
input down to ground (internal jumper selectable)
12-F TX keyline +5 V CMOS input, active low pull down to ground
J2-H RLSD Output, RS-232C ±12 V levels or
MIL-STD-188-114A ±6 V level
12-J Ground Ground
12-K Remote async data in RS-232C ±12 V levels or MIL-STD-188-114A ±6
V level
12-L Clear-To-Send (CTS) Output, RS-232C ±12 V levels or
MIL-STD-188-114A ±6 V level
J2-M Sync clock in RS-232C ±12 V levels or MIL-STD-188-114A ±6
V level
12-N Remote async data out RS-232C ±12 V levels or MIL-STD-188-114A ±6
V level
12-P RTS Input, RS-232C ±12 V levels or
MIL-STD-188-114A ±6 V level
J2-R Sync clock out RS-232C ±12 V levels or MIL-STD-188-114A ±6
V level
*Nonnal Jumper E I to E2

8-64
I) HARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

Table 8-18. Front Panel PA Connector Pin Assignments

Connector
and Pin Signal Signal Characteristics
J6-A Hop clock oV, +5 V CMOS levels
J6-B PA control data - oV, +5 V differential asynch control data, 150 K
baud
J6-C PA control data + oV, +5 V differential asynch control data, 150 K
baud
J6-D /pAPOWERON oV, +5 V CMOS levels, active low
J6-E Ground return battery charger DC ground return
J6-F ExtR/fDC- DC ground return
J6-0 PA feedback- PA feedback ground return
J6-H PA feedback + PA analog feedback sense, minimum - +0.5 V,
typical- +4.3 V, maximum - +7.0 V
J6-J Ext Charger DC + +10 V to +32 V, 4.0A maximum
J6-K ExtR/fDC+ +19.5 V to +32.0 V, l.OA maximum, (100 mW
exciter mode only)

--. -. /

8-65
 mH AR RIS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
INSTALLATION

8.6 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT

sure the system is installed
Installation checkout has three phases. Phase 1 is a pre-energizing check to make
's power up and preliminary
correctly, and that all support items are available. Phase 2 covers the radio system
tests. Phase 3 tests the functions of the radio system.
8.6.1 Phase 1 - Inspection and Pre-Power Up Procedures
that the following items are
When the radio system is installed and all connector cables are attached, verify
completed:

• All connectors are attached and associated hardware is secure.

• Check that system units are connected to ground, preferably at a single point.
good ground.
• Check that ground wires are connected between the radio system units and a known

• Check securing hardware to be sure the equipment cannot be tipped over or moved.
equipment operation.
• Check that area cooling is adequate for removing heat that may develop during
for the radio system's
• Verify that the power source is of adequate capability and adequately protected
load, and that installation of the power cable is correct
tal contact.
• Verify that the antenna is in place, correctly connected, and protected against acciden
, for operational readiness.
• Check any companion equipment, such as the power supply, or remote control
8.6.2 Phase 2 - Initial Settings and Power Up

To tum the radio system on, refer to Chapter 2, Paragraph 2.3.

8.6.3 Phase 3 -Insta llation Verification/Unit Checkout
Refer to Chapter 2, Paragraph 2.3.1.
To verify power amplifier performance, run Built-In Test (BIT) from the R/f.
If the radio system passes all tests, return the radio system to operational
readiness.

8-66
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS ACCESSORIES

CHAPTER 9

ACCESSORIES
9.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains accessory infonnation describing support packages and equipment accessories that are
available for the RF-5200 FALCONTM Series Manpack Systems. These items add capabilities, provide
supplemental instruction in operations and maintenance, recommend spares and tools for product preservation and
repair, and list associated documentation to enhance the overall mission effectiveness of the radio systems.
These items may be ordered directly from Harris/RF Communications using the order number provided with each
description.
9.1.1 Support Packages
Support packages are items that are not required to utilize the radio system, but give the user a source of
instruction and a means of maintaining equipment integrity. Support packages are considered and generated for
each maintenance level. For infonnation regarding maintenance levels, refer to Chapter 1, Paragraph 1.2.1. A
summary of support packages and order numbers is provided in Table 9-1. Refer to the following paragraphs:

• Extended Warranties and Service Contracts - Paragraph 9.1.1.1

• Training - Paragraph 9.1.1.2

• Tools - Paragraph 9.1.1.3

• Test Equipment - Paragraph 9.1.1.4

• Maintenance Aids - Paragraph 9.1.1.5

• Manuals - Paragraph 9.1.1.6

• Spares Kits- Paragraph 9.1.1.7

• Hot Test Bed Kits - Paragraph 9.1.1.8

9-1
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS II HARRIS
ACCESSORIES RF COMMUNICATIONS

Table 9-1. Radio System Support Packages

Support Package Maintenance Order Number

Concept Supported
Training Courses Level I and II 10515-0006-0100
Level III 10515-0007-0300 (RT-1694)
10515-0002-0300 (RF-5032PA-125E)
10515-0005-0300 (RF-5033PA-150)
10515-0004-0300 (RF-5030PA-20E)
10515-0008-0300 (RF-382)
10515-0009-0300 (RF-5055PS)
10515-0010-0300 (RF-5056PS)
10515-0018-0300 (RF-5051PS-125)
Level I, II, and III 10515-0006-0600
Tool Kits Level I Not required
Level II 10515-0006-1200
Level III 10515-0007-1300 (RT-1694)
10515-0002-1300 (RF-5032PA-125E)
10515-0005-1300 (RF-5033PA-150)
10515-0004-1300 (RF-5030PA-20E)
10515-0008-1300 (RF-382)
10515-0009-1300 (RF-5055PS)
10515-0010-1300 (RF-5056PS)
10515-0018-1300 (RF-5051PS-125)
Level II and III (system) Available on request*
Test Equipment Kits Level I Not required
Level II Not required
Level III 10515-0007-2300 (RT-1694)
10515-0002-2300 (RF-5032PA-125E)
10515-0005-2300 (RF-5033PA-150)
10515-0004-2300 (RF-5030PA-20E)
10515-0008-2300 (RF-382)
10515-0009-2300 (RF-5055PS)
10515-0010-2300 (RF-5056PS)
10515-0018-2300 (RF-5051PS-125)
Level III (system) Available on request*
Maintenance Aids Level I Not required
Level II Not required
Level III Not required

9-2
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
ACCESSORIES

Table 9-1. Radio System Support Packages - Continued

Maintenance
Support Package Order Number
Concept Supported
Manuals Level I (operator guide) 10372-0004
Level II 10515-0006-4200
Level III 10515-0007-4300 (RT-1694)
10225-0086-01 (RF-5032PA-125E)
10515-0005-4300 (RF-5033PA-150)
10181-0034-01 (RF-5030PA-20E)
10515-0008-4300 (RF-382)
10515-0009-4300 (RF-5055PS)
10515-0010-4300 (RF-5056PS)
10299-0349-01A (RF-5051PS-125)
Spares Kits Level I Not required
Level II Not required
Level III 10515-0007-5300 (RT-1694)
10515-0002-5300 (RF-5032PA-125E)
10515-0005-5300 (RF-5033PA-150)
10515-0004-5300 (RF-5030PA-20E)
10515-0008-5300 (RF-382)
10515-0009-5300 (RF-5055PS)
10515-0010-5300 (RF-5056PS)
10515-0018-5300 (RF-5051PS-125)
* Due to the number of possible radio systems that are available, a customized tools or equipment
list will be generated at no charge.

9-3
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
ACCESSORIES RF COMMUNICATIONS

9.1.1.1 Extended Warranties and Service Contracts

Harris/RF Communications offers extended warranties and service contracts. An extended warranty lengthens the
original warranty provided with Harris/RF Communications equipment and systems. Customers who want
factory-trained field service personnel to assist in the installation, operation, maintenance, and service of their
communications equipment can order a service contract. For more infonnation, call the Harris/RF
Communications maIketing office (tel: 716-244-5830).
9.1.1.2 Training
Training provides the user with valuable operation and maintenance knowledge gained through instruction and
hands-on experience.
When ordering non-English training, please specify at time of order.

• Level J Training provides thorough understanding of basic operating functions, equipment inspection
procedures, and the use of operator cards.

• Level D Training provides the skills for perfonning corrective maintenance, localizing faults to a unit,
perfonnance of general scheduled maintenance procedures, use of basic test equipment, and the use of the
System (Level II) Manual.

• Level ill Training equips maintenance personnel with the skills needed to perfonn corrective
maintenance, localize faults to modules, assemblies, and chassis-mounted components, to conduct
necessary alignment and adjustments, detailed scheduled maintenance, and use of test equipment,
maintenance aids, and the Maintenance (Level III) Manual.

• Radio System Training includes a complete training package that suppons all major radio system units
for Levels I, II, and III.
9.1.1.3 Tools
Tool kits for Maintenance Levels II, III, and IV are available to ensure that common items required to install,
maintain, and disassemble/reassemble the unit are available to the maintainer.

• Level J Tools are not required.

• Level n Tools include items needed to install or remove the unit from the radio system, and to perfonn
general scheduled maintenance.

• Level DJ Tools include items required to perfonn corrective and scheduled maintenance down to the
module or chassis-mounted component

• Level n and ill Radio System Tools include all items required to perfonn Level II and III maintenance
on all major units of the radio system, without duplicating items.

9-4
IJHARRlS RF·5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS ACCESSORIES

9.1.1.4 Test Measurement Equipment

• Level I Test Measurement Equipment is not required.

• Level II Test Measurement Equipment includes measurement items needed to perfonn corrective
maintenance, scheduled maintenance, and fault localization to the unit.

• Level ill Test Measurement Equipment includes measurement items required to perfonn corrective and
scheduled maintenance down to the module or chassis-mounted component, such as a multimeter, power
meter, and oscilloscope.

• Level II and ill Radio System Test Measurement Equipment includes all measurement items required
to perfonn Level II and III maintenance on all major units of the radio system, without duplicating items.
9.1.1.5 Maintenance Aids
Maintenance aids are special or non-standard tools and test equipment required to perfonn corrective and
scheduled maintenance as specified in the applicable maintenance manual procedures. Special/non-standard tools
and test equipment includes items that can only be procured from Harris/RF Communications, such as extender
cards, test fixtures, and modified tools.

• Level I Maintenance Aids are not required.

• Level II Maintenance Aids are not required.

• Level ill Maintenance Aids include items that support corrective and scheduled maintenance tasks
associated with Level III maintenance, such as extender cards, perfonnance fixtures, pressurization kits,
and breakout boxes.

9·5
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS mHARRIS
ACCESSORIES RF COMMUNICATIONS

9.1.1.6 Manuals
Manuals are an invaluable, comprehensive resource for the installation, operation, and maintenance of the power
amplifier. Manuals also provide a listing of the support equipment recommended to optimize the unit's
capabilities and minimize equipment down time.
When ordering non-English manuals, please specify at time of order.
The following is a description of the manuals:

• Level I Manual is in the form of operator cards that guide the user in the installation and basic operation
of the unit. The cards are an abbreviated form of the information provided in the Level II manual, and are
used to facilitate usage in the field.

• Level II Manual contains system level information regarding installation and operation of each
significant piece of equipment in the radio system. It also includes procedures for performing corrective
maintenance and fault localization to the unit, as well as general scheduled maintenance.

• Level ill Manuals provide information required to perform corrective and scheduled maintenance down
to the module or chassis-mounted component.
9.1.1.7 Spares Kits
The maintainer uses spare parts kits to return equipment which has malfunctioned to operational readiness in as
short a period of time as possible. The kit may include those items that are consumed during corrective and
scheduled maintenance tasks, such as solder, tape, tie wraps, grease, etc.

• Level I Spares Kit is not required.

• Level II Spares Kit, other than complete units, contains items that may be externally accessed from the
equipment, and are usually consumable in nature, such as fuses, filters or lamps.

• Level III Spares Kit includes those items used to repair the unit by replacing a faulty module, Printed
Wiring Board (PWB), or chassis mounted component. Both corrective and scheduled maintenance
scenarios are considered. Spares kits contain items sufficient in quantity to provide a basic level of
coverage for a minimal number of units, typically five or less. For spares support of more than five units,
contact Harris/RF Communications directly.
9.1.1.8 Hot Test Bed Kits
Hot Test Bed Kits are available to ensure that equipment necessary to set up a test bed is available to the
maintainer. The test bed is a classification of test equipment from which radio equipment characteristics can be
measured. Hot Test Bed Kits consist of power supplies, signal generators, radio Receiver-Transmitters (R/fs), and
cables.

• Level I Hot Test Bed Kit is not required.

• Level II Hot Test Bed Kit is not required.

• Level III Hot Test Bed Kit for the radio system includes system setup items necessary to test the radio
system at Level III maintenance, without duplicating items.

9-6
mHARRIS RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
RF COMMUNICATIONS ACCESSORIES

9.1.2 Equipment Accessories

Equipment accessories are items that are not provided with the radio system, but can be procured to increase the
application and capabilities of the system. Table 9-2 lists the accessories available for the RF-5200 FALCON'M
Series Manpack System.
Table 9-2. Receiver-Transmitter Accessories
Item Name Description Part Number
Rechargeable Nickel-Cadmium The BB590/U consists of a pair of rechargeable BB-5901U
Battery Nickel-Cadmium (Ni-Cd) batteries for the
AN/pRC-138 Manpack battery case. The average
life of the battery in a high usage/medium power
environment is four - six hours.
Lightweight Lithium Battery The BA-5590/U is a lightweight, long-life battery BA-5590/U
for the AN/PRC-138 Manpack Radio Set. A
10372-0300 Battery Case is used to hold one or
two BA-5590/U batteries. The BA-5590/U cannot
be recharged.
Rechargeable Lead-Acid Battery The BB-490/U consists of a pair of rechargeable BB-4901U
lead-acid batteries for the AN/pRC-138 Manpack
battery case. The average life of this battery in a
high usage/medium power environment is six -
eight hours.
Lightweight Battery Casc The 10530-1300 is a XENOY 6240'" hi-grade, 10530-1300
hi-impact plastic battery case with a 25%
reduction in weight from the standard aluminum
battery case. It holds two standard Ni-Cd or
Lithium battery units.
Battery Case The 10372-0300 is a standard aluminum battery 10372-0300
case which snaps onto the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter back panel and holds two
BB-590/U Ni-Cd, two BB-490/U lead-acid, or two
BA-5590/U Lithium Battery units. An extra case
would allow the user to easily detach a spent
battery and case and install new batteries and a
case onto the back panel of the Rtf.
Battery Charger - Trickle The 10309-0550 provides simultaneous trickle 10309-0550
charging of up to six BB-590/U Ni-Cd batteries.
Charging time of a fully discharged battery is 14
hours. This battery charger operates on 115 to 230
Vac at 50/60 MHz. Specify voltage when ordering.
This charger is not suitable for lead-acid batteries.

9-7
 I) HA RR IS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
ACCESSORIES

Table 9-2. Receiver-Transmitter Accessories - Continued

Description Part Number
Item Name
The 10372-0304 is a fast charger for up to four 10372-0304
Fast Charger
Ni-Cd batteries. This microprocessor- controlled
unit incorporates fast-charge, balancing charge,
maintenance charge, and recovery charge
programs to properly charge and maintain the
BB-590/U and other Ni-Cad banery types. It
operates on 100 to 265 Vac at 50 to 60 Hz. The
typical charge time for one fully discharged
BB-5901U is approximately 30 minutes.
This solar panel operates at 24 Vdc to charge one 10372-0950-01
Solar Charger
nickel-cadmium banery. Charge time depends on
weather conditions. Cables are included.
The OE-505A/PRC is the standard antenna kit for 10530-0240-01
OE-505A/PRC Manpack Whip
Antenna Kit the AN/pRC-138(V)2 Manpack System. The kit
includes an AT-271A/PRC-25 lO-foot (3.1 m)
Collapsible Whip Antenna (10012-0241), a
10530-1215-01 Base and Adapter Assembly, a
10530-1250-01 Whip Adapter Assembly, and a
10372-0249-01 Antenna Bag. One OE-505A/PRC
Whip Antenna Kit is supplied with each
AN/PRC-138(V)2 Transceiver.
The RF-289A is a tactical, portable log-periodic RF-289A
Very High Frequency (VHF)
Log-Periodic Transportable antenna system for operation in the 30 to 90 MHz
Antenna range with a gain of 4 dBi in 30 to 35 MHz,
4.5 dBi in 35to 76 MHz, and 6 dBi forward gain
over average soil. The RF-289A can be configured
for vertical or horizontal polarization and can be
manually rotated. The package includes a 20-foot
(6.1 m) mast, 35 feet (11 m) of RG-58AIU Coax
Cable, ground stakes, a mounting base, guy ropes,
and a hammer.
VHF Omnidirectional, The RF-290 is a tactical, portable, omnidirectional RF-290
Transportable Antenna VHF 30 MHz to 90 MHz antenna. It is easily
erected and designed for broadband operations.
The system comes complete with a 33-foot (10 m)
mast, an 80-foot coax cable with connectors,
ground stakes, a base plate, a guy assembly, and a
hammer.

9-8
Ell HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
ACCESSORIES

Table 9-2. Receiver-Transmitter Accessories - Continued

Item Name Description Part Number
Antenna - Portable Near Vertical The RF-1936P is a NVIS antenna system. It is RF-1936P
Incidence Skywave (NVIS) rapidly deployable for short- to medium-range
communications. The RF-1936P covers the High
Frequency (HF) and 10-VHF spectrums. It can be
erected in five minutes by two people. The system
requires use of an antenna coupler. The package
includes a mast assembly and sections, a base
plate, a hammer, and ground stakes.
Antenna - Portable Dipole The RF-1940 is a lightweight, portable dipole RF-I940
antenna operating in the 3 MHz to 30 MHz range.
Its maximum input power is 500 watts. The unit is
self-contained, using flat spools lengthened
according to the frequency used. An additional
throw line attaches to trees and masts. The RF
connector is BNC for direct connection to a
Manpack.
Vehicular Whip Antenna The SB-VI6B is a vehicular, 16-foot (4.9 m), SB-VI6B
fiberglass whip antenna which covers the full
operating range of the AN-PRC/138 Manpack with
a maximum power output of up to 400 watts. This
antenna is self-supporting with a feed-through base
and mounting hardware.
Vehicular Metallic "V" Antenna The SB-V216B is a vehicular antenna configured SB-V216B
to enhance short-range HF communications by
improving NVIS propagation performance. The
antenna is an adjustable "V" configuration
consisting of two metallic radiators: one 16 feet
(4.9 m) in length and the other 9 feet (2.7 m). The
angle of each radiator is mechanically adjustable
to provide optimum NVIS performance. The
SB-V216B may be configured as a single radiation
element for longer range communications. This
antenna will mount directly to the RF-292
Universal Antenna Mount.
Manpack Radio Carrying Bag The 10372-0460-01 is a radio carrying bag with an 10372-0460-0I
adjustable shoulder strap for forward or side sling
access. The bag attaches to the Backpack Harness
10372-0450-01 for backpack configuration.
Backpack Harness for The 10372-0450-01 consists of a rugged, 10372-0450-01
AN/PRC-138 Manpack lightweight ruck pack harness and frame. It holds
the AN/pRC-138 Manpack in a dorsal access
configuration. The 10372-0460-01 Radio Carrying
Bag fits inside a ruck pack to the harness. It
contains pouches for carrying accessories.

9-9
 I) HA RR IS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS RF COM MUN ICAT IONS
ACCESSORIES

Table 9-2. Receiver-Transmitter Accessories - Continued

Description Part Number
Item Name
The 10372-0470-01 is designed for use by U.S. 10530-0460-01
Manpack Radio Backpack
Army Rangers and consists of a rugged,
lightweight backpack design to fit a variety of
different manpack radios. The backpack has side
pockets for an antenna kit and back pouch for
extra batteries. The backpack contains internal
flaps for kevlar inserts. The 10530-0460-01
provides the ability to store and carry all items that
make up the manpack radio system, plus two extra
batteries.
The 10075-1344-01 is a high-grade, lightweight 10075-1344-01
H-250/U Lightweight Handset
MIL handset for use with the RT-I694
Receiver-Transmitter. One Handset is supplied
with each RF-52oo FALCON Series Transceiver
1M

System. It is recommended for use with the Linear

Predictive Coding (LPC) Digitized Voice Option.
t with RF-3014-01
Headset with Boom Microphone - The RF-3014-01 is a high-grade MIL headse
Dynamic Mic Element - Single an adjustable boom microphone and a single
Earpiece earpiece for use with the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter.
t with RF-3014-02
Headset with Boom Microphone - The RF-3014-02 is a high-grade MIL headse
Dynamic Mic Element - Dual an adjustable boom microphone and a dual
Earpiece earpiece for use with the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter.
The RF-5016-01 is a MIL-grade telegraph key RF-5016-01
CW Key with Knee Clip
mounted on a clip that may be fitted over an
operator's knee. It is useful for vehicular CW
operation, and is used with the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter.
CW Base-Station Key The RF-3016-04 is a MIL-grade telegraph key for RF-3016-04
use with the RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter in base
station applications. The unit includes key, cable,
and plug.
Palm Microphone The noise-canceling microphone in this palm-held RF-294-07
unit includes a built-in, Push-to-Talk (PTT) switch
and a coiled cable that terminates in a standard
(U-229/U) five-contact connector. The RF-294-07
is intended for use with the RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter.
Headset - Dual Earpiece The RF-294-08 is a high-grade, MIL, two-earpiece RF-294-08
headset unit with a flexible headband, a coiled
cable with a clip to attach to the user's clothing,
and a standard (U-229/U) five-contact connector.
The RF-294-08 is intended for use with the
RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter.

9-10
II HARRIS
RF COMMUNICATIONS
RF-5200 FALCON SERIES MANPACK SYSTEMS
ACCESSORIES

Table 9-2. Receiver-Transmitter Accessories - Continued

Item Name Description Part Number
24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit The 10372-0850-01 is a vehicular accessory that 10372-0850-01
allows an RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter to receive
power from a vehicle's 24 Vdc power system. The
Filter/Adapter Unit provides Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI) filtering, as well as spike,
surge, overvoltage, and overcurrent protection.
The Filter/Adapter Unit, along with an RT-1694
Receiver-Transmitter, can be mounted on a
10372-0800-01 Universal Vehicular Shock Mount.
Universal Vehicular Shock Mount The 10372-0800-01 can be used to mount an 10372-0800-01
RT-1694 Receiver-Transmitter and a
10372-0850-01 24 Vdc Filter/Adapter Unit into a
vehicular installation. The 10372-0800-01 can also
be adapted to mount the receiver-transmitter
connected to its battery case.
Vehicular Short Shock Mount The 10372-0880 can be used to mount an RT-1694 10372-0880
Receiver-Transmitter, without its battery case
removed, into a vehicular installation. When
installed in the short shock mount, the
receiver-transmitter receives 24 Vdc power from
an external power amplifier via the front panel
Power Amplifier (PA) connector.

9-11/9-12
 m
HARRIS

HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

1680 University Avenue Rochester, New York 14610-1887 USA
Tel: 716-244-5830. Fax: 716-244-2917, 716-325-1572. TELEX: 240313 AFCOM UR